Home

MATLAB Creating Graphical User Interfaces

1. If you want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details To add an image to a toggle button assign the button s CData property an m by n by 3 array of RGB values that defines a truecolor image You must do this programmatically in the opening function of the UI code file For example the array img defines a 16 by 64 by 3 truecolor image using random values between 0 and 1 generated by rand img rand 16 64 3 set handles togglebutton1 CData img where togglebutton1 is the toggle button s Tag property 6 43 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 44 Note To manage exclusive selection of radio buttons and toggle buttons put them in a button group See Button Group on page 6 48 for more information Panels and Button Groups Panels and button groups are containers that arrange UI components into groups If you move the panel or button group its children move with it and maintain their positions relative to the panel or button group To define panels and button groups you must set certain properties To do this 1 Use the Property Inspector to modify the appropriate properties Open the Property Inspector by selecting View gt Property Inspector or by clicking the Property Inspector button E 2 Inthe layout area select the component
2. c3 Pop up Menu Zl Listbox Toggle Button E Table iy Axes E Panel E3 Button Group EX ActiveX Control Tag figurel English Unit System S I Unit System Calculate Reset Current Point 332 54 Position 544 485 400 140 When you click the Run button the UI appears as shown in the following figure 6 5 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE o Ib cu in English Unit System S Unit System o cuin ai When you enter values for the density and volume of an object and click the Calculate button the program calculates the mass of the object and displays the result next to Mass D V To view the code for these user interface controls open the template in the Layout Editor and click the Editor button amp on the toolbar GUI with Axes and Menu The following figure shows an example of this template GUIDE Templates File Edit View Layout Tools Help OGAa 4 OaXC 4BRS4 PRY Push Button Radio Button didi IM Check iO Edit Text Static Tet Pop up Menu j A BR istha Static Text E Toggle Button E Table inl Axes ata Pop up M Z i Panel ia Button Group X ActiveX Control il Tag figurel Current Point 104 439 Position 644 233 532 440 When you click the Run button on the toolbar
3. 2 Inthe GUIDE Quick Start dialog box select the Blank GUI Default template and then click OK 2 3 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE FY untitled fig bodka File Edit View Layout Tools Help SKA IE ai iA a6h4 as gt Ed K SUBBOE a os 4 Tag figurel Current Point 310 420 Position 520 380 560 420 3 Display the names of the UI components in the component palette a Select File gt Preferences gt GUIDE b Select Show names in component palette c Click OK Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE File Edit View Layout Tools Help AIi 4aOre 44H PSS rnan Ceside Bowen O TT Static Text Pop up Menu El Listbox E Table He Axes E Panel EX ActiveX Control Tag figurel Current Point 335 308 Position 520 380 560 420 Set the Window Size in GUIDE Set the size of the UI window by resizing the grid area in the Layout Editor Click the lower right corner and drag it until the canvas is approximately 3 inches high and 4 inches wide If necessary make the canvas larger 2 5 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE File Edit View Layout Tools Help NHs RAC BHA DSS e r sea E Push Button m Slider Radio Button M Check Box MF Edit Text EE Static Text Pop up Menu Bib tistbox FE Toggle Button E Table ity Axes
4. 6 74 Use Coordinate Readouts 0 0 00 eee 6 74 Drag Components 0 0 00 c eee eee 6 75 Use Arrow Keys to Move Components 6 76 Set the Component s Position Property 6 76 vii viii Contents Align GUIDE UI Components 6 79 Align Objects Tool astres eera cee ens 6 79 Property Inspector 0 0 0 0 eee ees 6 82 Grd and Rulers s e pestana tae ages ha eae aes 6 85 Gude Lines 28 See et hes checked ster dee pth he oe eee hae 6 86 Customize Tabbing Behavior ina GUIDE UI 6 88 Create Menus for GUIDE UIs 6 91 Menus for the Menu Bar 00000005 6 91 Context Menus 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 6 101 Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs 6 108 Toolbar and Tools 0 00 c eee ee eee 6 108 Editing Tool Icons 0 0 0 eee eee 6 116 View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy 6 119 Design Cross Platform UIs in GUIDE 6 120 Default System Font 0 0 0 0 cee eee 6 120 Standard Background Color 6 121 Cross Platform Compatible Units 6 121 UI Design References 0 0 00 00 00 6 123 Save and Run a GUIDE UI 7 Save a GUIDE UL onere e e e eatin E et 7 2 Savea UD eeror tennere i eae hit a a a bee 7 2 Create a Backward Compatible GUIDE Fig File 7 2 Append New Callbacks to an Existing GUIDE Code FG 5 ice lee se ek ae es
5. Uicontrol Properties FAD a0 en expand all gt String Text to display string cell array of char values pipe delimited row vector padded column matrix Y HorizontalAlignment Alignment of uicontrol text center default left right Alignment of the uicontrol text specified as center 1left or right This property determines the justification of the String property text Interactive Control expand all gt Callback Callback function that executes when user interacts with uicontrol default function handle cell array string gt ButtonDownFcn Button press callback function Jjavascript void 0 Align GUIDE UI Components Use the Property Inspector to Align Components The Property Inspector enables you to align components by setting their Position properties A component s Position property is a four element vector that specifies the size and location of the component distance from left distance from bottom width height The values are given in the units specified by the Units property of the component 1 Select the components you want to align See Select Components on page 6 70 for information Select View gt Property Inspector or click the Property Inspector button E In the Property Inspector scroll to the Units property and note its current setting then change the setting to inches Scroll to the Position property This figu
6. hPalettePanelSelectionChange Executes when the user clicks on a new color This is the SectionChangeFcn callback of the uibuttongroup that exclusively manages the tools and color cells that it contains It calls the appropriate callback to service each of the tools and color cells The example also includes the helper functions listed in this table Function Description layoutComponent Dynamically creates the Eraser tool and the color cells in the palette It calls localDefineLayout localUpdateColor Updates the preview of the selected color getSelectedColor Returns the currently selected color which is then returned to the colorPalette caller localDef ineLayout Calculates the preferred color cell and tool sizes for the UI It calls localDefineColors and localDefineTools localDefineTools Defines the tools shown in the palette In this example the only tool is the Eraser button localDef ineColors Defines the colors that are shown in the array of color cells processUserInputs Determines if the property in a property value pair is supported It calls localValidateInput localValidateInput Validates the value in a property value pair Code File Organization The color palette code uses nested functions Its code file is organized in the following sequence 1 Comments displayed in response to the help command 2 Data creation Because the example uses nested functions defining
7. Click and drag aj Panel J corner to resize E Button Group X ActiveX Control Tag figurel Current Point 447 7 Position 520 432 450 368 Layout the Simple GUIDE UI Add align and label the components in the UI 1 Add the three push buttons to the UI Select the push button tool from the component palette at the left side of the Layout Editor and drag it into the layout area Create three buttons positioning them approximately as shown in the following figure Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE File Edit View Layout Tools Help OGHa 4aare s4Bhd PRs gt Push Button a Radio Button M Check Box TT Static Text Ei Listbox E Toggle Buton C as Pan Tag pushbutton Current Point 349 3 Position 322 144 69 22 Add the remaining components to the UI e A static text area A pop up menu e An axes Arrange the components as shown in the following figure Resize the axes component to approximately 2 by 2 inches 2 7 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE File Edit View Layout Tools Help w Push Button E Radio Button Check Box FF Edit Text TATI Static Text G3 Pop up Menu E Table iv Axes fH Panek Tag axesl Current Point 434 294 Position 50 52 201 201 Align t
8. In this section About the Example on page 14 2 View the Example Code on page 14 3 Generate the Graphing Commands and Data on page 14 3 Create the UI and Its Components on page 14 4 Initialize the UI on page 14 7 Define the Callbacks on page 14 8 Updating the Plot on page 14 11 About the Example When you run this example program it initially displays a plot of five random numbers generated by the MATLAB rand 5 command a A axesMenuToolbar Lo X File x as amp plot rand S z Update Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls You can select other plots in the pop up menu Clicking the Update button displays the currently selected plot on the axes The File menu has three options Open displays a dialog from which you can open files on your computer Print opens the Print dialog Clicking Yes in the Print dialog prints the plot Close closes the window The toolbar has two buttons The Open button performs the same function as the Open menu option It displays a dialog from which you can open files on your computer The Print button performs the same function as the Print menu option It opens the Print dialog Clicking Yes in the Print dialog prints the plot View the Example Code Follow these steps to get copies of the example files 1 Set your current folder to one to which you have write access 2 Co
9. In this section About the Example on page 9 46 Implement the List Box on page 9 47 About the Example This example shows how to create a list box to display the files in a folder When you double click a list item MATLAB opens the item Ifthe item is a file MATLAB opens the file using the appropriate application Ifthe item is a folder MATLAB reads the contents of that folder into the list box BB Directory List Lo C GUMools Overview txt close_warning fig close _warning m directory _list fig directory_list m Ibox2 fig Ibox2 m simple_plotter fig simple_plotter m To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE and the with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples lbox2 fileattrib lbox2 w guide lbox2 fig 9 46 Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI 2 From GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button SJ The 1bo0x2 m code displays in the MATLAB Editor Implement the List Box The following sections describe the implementation Specify the Folder on page 9 47 shows how to pass a folder path as an input argument when the program runs Load the List Box on page 9 48 describes the local function that loads the contents of the folder into the list box This local
10. figure Name F14 Simulation Output Visible off NumberTitle off HandleVisibility off IntegerHandle off handles PlotAxes axes Parent handles PlotFigure guidata hObject handles end Plot data pHandles plot PlotData Parent handles PlotAxes Add a legend and bring figure to the front legend pHandles 1 2 end legendStr Make the figure visible and bring it forward figure handles PlotFigure oO The Help Button The Help button callback displays an HTML file in the MATLAB Help browser It uses two commands The which command returns the full path to the file when it is on the MATLAB path The web command displays the file in the Help browser This is the Help button callback function HelpButton_Callback hObject eventdata handles HelpPath which f14ex_help htm1 web HelpPath You can also display the help document in a Web browser or load an external URL For a description of these options see the documentation for the web function Close the UI The Close button callback closes the plot figure if one exists and then closes the UI window The plot figure and the UI window are available from the handles structure The callback executes two steps Checks to see if there is a PlotFigure field in the handles structure and if it contains a valid figure handle you could have closed the figure manually UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters Clos
11. numeric numeric numeric Disallow editing values but this can be changed coledit false false false Set columns all the same width must be in pixels colwdt 60 60 60 Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI Create a uitable on the left side of the figure htable uitable Units normalized Position 0 025 0 03 0 375 0 92 Data count ColumnName colnames ColumnFormat colfmt ColumnWidth colwdt ColumnEditable coledit ToolTipString Select cells to highlight them on the plot CellSelectionCallback select_callback The tableplot function performs these tasks e Passes the count matrix to the table as the Data parameter Specifies the column names using the ColumnName property Specifies that all columns hold numeric data using the ColumnFormat property Specifies that all columns have a width of 60 pixels MATLAB always interprets the ColumnWidth property in pixels Provides a tooltip string for the table Accepts default values for most of the remaining Uitable Properties In the next block of code the tableplot function sets up an axes on the right side of the figure It plots lines and markers in response to the user s actions Create an axes on the right side set x and y limits to the table value extremes and format labels for the demo data haxes axes Units normalized Positi
12. Button 1 Position getrect BackgroundColor uisetcolor Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively When you execute the statement first getrect executes to let you set a position using rbbox When you release the mouse button the uisetcolor dialog opens for you to specify a background color Set Font Characteristics Interactively The uisetfont dialog gives you access to the characteristics of all fonts on your system Use it to set font characteristics for any component that displays text It returns a structure containing data that describes the property values you chose FontData uisetfont object_handle fa Font Font Style Size Arial Bold 10 Plain 8 E Arial Black 9 Arial Narrow Italic Arial Rounded MT Bold Bold Italic 12 Arial Unicode MS 14 AvantGarde 18 Baskerville Old Face 24 Sample The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog 1234567890 FontData FontName Arial FontWeight bold FontAngle normal FontSize 10 FontUnits points uisetfont returns all font characteristics at once You cannot omit any of them unless you delete a field from the structure You can use uisetfont when creating a component that has a String property You can also specify the string itself at the same time by 10 59 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul calling inputd1g which is a dialog that allows you to enter text strings Here is an exampl
13. Center None Add this command following the align command f Visible on Your code file should look like this function simple_gui2 SIMPLE_GUI2 Select a data set from the pop up menu then click one of the plot type push buttons Clicking the button plots the selected data in the axes Create and then hide the UI as it is being constructed f figure Visible off Position 360 500 450 285 Construct the components hsurf uicontrol Style pushbutton String Surf Position 315 220 70 25 hmesh uicontrol Style pushbutton String Mesh Position 315 180 70 25 hcontour uicontrol Style pushbutton String Countour Position 315 135 70 25 htext uicontrol Style text String Select Data Position 325 90 60 15 3A Simple Programmatic UI hpopup uicontrol Style popupmenu String Peaks Membrane Sinc Position 300 50 100 25 ha axes Units Pixels Position 50 60 200 185 align hsurf hmesh hcontour htext hpopup Center None Make the UI visible f Visible on end 6 Run your code by typing simple_gui2 at the command line You can select a data set in the pop up menu and click the push buttons but nothing happens This is because there is no callback code in the file to service the pop up menu or the buttons ED Figure coe C fal File Edit View Insert Tools Desk
14. H untitled fig lols x J File Edit View Layout Tools Help OGa 200C abs Pe gt Lh Select a 50 100 150 a 250 at 350 a S E Figure Untitled EY Axes axes1 UlControl sliderl Slider T i UlControl pushbutton2 Surf E UIControl pushbutton3 Mesh UIControl pushbutton4 Contour fT UIControl text2 Select Data Em UlControl popupmenul Peaks 8 289 Position 222 85 139 213 To determine a component s place in the hierarchy select it in the Layout Editor It is automatically selected in the Object Browser Similarly if you select an object in the Object Browser it is automatically selected in the Layout Editor 6 119 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Design Cross Platform Uls in GUIDE 6 120 In this section Default System Font on page 6 120 Standard Background Color on page 6 121 Cross Platform Compatible Units on page 6 121 Default System Font By default user interface controls uicontrols use the default font for the platform on which they are running For example when displaying your UI on PCs uicontrols use MS San Serif When your program runs on a different platform it uses that computer s default font This provides a consistent look with respect to your UI and other applications If you have set the FontName property to a named font and want to return to the default value
15. Run1 num2str Kf num2str Ki 5 else ResultsStr ResultsStr Run num2str ResultNum num2str Kf num2str Ki end set handles ResultsList String ResultsStr 9 63 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 64 Store the new ResultsData handles ResultsData ResultsData guidata hObject handles Remove Results from List Box The Remove button callback deletes any selected item from the Results list list box It also deletes the corresponding run data from the handles structure When you click the Remove button the callback performs these tasks Determines which list box items are selected when you click the Remove button and remove those items from the list box String property by setting each item to the empty matrix Removes the deleted data from the handles structure Displays the string lt empty gt and disables the Remove and Plot buttons using the Enable property if all the items in the list box are removed Save the changes to the handles structure guidata Here is the Remove button callback function RemoveButton_Callback hObject eventdata handles currentVal get handles ResultsList Value resultsStr get handles ResultsList String numResults size resultsStr 1 Remove the data and list entry for the selected value resultsStr currentVal handles ResultsData currentVal If there are no other entries disable the Remove and Plot button an
16. The open statement is called within a try catch block to capture errors in an error dialog box errord1g instead of returning to the command line You can extend the file types that the open command recognizes to include any file having a three character extension Do this by creating a MATLAB code file with the name openxyz m xyz is the file extension for the type of files to be handled Do not however take this approach for opening FIG files because openfig mis a MATLAB function which is needed to open UIs For more information see open and openfig listbox1_Callback code function listbox1_Callback hObject eventdata handles get handles figure1 SelectionType If double click if strcemp get handles figure1 SelectionType open index_selected get handles listbox1 Value file list get handles listbox1 String Item selected in list box filename file_list index_selected If folder if handles is_dir handles sorted_index index_selected cd filename Load list box with new folder load_listbox pwd handles else path name ext fileparts filename switch ext case fig Open FIG file with guide command guide filename otherwise Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI try Use open for other file types open filename catch ex errordlg ex getReport basic File Type Error modal end end end end 9 51 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls Plot Workspace Variables in
17. function hs addcomponents add components save handles in a struct hs fig figure Visible off Resize off Tag fig hs btn uicontrol hs fig Position 10 340 70 30 String Plot Sine Tag BUTTON sc Callback plotsine hs ax axes Parent hs fig Position 0 20 0 13 0 71 0 75 Tag ax end function plotsine hObject callbackdata theta 0 pi 64 6 pi y sin theta plot hs ax theta y end end This code performs the following tasks The main function myui calls the addcomponents function The addcomponents function returns a structure hs containing the handles to all the UI components The addcomponents function creates a figure an axes and a button each with specific Position values Notice that the Resize property of the figure is off This value disables the resizing capability of the figure Notice that the Visible property of the figure is off inside the addcomponents function The value changes to on after addcomponents returns to the calling function Doing this delays the figure display until after MATLAB adds all the components Thus the resulting UI has a clean appearance when it starts up The plotsine function plots the sine function inside the axes when the user clicks the button 10 35 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul By Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGAS k AAE9RK
18. 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 6 For a push button the String property defines the label on the button Here it is defined as the string Update Setting the Callback property to hUpdateButtonCallback specifies the function hUpdateButtonCallback to be the function that executes when the user presses the push button This callback function is a nested function in the same file The File Menu and Its Menu Items These statements define the File menu and the three items it contains hFileMenu uimenu File menu Parent hMainFigure HandleVisibility callback Label File hOpenMenuitem uimenu Open menu item Parent hFileMenu Label Open HandleVisibility callback Callback hOpenMenuitemCallback hPrintMenuitem uimenu Print menu item Parent hFileMenu Label Print HandleVisibility callback Callback hPrintMenuitemCallback hCloseMenuitem uimenu Close menu item Parent hFileMenu Label Close Separator on HandleVisibility callback Callback hCloseMenuitemCallback The uimenu function creates both the main menu File and the menu items under it For the main menu and each of its items set the Parent property to the handle of the desired parent to create the menu hierarchy you want Here setting the Parent property of the File menu to hMainFigure makes it
19. Add Items to the Context Menu on page 6 103 See How to Update a Menu Item Check on page 8 24 for a code example Enable this item when the menu is first opened by checking Enable this item This allows the user to select this item when the menu is first opened If you clear this option the menu item appears dimmed when the menu is first opened and the user cannot select it Specify a Callback for the menu that performs the action associated with the menu item If you have not yet saved the UI the default value is s automatic When you save the UI and if you have not changed this field GUIDE automatically creates a 6 105 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE callback in the code file using a combination of the Tag field and the UI file name The callback s name does not display in the Callback field of the Menu Editor but selecting the menu item does trigger it You can also type an unquoted string into the Callback field to serve as a callback It can be any valid MATLAB expression or command For example the string set gca Color y sets the current axes background color to yellow However the preferred approach to performing this operation is to place the callback in the UI code file This avoids the use of gca which is not always reliable when several figures or axes exist Here is a version of this callback coded as a function in the UI code file function axesyellow_Callback hObject eventdata handles
20. Command line arguments The colorPalette function then defines the valid custom properties in a 3 by 3 cell array mPropertyDefs The supported custom property value pairs parent localValidateInput mPaletteParent The first column contains the property name The second column contains a function handle for the function localValidateInput that validates the input property values 14 36 UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments The third column is the local variable that holds the value of the property colorPalette then initializes the properties with default values mPaletteParent Use input property parent to initialize Process the Input Arguments The processUserInputs helper function processes the input property value pairs colorPalette calls processUserInputs before it creates the components to determine the parent of the components processUserInputs 1 processUserInputs sequences through the inputs if any and tries to match each property name to a string in the first column of the mPropertyDefs cell array 2 Ifit finds a match processUserInputs assigns the value that was input for the property to its variable in the third column of the mPropertyDefs cell array 3 processUserInputs then calls the helper function specified in the second column of the mPropertyDefs cell array to validate the value that was passed in for the property Pass Output to a Caller on Returning
21. SizeChangedFcn End user resizes a button group figure uipanel figure or panel whose Resize uibuttongroup property is on SelectionChanged End user selects a different radio uibuttongroup button or toggle button within a button group WindowButtonDa End user presses a mouse button figure while the pointer is in the figure window WindowButtonMi End user moves the pointer within figure the figure window WindowButtonUj End user releases a mouse button figure WindowKeyPress End user presses a key while the figure pointer is on the figure or any of its child objects Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property WindowKeyRelea End user releases a key while the figure pointer is on the figure or any of its child objects WindowScrollWh End user turns the mouse wheel figure while the pointer is on the figure How to Specify Callback Property Values To associate a callback function with a UI component set the value of one of the component s callback properties to be a reference to the callback function Typically you do this when you define the component but you can change callback property values anywhere in your code Specify the callback property value in one of these ways Specify a Function Handle on page 11 7 Specify a Cell Array on page 11 8 This cell array contains a function
22. Tag axes_context_menu Callback automatic View Use the New Menu Item button to create menu items that are displayed in the context menu 1 Adda Blue background color menu item to the menu by selecting axes context_menu and clicking the New Menu Item tool A temporary numbered menu item label Untitled appears 6 103 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Es betel ot 1 x Context Menu Properties Tag axes_context_menu Callback automatic Menu Bar Context Menus 2 Fillin the Label and Tag fields for the new menu item For example set Label to Blue background color and set Tag to blue_background Click outside the field for the change to take effect 6 104 Create Menus for GUIDE Uls Menu Editor os e js BHEBi 7t x Menu Properties E axes_context_menu P Blue background color Label Blue background color Tag blue_background Accelerator Ctrl None C Separator above this item Check mark this item V Enable this item Callback automatic View More Properties Menu Bar Context Menus You can also modify menu items in these ways Display a separator above the menu item by checking Separator above this item Display a check next to the menu item when the menu is first opened by checking Check mark this item A check indicates the current state of the menu item See the example in
23. When you click Quit the UI destroys the figure exiting immediately To avoid errors due to quitting while the animation is running the while loop must know whether the axes object still exists while ishandle handles axes1 plotting code end You can write the spinstopbutton Callback function without a while loop which avoids you having to test that the figure still exists You can for example create a timer Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE object that handles updating the graphics This example does not explore the technique but you can find information about programming timers in Use a MATLAB Timer Object Make a Movie of the Animation Selecting the Make movie check box before clicking Spin causes the application to record each frame displayed in the while loop of the spinstopbutton Callback routine When you select this check box the animation runs more slowly because the following block of code executes filming handles movie if ishandle handles axes1 amp amp filming gt O amp amp filming lt 361 globeframes filming getframe Capture axes in movie filming filming 1 end Because it is the value of a check box handles movie is either 0 or 1 When itis 1 a copy filming of it keeps a count of the number of frames saved in the globeframes matrix which contains the axes CData and colormap for each frame You cannot toggle saving the movie on or off while the globe is spinning b
24. f figure Visible off Position 360 500 450 285 The call to the figure function uses two property value pairs e The Visible property makes the window invisible so that the user cannot see the components being added or initialized The window becomes visible when the UI has all its components and is initialized 3A Simple Programmatic UI The Position property is a four element vector that specifies the location of the UI on the screen and its size distance from left distance from bottom width height Default units are pixels Add Components to the Simple Programmatic UI Create the push buttons static text pop up menu and axes components to the UI 1 Following the call to figure add these statements to your code file to create three push button components Construct the components hsurf uicontrol Style pushbutton String Surf Position 315 220 70 25 uicontrol Style pushbutton String Mesh Position 315 180 70 25 hcontour uicontrol Style pushbutton String Countour Position 315 135 70 25 hmesh Each statement uses a series of uicontrol property value pairs to define a push button The Style property specifies that the uicontrol is a push button The String property specifies the label on each push button Surf Mesh and Contour The Position property specifies the location and size of each push button distance from left d
25. gouraud props Cdata topo props Parent hgrotate hsurf surface x y Z props colormap cmap Tip You can create MATLAB structs that contain values for sets of parameters and provide them to functions instead of parameter value pairs and save the structs to MAT files for later use 9 75 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 76 The surface function plots the surface into the axes Setting the Parent of the surface to hgrotate puts the surface object under the control of the hgtransform that spins the globe see the illustration in Orient the Globe and Graticule on page 9 76 By setting EdgeColor to none the globe displays face colors only with no grid lines which by default display in black The colormap function sets the colormap for the surface to the 64 by 3 colormap cmap defined in the code which is appropriate for terrain display While you can use more colors 64 is sufficient given the relative coarseness of the texture map 1 by 1 degree resolution Plot the Graticule Unlike the globe grid the graticule grid displays with no face colors and gray edge color You turn the graticule grid on and off by clicking the Show grid button Like the terrain map it is a surfaceplot object however the mesh function creates it rather than the surface function as follows hmesh mesh gx gy gz parent hgrotate FaceColor none EdgeColor 5 5 5 set hmesh Visible off The state of th
26. handles not created until after all CreateFcns X X X Hint popupmenu controls usually have a white background on Windows if ispc amp amp isequal get hObject BackgroundColor get 0 defaultUicontrolBackgroundColor set hObject BackgroundColor white end set hObject String Red Green Blue The last line set hObject String Red Green Blue populates the contents of the pop up menu If you are developing a UI programmatically without GUIDE then populate the pop up menu when you create it For example function myui figure uicontrol Style popupmenu String Red Green Blue Position 40 70 80 20 end Callbacks for Specific Components Change the Selected Item When the end user selects an item the pop up menu s Value property changes to a number that corresponds to the item s position in the menu For example a value of 1 corresponds to the first item in the list If you want to change the selection in your UI code then change the Value property to another number between 1 and the number of items in the menu For example you can use the handles structure in GUIDE to access the pop up menu and change the Value property set handles popupmenu1 Value 2 The first argument handles popupmenu1 might be different in your code depending on the value of the pop up menu Tag property Write the Callback Function This code is an example
27. peaks_data peaks 35 membrane data membrane x y meshgrid 8 5 8 r sqrt x 2ty 2 eps sinc_data sin r r Create a plot in the axes current_data peaks_ data surf current_data Assign a name to appear in the window title Name Simple GUI Move the window to the center of the screen movegui f center Make the UI visible f Visible on 3A Simple Programmatic UI 3 10 Verify Code and Run the Program Make sure your code appears as it should and then run it 1 Verify that your code file looks like this function simple_gui2 SIMPLE _GUI2 Select a data set from the pop up menu then click one of the plot type push buttons Clicking the button plots the selected data in the axes X Create and then hide the UI as it is being constructed figure Visible off Position 360 500 450 285 h amp Xe 6 Construct the components hsurf uicontrol Style pushbutton String Surf Position 315 220 70 25 Callback surfbutton_Callback hmesh uicontrol Style pushbutton String Mesh Position 315 180 70 25 Callback meshbutton_Callback hcontour uicontrol Style pushbutton String Countour Position 315 135 70 25 Callback contourbutton_Callback uicontrol Style text String Select Data Position 325 90 60 15 hpopup uicontrol Style popupmenu String Peaks
28. 400 300 300 150 b1 uicontrol fh Position 30 10 60 30 String B1 b2 uicontrol fh Position 50 50 60 30 String B2 b3 uicontrol fh Position 10 80 60 30 String B3 Figure 1 File Edit View Inser Tool Deskto Windov Help gt OGMSs R RRODRA woe ee Note Each of the three following align examples starts with these unaligned push buttons and repositions them in different ways In practice when you create buttons with Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively uicontrol and do not specify a Position their location is always 20 20 60 20 in pixels That is if you keep creating them with default positions they lie on top of one another Align Components Horizontally The following statement moves the push buttons horizontally to the right of their bounding box It does not alter their vertical positions The figure shows the original bounding box align b1 b2 b3 Right None Figure 1 File Edit View Inser Tool Deskto Windov Help UGMS k AARVODEA Align Components Horizontally While Distributing Them Vertically The following statement moves the push buttons horizontally to the center of their bounding box and adjusts their vertical placement The Fixed option makes the distance between the boxes uniform Specify the distance in points 1 point 1 72 inch In this example the distance is seven points The push buttons
29. BusyAction queue ButtonDownFcn Zi Clim 1011 In the Property Inspector select the String property and then replace the existing value with the word Surf Click outside the String field The push button label changes to Surf 2 11 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 12 Push Button 5 Click each of the remaining push buttons in turn and repeat steps 3 and 4 Label the middle push button Mesh and the bottom button Contour List Pop Up Menu Items The pop up menu provides a choice of three data sets peaks membrane and sinc These data sets correspond to MATLAB functions of the same name This topic shows you how to list those data sets as choices in the pop menu 1 In the layout area click the pop up menu 2 In the Property Inspector click the button next to String The String dialog box displays a E Inspector matlab ui control UIC o amp 2 ae Bi e aes E Position 69 8 5 154 16 2 2 462 SliderStep EB 1x2 double array 2 cing E oyen Style Units UserData Umha sm Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE 3 Replace the existing text with the names of the three data sets peaks membrane and sinc Press Enter to move to the next line ox eon 4 When you finish editing the items click OK The first item in your list peaks appears in the pop up menu in the layout area Peaks Modify the Stati
30. Callback is the name of the property surfbutton_ Callback is the name of the callback that services the Surf push button 2 Tothe uicontrol statement that defines the Mesh push button add the property value pair Callback meshbutton_Callback 3 Tothe uicontrol statement that defines the Contour push button add the property value pair Callback contourbutton_ Callback 4 Tothe uicontrol statement that defines the pop up menu add the property value pair Callback popup_menu_Callback For more information see Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow on page 11 5 Create a Simple UI Programmatically Initialize the Simple Programmatic UI Initialize the UI so it is ready for the user when the code makes the UI visible Make the UI behave properly when it is resized by changing the component and figure units to normalized This causes the components to resize when the UI is resized Normalized units map the lower left corner of the figure window to 0 0 and the upper right corner to 1 0 1 0 Replace this code in editor Make the UI visible f Visible on with this code Initialize the UI Change units to normalized so components resize automatically f Units normalized ha Units normalized hsurf Units normalized hmesh Units normalized hcontour Units normalized htext Units normalized hpopup Units normalized Generate the data to plot
31. Membrane Sinc Position 300 50 100 25 Callback popup_menu_Callback ha axes Units pixels Position 50 60 200 185 align hsurf hmesh hcontour htext hpopup Center None htext Initialize the UI Change units to normalized so components resize automatically f Units normalized ha Units normalized hsurf Units normalized hmesh Units normalized hcontour Units normalized htext Units normalized hpopup Units normalized Generate the data to plot Create a Simple UI Programmatically peaks data peaks 35 membrane_data membrane x y meshgrid 8 5 8 r sqrt x 2t y 2 eps sinc_data sin r r Create a plot in the axes current_data peaks data surf current_data Assign the a name to appear in the window title Name Simple GUI h Move the window to the center of the screen movegui f center Make the window visible Visible on h Pop up menu callback Read the pop up menu Value property to determine which item is currently displayed and make it the current data This callback automatically has access to current_data because this function is nested at a lower level function popup_menu_Callback source eventdata Determine the selected data set str get source String val get source Value Set current data to the selected data set switch str val case Peaks
32. Position 40 30 220 220 bhi uicontrol ph Style pushbutton String Contour Position 20 20 80 30 bh2 uicontrol ph Style pushbutton String Mesh Position 20 60 80 30 bh3 uicontrol ph Style pushbutton String Surf Position 20 100 80 30 r zy Figure 1 File Edit View Inset Tools Desktop Window Help QGas kF AQV9004 2 08 ao 4 Select Data 0 8 pea 0 6 0 4 You can obtain the default tab order for a figure panel or button group by looking at its Children property For the example this command gets the children of the uipanel ph ch ph Children ch 10 63 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 64 3x1 UIControl array UIControl Surf UIControl Mesh UIControl Contour The default tab order is the reverse of the child order Contour then Mesh then Surf Note Displaying the children in this way shows only those children that have their HandleVisibility property set to on Use allchild to retrieve children regardless of their handle visibility In this example the default order is pop up menu followed by the panel s Contour Mesh and Surf push buttons in that order and then back to the pop up menu You cannot tab to the axes component or the static text component Try modifying the code to create the pop up menu following the creation of the Contour push button and before the Mesh push button Now execute the
33. R2014b and later If you are using an earlier release use the set function instead For example change f Visible on toset f Visible on Create a Simple UI Programmatically To run the code go to the Run section in the Editor tab Then click Run gt Create a Code File for the Simple Programmatic UI Create a function file as opposed to a script file which contains a sequence of MATLAB commands but does not define functions At the MATLAB prompt type edit 2 Type the following statement in the first line of the Editor function simple_gui2 3 Following the function statement type these comments ending with a blank line The comments display at the command line in response to the help command SIMPLE_GUI2 Select a data set from the pop up menu then click one of the plot type push buttons Clicking the button plots the selected data in the axes Leave a blank line here 4 At the end of the file after the blank line add an end statement Note You need the end statement to specify the end of the function because the example uses nested functions To learn more see Nested Functions 5 Save the file in your current folder or at a location that is on your MATLAB path Create a Figure for the Simple Programmatic UI Add the following lines before the end statement in your file to create a figure and position it on the screen Create and then hide the UI as it is being constructed
34. and sets the slider label to display the value set handles periodsldr Min 0 01 Max 2 set handles periodsldr Value get handles timer Period set handles slidervalue String num2str get handles periodsldr Value A call to surf renders the peaks data in the axes adding the surfaceplot handle to the handles structure handles surf surf handles display peaks Finally a call to guidata saves the handles structure contents guidata hObject handles startbtn_Callback startbtn_ Callback calls timer start method if the timer is not already running if strcemp get handles timer Running off start handles timer end stopbin_Callback stopbtn_Callback calls the timer stop method if the timer is currently running if strcmp get handles timer Running on stop handles timer end periodsldr_Callback periodsldr_ Callback is called each time you move the slider It sets the timer period to the slider current value after removing unwanted precision Read the slider value Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI period get handles periodsldr Value Timers need the precision of periods to be greater than about 1 millisecond so truncate the value returned by the slider period period mod period 01 Set slider readout to show its value set handles slidervalue String num2str period If timer is on stop it reset the period and start it again if str
35. box that asks you if you want to change the existing number or cancel your change This callback uses the index pointer handles Index to update the new number in the address book and to revert to the previously displayed number if you click Cancel in the question dialog box Both the current address book and the index pointer are saved in the handles structure so that this data is available to other callbacks Contact_Phone_Callback function Contact_Phone_Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin Current_Phone get handles Contact_Phone string If either one is empty then return if isempty Current_Phone return end Get the current list of addresses from the handles structure Addresses handles Addresses Answer questdlg Do you want to change the phone number Change Phone Number Yes Cancel Yes switch Answer 9 13 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 14 case Yes If no name match was found create a new contact Addresses handles Index Phone Current_Phone handles Addresses Addresses guidata hObject handles return case Cancel Revert back to the original number set handles Contact_Phone String Addresses handles Index Phone return end Paging Through Entries Prev Next By clicking the Prev and Next buttons you can page back and forth through the entries in the address book The Callback property of both push buttons are set to call Prev_Next_Callback o
36. examples tablestat fileattrib tablestat w guide tablestat fig 9 31 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 2 Inthe GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button El The tablestat m code file opens in the MATLAB Editor Recreate the Ul In the GUIDE Layout Editor the tablestat UI looks like this ry e fe File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGe 4aOre 4B GPRS 50 100 150 200 250 200 250 400 aso 500 550 a oA Sunspots v Year Plots o l l RE cinch picks Fi RAET roa Ei r Sunspots v Year Plots rr mm Ep a me sy 73 X a Population Selection 179 1z9 No ow oO 72 8BSB88N5 29 Taa fiqurel Current Point 245 402 Position 520 321 559 479 9 32 Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI Perform the following steps in GUIDE and in the Property Inspector to generate the In the Command Window type guide select the Blank GUI template and then click OK Tl ae Use the Panel tool to drag out the three uipanels into the positions shown above Keep the defaults for their Tag properties which are uipanel1 uipanel2 and uipane13 Create in order A long panel on the left In the Property Inspector set its Title property value to Data Set A panel on the lower right half the height of the first panel In the Property Inspector set its Title property
37. handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA switch get eventdata NewValue Tag Get Tag of selected object case radiobutton1 display Radio button 1 case radiobutton2 display Radio button 2 case togglebuttont display Toggle button 1 case togglebutton2 display Toggle button 2 X X X X XM end 8 21 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 22 When the end user selects a radio button or toggle button in the button group this function determines which button the user selected based on the button s Tag property Then it executes the code inside the appropriate case Note The button group s SelectedObject property contains a handle to the button that user selected You can use this property elsewhere in your UI code to determine which button the user selected Menu Item The code in this section contains example callback functions that respond when the end user selects Edit gt Copy gt To File in this menu Callbacks for Specific Components P 2 copy_to_file_menu2 To File function edit_menu_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to edit_menu see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA display Edit menu selected oe function copy_menu_item_Callback hObject eventdata handles 8 23 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 24 hObje
38. uitable component or figure Callback End user triggers the component uicontextmenu uicontrol For example selecting a menu uimenu item moving a slider or pressing a push button CellEditCallback End user edits a value in a table uitable whose cells are editable CellSelectionCall End user selects cells in a table uitable ClickedCallback End user clicks the push tool or uitoggletool uipushtool toggle tool with the left mouse button CloseRequestFcn The figure closes figure 11 codea Programmatic Ul 11 6 Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property CreateFcn Callback executes when MATLAB axes figure uibuttongroup creates the object but before itis uicontextmenu uicontrol displayed uimenu uipushtool uipanel uitable uitoggletool uitoolbar DeleteFcn Callback executes just before axes figure uibuttongroup MATLAB deletes the figure uicontextmenu uicontrol uimenu uipushtool uipanel uitable uitoggletool uitoolbar KeyPressFen End user presses a keyboard key figure uicontrol uipanel while the pointer is on the object uipushtool uitable uitoolbar KeyReleaseFcn End user releases a keyboard key figure uicontrol uitable while the pointer is on the object OffCallback Executes when the State of a uitoggletool toggle tool changes to off OnCallback Executes when the State of a uitoggletool toggle tool changes to on
39. uninterruptible TooltipString Interruptible off Interruptible off Callback wait_uninterruptible Here is the command that creates the Surf Plot queue push button Notice that the BusyAction property is set to queue hsurf_queue uicontrol h_panel2 Style pushbutton Position 30 200 110 30 String Surf Plot queue BusyAction queue TooltipString BusyAction queue Callback surf_queue 13 5 13 Manage Callback Execution 13 6 Here is the command that creates the Mesh Plot cancel push button Notice that the BusyAction property is set to cancel hmesh_cancel uicontrol h_panel2 Style pushbutton Position 30 130 110 30 String Mesh Plot cancel BusyAction cancel TooltipString BusyAction cancel Callback mesh_cancel See Also drawnow timer uiwait waitfor Related Examples Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI Use a MATLAB Timer Object Examples of Uls Created Programmatically e Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic UIs on page 14 2 Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI on page 14 12 Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI on page 14 20 e UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments on page 14 32 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls 14 2
40. 1 end end Get the appropriate data for the index in selected Current_Name Addresses i Name Current_Phone Addresses i Phone set handles Contact_Name string Current_Name set handles Contact_Phone string Current_Phone Update the index pointer to reflect the new index handles Index i guidata hObject handles Save File When you make changes to an address book the File submenus Save and Save As enable you to save the current MAT file or save it as a new MAT file These menus were created with the Menu Editor Tools gt Menu Editor and use the same callback Save Callback Save_Callback on page 9 16 in address_book m uses the menu Tag property also specified in the Menu Editor to identify whether Save or Save As is the callback object that is the object whose handle is passed in as the first argument to the Save Callback The handles structure contains the Addresses structure which the UI must save handles Addresses as well as the name of the currently loaded MAT file handles LastFile When you change a name or number in the UI 9 15 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 16 the Contact_Name_Callback or the Contact_Phone_Callback updates handles Addresses If you select Save the save function is called to save the current MAT file with the new names and phone numbers If you select Save As a dialog box displays which enables you to select the name of an existing MA
41. 3 From the View menu deselect Show Toolbar From the View menu deselect Show Status Bar Select File gt Preferences and then clear Show names in component palette GUIDE Components GUIDE Components The component palette at the left side of the Layout Editor contains the components that you can add to your UI You can display it with or without names The following image shows the component palette with names displayed Lk select EE Push Button Slider ial Edit Text 1 Static Text 3 Pop upMenu E Table l FZ Axes E Panel 3 Button Group X ActiveX Control When you first open the Layout Editor the component palette contains only icons To display the names of the UI components select File gt Preferences gt GUIDE check the box next to Show names in component palette and then click OK See also Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 and Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs 6 13 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 14 Component Icon Description Push Button Push buttons generate an action when clicked For on page 6 25 example an OK button might apply settings and close a dialog box When you click a push button it appears depressed when you release the mouse button the push button appears raised Slider on page Sliders accept numeric input within a specified range by 6 27 enabling the use
42. 5 by 5 matrix returned by the magic 5 command You can adjust the width and height of the table to accommodate the extent of the data The uitable s Position property controls the outer bounds of the table and the Extent property indicates the extent of the data Set the last two values in the Position property to the corresponding values in the Extent property tb Position 3 tb Position 4 tb Extent 3 tb Extent 4 10 21 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 22 You can change several other characteristics of the table by setting certain properties To control the user s ability to edit the table cells set the Column Editable property To make your application respond when the user edits a cell define a CellEditCallback function To add or change row striping set the RowStriping property To specify row and column names set the RowName and ColumnName properties To format the data in the table set the ColumnFormat property See Uitable Properties for the entire list of properties If you are building a UI using GUIDE you can set many of the uitable properties using the Table Property Editor For more information see Create a Table Panels This code creates a panel f figure p uipanel f Title My Panel Position 25 1 5 8 Add Components to a Programmatic UI Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help O
43. 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE CY Table Property Editor sz Columns Rows Data q 10 display a column name over multiple lines i e to wrap the text to the next line use a to insert a line break when Colors typing in the Name field Column Headers Select this option to display column names Do not show column headers Show num Column headers ow names entered below as the column headers Column Definitions Name Auto Width Width px Editable Insert 3 7 i i Bra Make third as Enter column and fourth Specify the names here columns display of the Edit editable column here ok J cance Apply Help For the Rate column select Numeric For the Amount Column select Custom and in the Custom Format Editor choose Bank 6 60 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Select an output format for numeric values 3 1416 Scaled fixed point with 4 digits precision 3 14159265358979 Scaled fixed point with 7 14 digits precision 3 1416e 000 Floating point with 4 digits precision 3 141592653589793e 000 Floating point with 7 14 digits precision 3 1416 Best of fixed or floating point with 4 digits precision 3 14159265358979 Best of fixed or floating point with 7 14 digits precision 3 1416e 000 Engineering format with 4 digits precision 3 1415926535897
44. 8 22 and How to Update a Menu Item Check on page 8 24 for programming information and basic examples Additional Drop Down Menus To create additional drop down menus use the New Menu button in the same way you did to create the File menu For example the following figure also shows an Edit drop down menu Cascading Menus To create a cascading menu select the menu item that will be the title for the cascading menu then click the New Menu Item button In the example below Copy is a cascading menu Create Menus for GUIDE Uls Menu Properties Label to file Tag edit_copy_tofile Accelerator Ctrl None Separator above this item Check mark this item V Enable this item Callback automatic Note See Menu Item on page 8 22 for information about programming menu items The following Menu Editor illustration shows three menus defined for the figure menu bar 6 99 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE be mie ot x File iT Save S E Edit 4 to clipboard gt I to file J View Menubar Toolbar B Menu Properties Label Tool Palette Tag view toolpalette r Accelerator Ctrl None Separator above this item E Check mark this item Enable this item Callback Ssautomatic View More Properties When you run your program the menu titles appear in the men
45. Book Address Book Error end UI Behavior Open and Load MAT File on page 9 11 Retrieve and Store Data on page 9 11 Data Update Confirmation on page 9 13 Paging Through Entries Prev Next on page 9 14 Save File on page 9 15 e Clear UI Fields on page 9 17 UI That Uses Persistent Data Open and Load MAT File The address book UI contains a File gt Open menu option for loading address book MAT files When you select this option Open_Callback on page 9 11 in address_book m opens a dialog box that enables you to browse for files The dialog box returns the file name and the path to the file which are passed to fullfile to ensure the path is properly constructed for any platform The Check_And_Load function validates and loads the new address book For information on creating the menu see Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 Open_Callback function Open_Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin filename pathname uigetfile mat All MAT Files mat All Files Select Address Book If Cancel is selected then return if isequal filename pathname 0 0 return Otherwise construct the full file name and _and load the file else File fullfile pathname filename if the MAT file is not valid do not save the name if Check_And_Load File handles handles LastFIle File guidata hObject handles end end
46. GUIDE Add Items to a Menu Use the New Menu Item tool to create menu items that are displayed in the drop down menu 1 Add an Open menu item under File by selecting File then clicking the New Menu Item button in the toolbar A temporary numbered menu item label Untitled appears f Es Menu Editor r kainai BEA Ea m New Menu Item Menu Properties z File l Label File Tag file_menu Accelerator Ctrl None Separator above this item F Check mark this item V Enable this item Callback automatic More Properties Menu Bar Context Menus 2 Fillin the Label and Tag fields for the new menu item For example set Label to Open and set Tag to menu_file_open Click outside the field for the change to take effect 6 96 Create Menus for GUIDE Uls A E Menu Editor Ae mlieot x z Fil Menu Properties ile as Label Open Tag menu_file_open Accelerator Ctrl O Z E Separator above this item Check mark this item V Enable this item Callback automatic Menu Bar Context Menus You can also Choose an alphabetic keyboard accelerator for the menu item with the Accelerator pop up menu In combination with Ctrl this is the keyboard equivalent for a menu item that does not have a child menu Note that some accelerators may be used for other purposes on your sys
47. GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 for details Note To see how the templates work you can view their code and look at their callbacks You can also modify the callbacks for your own purposes To view the code file for any of these templates open the template in the Layout Editor and click the Editor button on the toolbar Blank GUI The following figure shows an example of this template 6 3 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE T untitled fi eje File View Layout Tools Help AI ERL EALA ERAL ie Push Button a Slider Radio Button J M Check Box elt Edit Text TT Static Text 5 Pop up Menu El Listbox E Toggle Button Fete int Axes j E Panel H oj Button Group EX ActiveX Control_ Tag figurel Current Point 335 308 Position 520 380 560 420 Select this template when the other templates are not suitable for the UI you want to create GUI with Uicontrols The following figure shows an example of this template The user interface controls shown in this template are the push buttons radio buttons edit text and static text GUIDE Templates T untitled fig File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGE 4aO 4B HRS Lm select Push Button a Slider Radio Button M Check Box elt Edit Text TAT Static Text
48. If a function calls the colorPalette function with an output argument it returns a function handle that you can call to get the currently selected color The function calls colorPalette only once The call creates the color palette in the specified parent and then returns the function handle The data definition section of the colorPalette code file creates a cell array to hold the output mOutputArgs Variable for storing output Just before returning colorPalette assigns the function handle mgetSelectedColor to the cell array mOutputArgs and then assigns mOutputArgs to varargout to return the arguments mOutputArgs getSelectedColor if nargout gt 0 varargout 1 nargout mOutputArgs end 14 37 Find Apps on page 15 2 View App File List on page 15 3 Run Uninstall Reinstall and Install Apps on page 15 5 Install Apps in a Shared Network Location on page 15 7 Change Apps Installation Folder on page 15 8 15 Apps Find Apps Apps are included in some MATLAB products such as Curve Fitting Toolbox Signal Processing Toolbox and Control System Toolbox In addition you can write your own apps The apps gallery presents all the currently installed apps To view the gallery click the Apps tab and then at the end of the Apps section click the arrow If you install additional apps that you wrote or received from someone else they appear in the apps
49. Instead of opening the FIG file as a standalone figure it opens it with guide for editing e Determine which item was selected Since a single click of an item also invokes the list box callback you must query the figure SelectionType property to determine when you have performed a double click A double click of an item sets the SelectionType property to open All the items in the list box are referenced by an index from 1 to n A value of 1 refers to the first item and a value of n is the index of the nth item The software saves this index in the list box Value property The callback uses this index to get the name of the selected item from the list of items contained in the String property 9 49 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 50 Determine whether the selected item is a file or directory The load_listbox function uses the dir command to obtain a list of values that indicate whether an item is a file or folder These values 1 for folder 0 for file are saved in the handles structure The list box callback queries these values to determine if current selection is a file or folder and takes the following action Ifthe selection is a folder change to the folder cd and call load_listbox again to populate the list box with the contents of the new folder Ifthe selection is a file get the file extension Fileparts to determine if it is a FIG file which is opened with guide All other file types are passed to open
50. Minimally specify an app name If you install the app MATLAB uses the name for the mlappinstal11 file and to label your app in the apps gallery Click the icon to the left of the App Name field to select an icon for your app or to specify a custom icon MATLAB automatically scales the icon for use in the Install dialog box App gallery and quick access toolbar After you create the package when you select a mlappinstal11 file in the Current Folder browser MATLAB displays the app description in the Details panel If you share you app in the MATLAB Central File Exchange the description also displays there The screen shot you select represents your app in File Exchange Click Package As part of the app packaging process MATLAB creates a prj file that contains information about your app such as included files and a description The prj file enables you to update the files in your app without requiring you to respecify descriptive information about the app In the Build dialog box note the location of the installation file mlappinsta1l and then click Close For information on installing the app see Install or Reinstall App on page 15 5 Modify Apps Modify Apps When you update the files included in a mlappinsta11 file you recreate and overwrite the original app You cannot maintain two versions of the same app To update files in an app you created 1 Inthe Current Folder browser navigate to the folder co
51. New for MATLAB 6 0 Release 12 Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for Revised for MATLAB 6 1 Release 12 1 MATLAB 6 6 Release 13 MATLAB 7 0 Release 14 MATLAB 7 0 1 Release 14SP1 MATLAB 7 0 4 Release 14SP2 MATLAB 7 1 Release 14SP3 MATLAB 7 2 Release 2006a MATLAB 7 2 MATLAB 7 3 Release 2006b MATLAB 7 4 Release 2007a MATLAB 7 5 Release 2007b MATLAB 7 6 Release 2008a MATLAB 7 7 Release 2008b MATLAB 7 8 Release 2009a MATLAB 7 9 Release 2009b MATLAB 7 10 Release 2010a MATLAB 7 11 Release 2010b MATLAB 7 12 Release 2011a MATLAB 7 13 Release 2011b MATLAB 7 14 Release 2012a MATLAB 8 0 Release 2012b MATLAB 8 1 Release 20138a MATLAB 8 2 Release 2013b MATLAB 8 3 Release 2014a MATLAB 8 4 Release 2014b MATLAB 8 5 Release 2015a Contents Introduction to Creating UIs About UIs in MATLAB Software 1 What Isa UR ok cei des wk E and ORE ERE we OE EEA 1 2 How Does a UI Work 0 0 00 0000005 1 4 Ways to Build MATLAB Uls 1 5 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE 2 2 Open a New UI in the GUIDE Layout Editor 2
52. Panel as shown in the following figure 6 45 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE cena intent DOGMsSs k AAC9RL a 0 M My Panel Specify the panel title by setting the Title property to the desired string in this case My Panel ShadowColor oa uipanell m D My Panel TitlePosition lefttop 6 46 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area To display the amp character in the title use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove Specify the location of the panel title by selecting one of the available TitlePosition property values from the pop up menu in this case lefttop You can position the title at the left middle or right of the top or bottom of the panel Z Inspector matlab ui container Panel a Ai e t ForegroundColor Qo HandleVisibility on z e HighlightColor CJ Interruptible v On Position 0011 ShadowColor Co SizeChangedFcn Tag uipanell F Title My Panel F lefttop UlContetMenu centertop righttop leftbottom centerbottom rightbottom If you want to set the position or size of the panel to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details Note For
53. Remove button x on the right end of the toolbar Right click a blank area on the toolbar and select Remove Toolbar from the context menu If you remove all the individual tools in the ways shown in Remove Tools on page 6 114 without removing the toolbar itself your UI will contain an empty toolbar Close the Toolbar Editor You can close the Toolbar Editor window in two ways Press the OK button 6 115 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Click the Close box in the title bar When you close the Toolbar Editor the current state of your toolbar is saved with the UI you are editing You do not see the toolbar in the Layout Editor but you can run your program to see it Editing Tool Icons GUIDE includes its own Icon Editor a dialog for creating and modifying icons such as icons on toolbars You can access this editor only from the Toolbar Editor This figure shows the Icon Editor loaded with a standard Save icon Import icon file Create a new icon below or type in an icon image file for editing Icon Edit Pane 16 X 16 Aa a a a a a n n a n a a a a a s a EERE amp ii ioe mee fot O o_o Use the Icon Editor The Icon Editor dialog includes the following components 6 116 Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls Icon file name The icon image file to be loaded for editing Import button Opens a file dialog to select an existing icon file for editing Drawing t
54. Standard Toolbar on page 10 83 Use the uitoolbar Function Use the uitoolbar function to add a custom toolbar to your UI Use the uipushtool and uitoggletool functions to add push tools and toggle tools to a toolbar A push tool functions as a push button A toggle tool functions as a toggle button You can add push tools and toggle tools to the standard toolbar or to a custom toolbar Syntaxes for the uitoolbar uipushtool and uitoggletool functions include the following tbh pth tth uitoolbar fh PropertyName PropertyValue uipushtool tnh PropertyName PropertyValue uitoggletool tbh PropertyName PropertyValue The output arguments tbh pth and tth are the handles respectively of the resulting toolbar push tool and toggle tool See the uitoolbar uipushtool and uitoggletool reference pages for other valid syntaxes Subsequent topics describe commonly used properties of toolbars and toolbar tools offer a simple example and discuss use of the MATLAB standard toolbar Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe a toolbar and its tools are shown in the following table Property Values Description CData 3 D array of values n by m by 38 array of RGB values between 0 0 and 1 0 that defines a truecolor image 10 79 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 80 Property Values Description displayed on either a push button or toggle
55. String Title displayed in the figure window If NumberTit1le is on this string is appended to the figure number NumberTitle on of f Default is on Determines whether the string Figure n where n is the figure number is prefixed to the figure window title specified by Name Position 4 element vector distance from _ Size of the UI figure and its left distance from bottom width location relative to the lower left height corner of the screen Resize on of f Default is on Determines if the user can resize the figure window with the mouse Toolbar auto none figure Default is Display or hide the default figure toolbar Create Figures for Programmatic Uls Property Values Description none do not display the figure toolbar auto display the figure toolbar but remove it if a user interface control Uicontrol is added to the figure figure display the figure toolbar Units pixels centimeters Units of measurement used to characters inches interpret position vector normalized points Default is pixels Visible on off Default is on Determines whether a figure is displayed on the screen For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see Figure Properties The following statement names the figure My UI positions the figure on the screen and makes the UI invisible so that the user cannot see the com
56. Tag uibuttongroupl Title My Button Group e oon centertop righttop leftbottom centerbottom rightbottom Ifyou want to set the position or size of the button group to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details Note For more information and additional tips and techniques see Add a Component to a Panel or Button Group on page 6 20 and the uibuttongroup documentation Axes Axes enable your UI to display graphics such as graphs and images using commands such as plot surf line bar polar pie contour and mesh To define an axes you must set certain properties To do this 1 Use the Property Inspector to modify the appropriate properties Open the Property Inspector by selecting View gt Property Inspector or by clicking the Property Inspector button Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area 2 Inthe layout area select the component you are defining Note See GUIDE Components on page 6 13 for a description of this component Subsequent topics describe commonly used properties of axes and offer a simple example e Commonly Used Properties on page 6 51 Create Axes on page 6 52 Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe an axes are shown in the following table Property Values Description NextPlot add replace Sp
57. This technique is called data brushing However the data brushing performed by this program does not rely on MATLAB data brushing feature Here is the select_callback code function select_callback hObject eventdata hObject Handle to uitable1 see GCBO eventdata Currently selected table indices Callback to erase and replot markers showing only those corresponding to user selected cells in table Repeatedly called while user drags across cells of the uitable X P X P P hmkrs are handles to lines having markers only set hmkrs Visible off turn them off to begin Get the list of currently selected table cells sel eventdata Indices Get selection indices row col Noncontiguous selections are ok selcols unique sel 2 Get all selected data col IDs table hObject Data Get copy of uitable data Get vectors of x y values for each column in the selection for idx 1 numel selcols col selcols idx Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI xvals sel 1 xvals sel 2 col yvals table xvals col Create Z vals 1 in order to plot markers above lines zvals col ones size xvals Plot markers for xvals and yvals using a line object hmkrs col Visible on hmkrs col XData xvals hmkrs col YData yvals hmkrs col ZData zvals end end The function passes the rows and columns of the user selected cells in eventdata Indices and copie
58. Tools Desktop Window Help Gdl kiss ORF Air RE 10 32 You can query or change the outer bounds of the figure by using the OuterPosition property Like the Position property the OuterPosition is a four element row vector f OuterPosition ans 250 124 576 512 The left outer edge of this figure is 250 pixels from the left side of the screen Its bottom outer edge is 124 pixels up from the bottom of the screen The area enclosed by the outer bounds of the figure is 576 pixels wide by 512 pixels high Lay Out a UI Programmatically B Figure 1 Fite Edit View Insert ool esktop Window Help GoW s S DW aA 3 00 af Explicitly changing the Position or OuterPosition causes the other property to change For example this is the current Position value of f f Position ans 258 132 560 420 Changing the OuterPosition causes the Position to change f OuterPosition 250 250 490 340 f Position ans 10 33 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 34 258 258 474 248 Other UI components such as uicontrols uitables and uipanels have a Position property which you can use to set their location and size Units of Measure The default units associated with the Position property depend on the component you are placing However you can change the Units property to lay out your UI in the units of your choice There are six different units of measure to choose from inches centimeters
59. User selects Peaks current_data peaks data case Membrane User selects Membrane current_data membrane_data case Sinc User selects Sinc current_data sinc_data end end X X X X Il I Push button callbacks Each callback plots current_data in the specified plot type function surfbutton_Callback source eventdata Display surf plot of the currently selected data surf current_data 3 11 3 A Simple Programmatic UI p g 3 12 end function meshbutton_Callback source eventdata Display mesh plot of the currently selected data mesh current_data end function contourbutton_Callback source eventdata Display contour plot of the currently selected data contour current_data end end Run your code by typing Simple_gui2 at the command line The initialization code causes it to display the default peaks data with the surf function making the UI look like this 2 simple_gui oJ eee 10 10 Select Data 40 40 20 F 20 aks E In the pop up menu select Membrane and then click the Mesh button The UI displays a mesh plot of the MathWorks L shaped Membrane logo Try other combinations before closing the UI Type help simple_gui2 at the command line MATLAB software displays the help text Create a Simple UI Programmatically help simple _gui2 SIMPLE _GUI2 Select a data set from the pop up menu then click one of the plot type push buttons
60. When a slider serves as a scroll Add Components to a Programmatic UI bar you can uses this behavior to indicate how much of the document is currently visible by changing the value of major_step gt Arrow button minor _step Trough major_step Position 30 20 150 30 specifies the location and size of the slider In this example the slider is 150 pixels wide and 30 high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom Note On Mac platforms the height of a horizontal slider is constrained If the height you set in the Position property exceeds this constraint the displayed height of the slider is the maximum allowed by the system However the value of the Position property does not change to reflect this constraint Static Text This code creates a static text component figure uicontrol f Style text String Select a data set Position 30 50 130 30 f t r amp Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSGasS k AAV9004 a 08 Select a data set 10 15 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 16 The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style text specify the uicontrol to be static text Str
61. With the cursor inside the brackets type Ctrl V to paste the setpos output as the Position parameter value btn1 uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Position 37 362 127 27 You cannot call setpos when you are creating a component because setpos requires the handle of the component as an argument However you can create a small function that lets you position a component interactively as you create it The function waits for you to press the mouse button then calls rbbox and returns a position rectangle when you release the mouse button function rect getrect disp Click and drag out a Position rectangle waitforbuttonpress So that rbbox does not return immediately rect rbbox User drags out a rectangle releases button clipboard copy rect Place set string on system clipboard as well as returning it To use getrect 1 In the editor place the following statement in your UI code file to generate a push button Specify getrect within it as the value for the Position property btni uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Position getrect 2 Select the entire statement in the editor and execute it with the F9 key or by right clicking and selecting Evaluate Selection 3 In the figure window drag out a rectangle for the control to occupy When you have finished dragging the new component displays in that rectangle If you type a character while you are dragging r
62. You do not need to use the Toolbar Editor if you simply want your UI to have a standard figure toolbar You can do this by setting the figure s ToolBar property to figure as follows 6 109 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 110 1 Open the UI in GUIDE 2 From the View menu open Property Inspector 3 Set the ToolBar property to figure using the drop down menu 4 Save the figure If you later want to remove the figure toolbar set the ToolBar property to auto and resave the UI Doing this will not remove or hide your custom toolbar See Create Toolbars for Programmatic UIs on page 10 79 for more information about making toolbars manually If you want users to be able to dock and undock a UI window on the MATLAB desktop it must have a toolbar or a menu bar which can either be the standard ones or ones you create in GUIDE In addition the figure property DockControls must be turned on For details see How Menus Affect Figure Docking on page 6 92 Use the Toolbar Editor The Toolbar Editor contains three main parts The Toolbar Layout preview area on the top The Tool Palette on the left Two tabbed property panes on the right Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls i Tooter Ean Sa Toolbar Layout Add tools here to create a toolbar Drag and drop from the palette or press the Add button x Tool Palette Custom Tools Aad uae P Push Tool T Toggle Tool Tool Properties Toolbar Properties
63. a time but you can store multiple values as a struct array or cell array Requires access to the component to set or retrieve the application data Can share multiple variables Create Nested Callback Functions Programmatic Nest your callback functions inside your main function This gives your callback functions access to all the variables in the main function Requires callback functions to be coded in the same file as the main function Not recommended for GUIDE Uls Share Data Among Callbacks Method Description Requirements and Trade Offs UIs on page Can share multiple variables 12 5 Store Data Share data with the figure window Stores or retrieves the data Using the using the guidata function through any UI component guidata K Stores only one variable at Function on a time but you can store page 12 6 multiple values as a struct array or cell array Store Data in UserData or Other Object Properties UI components contain useful information in their properties which you can access directly as long as you have access to the component If you do not have access to the component then use the findobj function to search for the component that has a known property value You can store any data in the UserData property of a UI component or figure For example the following programmatic UI code uses the UserData property to share information about the sl
64. address_book fig 6 26 2014 11 58 AM MATLAB Fig ee Libraries gt pil Computer Gu Network m r File name X Figures fig Z Print Menu Item Callback The hPrintMenuitemCallback function services the Print menu item and the Print toolbar button Selecting the menu item or clicking the toolbar button triggers the execution of this callback function function hPrintMenuitemCallback hObject eventdata Callback function run when the Print menu item is selected printdlg hMainFigure end 14 9 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically The hPrintMenuitemCallback function calls the printd1g function This function opens the standard system dialog box for printing the current figure Your print dialog box might look different than the one shown here f Print Microsoft XPS Document Writer v Properties Ready Microsoft XPS Document Writer XPSPort Close Menu Item Callback The hCloseMenuitemCallback function services the Close menu item It executes when the user selects Close from the File menu function hCloseMenuitemCallback hObject eventdata Callback function run when the Close menu item is selected selection questdlg Close hMainFigure Name Close hMainFigure Name Yes No Yes if strcmp selection No return end 14 10 Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls delete hMainFigure end The hCloseMenuit
65. appear in the center of the original bounding box The bottom push button remains at the bottom of the original bounding box align b1 b2 b3 Center Fixed 7 10 53 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 54 File Edit View Inser Tool Deskto Windov Help gt DGMsS k AAG908A p777 A Align Components Vertically While Distributing Them Horizontally The following statement moves the push buttons to the bottom of their bounding box It also adjusts their horizontal placement to create a fixed distance of five points between the boxes The push buttons appear at the bottom of the original bounding box align b1 b2 b3 Fixed 5 Bottom File Edit View Inser Tool Deskto Windov Help DGM8s h AQODRA aletatatatetatetetatatete i I I I amp e B1 Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively Use Align Distribute Tools If your figure has a standard menu bar you can perform align and distribute operations on selected components directly in plot edit mode Several options from the Tools menu save you from typing align function commands The align and distribute menu items are highlighted in the following illustration A Figure 1 OGas k S File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help Edit Plot Zoom In Zoom Out Pan Rotate 3D Data Cursor Brush Link Reset View Options Pin to Ax
66. apply alignments independently to the vertical and horizontal using two separate steps Align Options There are both vertical and horizontal align options Each option aligns selected components to a reference line which is determined by the bounding box that encloses the selected objects For example the following picture of the layout area shows the bounding box indicated by the dashed line formed by three selected push buttons Align GUIDE UI Components All of the align options vertical top center bottom and horizontal left center right place the selected components with respect to the corresponding edge or center of this bounding box Distribute Options Distributing components adds equal space between all components in the selected group The distribute options operate in two different modes Equally space selected components within the bounding box default Space selected components to a specified value in pixels check Set spacing and specify a pixel value Both modes enable you to specify how the spacing is measured as indicated by the button labels on the alignment tool These options include spacing measured with respect to the following edges Vertical inner top center and bottom Horizontal inner left center and right 6 81 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 82 Property Inspector About the Property Inspector In GUIDE as in MATLAB generally you can see and set most com
67. callbacks there are only four callback functions This is because the Open menu item and the Open toolbar button share the same callbacks Similarly the Print menu item and the Print toolbar button amp share the same callbacks Update Button Callback The hUpdateButtonCallback function services the Update push button Clicking the Update button triggers the execution of this callback function function hUpdateButtonCallback hObject eventdata Callback function run when the Update button is pressed localUpdatePlot end Open Menu Item Callback The hOpenMenuitemCallback function services the Open menu item and the Open toolbar button amp Selecting the menu item or clicking the toolbar button triggers the execution of this callback function function hOpenMenuitemCallback hObject eventdata Callback function run when the Open menu item is selected file uigetfile m if isequal file 0 open file end Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls end The hOpenMenuitemCallback function first calls the uigetfile function to open the standard dialog box for retrieving files This dialog box lists all files having the extension fig If uigetfile returns a file name the function then calls the open function to open it 6 Select File to Open GO Ji my_scripts testhg2 myguis v p Organize v New folder fl UE Favorites Name i Date modified Type
68. e pop up menus See Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 for more information Align Objects Align and distribute groups of components Grids and rulers also enable you to align components on a grid with an optional snap to grid capability See Align GUIDE UI Components on page 6 79 for more information Tab Order Set the tab and stacking order of the components in your layout See Editor Customize Tabbing Behavior in a GUIDE UI on page 6 88 for more information Toolbar Editor Create Toolbars containing predefined and custom push buttons and toggle buttons See Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 for more information Icon Editor Create and modify icons for tools in a toolbar See Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 for more information Property Inspector Set the properties of the components in your layout It provides a list of all the properties you can set and displays their current values Object Browser Display a hierarchical list of the objects in the UI See View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy on page 6 119 for more information Run Save the UI and run the program Editor Display in your default editor the code file associated with the UI See Files Generated by GUIDE on page 2 24 for more information Position Continuously display the mouse cursor position and the positions of Readouts selected objects GUI
69. fh is the handle of the figure Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe a menu bar menu are shown in the following table 10 67 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 68 Property Values Description Accelerator Alphabetic character Keyboard equivalent Available for menu items that do not have submenus Checked off on Default is off Menu check indicator Enable on off Default ison Controls whether a menu item can be selected When set to of f the menu label appears dimmed HandleVisibility on off Default is on Determines if an object s handle is visible in its parent s list of children For menus set HandleVisibility to off to protect menus from operations not intended for them Label String Menu label To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove Position Scalar Default is 1 Position of a menu item in the menu Separator off on Default is off Separator line mode For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see Uimenu Properties How Menus Affect Figure Docking When you customize the menu bar or toolbar you can control the display of the window s docking control
70. for the Kf Gain from the slider NewVal get hObject Value Set the value of the KfCurrentValue to the new value set by slider set handles KfCurrentValue String NewVal Set the Gain parameter of the Kf Gain Block to the new value set_param f14 Controller Gain Gain num2str NewVal1 While a slider returns a number and the edit text requires a string uicontrols automatically convert the values to the correct type The callback for the Integral Ki slider follows an approach similar to the Proportional Kf slider s callback Current Value Edit Text Callback The edit text box enables you to enter a value for the respective parameter When you click another component in the UI after entering data into the text box the edit text callback performs these tasks Calls model_open to ensure that the Simulink model is open so that it can set simulation parameters Converts the string returned by the edit box String property to a double str2doub1e Checks whether the entered value is within the range of the slider 9 61 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 62 If the value is out of range the edit text String property is set to the value of the slider rejecting the number you entered If the value is in range the slider Value property is updated to the new value Sets the appropriate block parameter to the new value Set_param Here is the callback for the Kf Current value text box function Kf
71. function also saves information about the contents of a folder in the handles structure Code List Box Behavior on page 9 49 describes how the list box is coded to respond to double clicks on items in the list box Specify the Folder By default UI code files generated by GUIDE open the UI when there are no input arguments and call a local function when the first input argument is a character string This example changes the behavior so that if you put the example files lbox2 m and 1box2 fig on the MATLAB path you can run the 1box2 program to display the contents of a particular folder To do so pass the dir function as a string for the first input argument and a string that specifies the path to the folder for the second input argument For instance from the Command Window run the following to have the list box display the files in C myfiles lbox2 dir C my_files The following code from 1box2 m shows the code for 1box2_OpeningFcn which sets the list box folder to The current folder if no folder is specified The specified folder if a folder is specified function 1lbox2_OpeningFen hObject eventdata handles varargin This function has no output args see OutputFcn hObject handle to figure eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA varargin command line arguments to untitled see VARARGIN X de P P P oe Choose
72. hObject handle to axesyellow see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA set handles axes1 Color y This code sets the background color of the axes with Tag axeS1 no matter to what object the context menu is attached to If you enter a callback string in the Menu Editor it overrides the callback for the item in the code file if any has been saved If you delete a string you have entered in the Callback field the callback for the item in the UI code file is executed when the user selects that item in the UI See Menu Item on page 8 22 for more information about specifying this field and for programming menu items For another example of programming context menus in GUIDE see Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI on page 9 30 The View button displays the callback if there is one in an editor If you have not yet saved the UI GUIDE prompts you to save it Open the Property Inspector where you can change all menu properties except callbacks by clicking the More Properties button For detailed information about these properties see Uicontextmenu Properties Associate the Context Menu with an Object 1 In the Layout Editor select the object for which you are defining the context menu 2 Use the Property Inspector to set this object s UIContextMenu property to the name of the desired context menu 6 106 Crea
73. handle as the first element followed by and any input arguments you want to use in the function Specify a String of MATLAB Commands Not Recommended on page 11 9 Specify a Function Handle Function handles provide a way for you to represent a function as a variable You define the function as a local or nested function in the same file as the code or you can write it in a separate program file that is on the MATLAB path The function definition must define two input arguments hObject and callbackdata Handle Graphics automatically passes hObject and callbackdata when it calls the function For more information about these arguments see Callback Syntax on page 11 9 This code creates a slider component and specifies its callback as a function handle To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function myui figure uicontrol Style slider Callback display_slider_value end function display_slider_value hObject callbackdata newval num2str hObject Value 11 codea Programmatic Ul 11 8 disp Slider moved to newval end This callback function displays the value of the slider when the end user adjusts it A benefit of specifying callbacks as function handles is that MATLAB checks the function for syntax errors and missing dependencies when you assign the callback to the component If there is a problem in the callback function then MATLAB returns an error immediately in
74. handles structure and the ref reshDisplays function is called to update the selection statistics and plot passing the portion of the table that you selected table get hObject Data handles currSelection selection guidata hObject handles refreshDisplays table selection handles 2 9 41 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 42 Caching the list of rows in the selection is necessary because changing plot types can force selection data to be replotted As the plot_type_ Callback has no access to the data table s event data it requires a copy of the most recent selection Update the Statistics Table and the Graphs The code must update the Data Statistics table and the graphs above it when The UI is initialized in its tablestat_OpeningFcn e You select cells in the data table in its data_table CellSelectionCallback You select a different plot type in the plot_type Callback In each case the refreshDisplays function is called to handle the updates It in turn calls two other custom functions setStats Computes summary statistics for the selection and returns them e plotPeriod Plots the type of graph currently requested in the appropriate axes The refreshDisplays function identifies the current plot type and specifies the axes to plot graphs into After calling plotPeriod and setStats it updates the Data Statistics table with the recomputed statistics Here is the code for refreshDisplays function refres
75. img2 Separator on TooltipString Your toggle tool HandleVisibility off 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help R AAOS84 8 08 Your toggle tool fh is the handle of the parent figure th is the handle of the parent toolbar CData is a 16 by 16 by 3 array of values between 0 and 1 It defines the truecolor image that is displayed on the tool If your image is larger than 16 pixels in either dimension it may be clipped or cause other undesirable effects If the array is clipped only the center 16 by 16 part of the array is used Note See the ind2rgb reference page for information on converting a matrix X and corresponding colormap i e an X MAP image to RGB truecolor format 10 81 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI TooltipString specifies the tooltips for the push tool and the toggle tool as My push tool and Your toggle tool respectively In this example setting the toggle tool Separator property to On creates a dividing line to the left of the toggle tool You can change the order of the tools by modifying the child vector of the parent toolbar For this example execute the following code to reverse the order of the tools oldOrder allchild tbh newOrder flipud oldOrder tbh Children newOrder This code uses f lipud because the Children property is a column vector Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Win
76. in the command window before you specify it in GUIDE For this example type dat 6 125 456 3457 true Fixed 6 75 510 2342 false Adjustable 7 658 2 false Fixed In the Table Property Editor select the data that you defined and select Change data value to the selected workspace variable below 6 63 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Columns Data Rows Data Loading data from a workspace variable creates a static copy of the data Changes to the original variable will not be reflected in the table Colors Do not set data value and leave the table empty Keep the current data value Change data value to the selected workspace variable below Set Color Properties Specify the BackgroundColor and RowStriping for your table in the Color tab 6 64 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Yj Table Property Editor e Columns Colors Rows Data The row striping effect can make it easier for users to read the data in your table The two background colors are used to alternately shade the table rows Background Color No row striping effect All Rows Background 7 Show row striping effect Odd Rows Background X Even Rows Background 7 Foreground Color All Rows Foreground E You can change other uitable properties to the table via the Property Inspector ActiveX Component When yo
77. invisible set the figure Visible property to off when you create the figure hMainFigure figure Units characters MenuBar none Toolbar none Position 71 8 34 7 106 36 15 Visible off After you have added all the components to the figure window make the figure visible hMainFigure Visible on Most components have a Visible property Thus you can also use this property to make individual components invisible Return Output to the User If your program allows an output argument and the user specifies such an argument then you want to return the expected output The code that provides this output usually appears just before the program s main function returns In the example shown here 11 3 11 codea Programmatic Ul 11 4 o A call to uiwait blocks execution until uiresume is called or the current figure is deleted While execution is blocked the user creates the icon When the user clicks OK that push button s callback calls the uiresume function The program returns the completed icon to the user as output Make the window blocking uiwait hMainFigure Return the edited icon CData if it is requested mOutputArgs 1 mIconCData if nargout gt 0 varargout 1 nargout mOutputArgs end mIconData contains the icon that the user created or edited mMOUtputArgs is a cell array defined to hold the output arguments nargout indicates how many
78. it appears on top of the panel in the UI Copy Paste and Arrange Components E YX untitled fig File Edit View Layout Tools Help HGE 4a0 MEE Panel Object Browser B E Figure Untitled ee Tas E Hi i Panel uipanell Panel ofr rar art ofr i UlControl pushbutton1 Start SUC Be 4 l k 4 Tag pushbutton1 Current Point 137 329 Position 27 68 92 23 Note Changing front to back positioning of components might change their tabbing behavior See Customize Tabbing Behavior in a GUIDE UI on page 6 88 for more information 6 73 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Locate and Move Components 6 74 You can locate or move components in one of the following ways In this section Use Coordinate Readouts on page 6 74 Drag Components on page 6 75 Use Arrow Keys to Move Components on page 6 76 Set the Component s Position Property on page 6 76 Another topic that may be of interest is Align GUIDE UI Components on page 6 79 Use Coordinate Readouts Coordinate readouts indicate where a component is placed and where the mouse pointer is located Use these readouts to position and align components manually The Position readout shows the position of the selected component as the vector x y width height These values are di
79. normalized points pixels and characters Always specify Units before Position for the most predictable results f figure Units inches Position 4 3 6 5 Your choice of units can affect the appearance and resizing behavior of the UI If you want the components inside the figure to scale proportionally with the figure when the user resizes the window set the Units property of the components inside the figure to normalized Ifyou are developing a cross platform UI then you can set the Units property to points or characters to make the layout consistent across all platforms There might be other situations in which you want to lay out your UI using nondefault units For example you might need to specify height and width values in inches in order to conform to a specification When the value of the Units property is inches centimeters points pixels or characters the component does not scale with the figure when the user resizes the UI To enable automatic scaling set the Units property to normalized after the code that specifies the Position in the other units Example of a Simple Layout Here is the code for a simple UI containing an axes and a button To see how it works copy and paste this code into the editor and run it function myui Add the UI components hs addcomponents Lay Out a UI Programmatically Make figure visible after adding components hs fig Visible on
80. of a pop up menu callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the pop up menu Callback property to make it execute when the end user selects an item from the menu function popupmenu1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to popupmenu1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X Hints contents cellstr get hObject String returns contents contents get hObject Value returns selected item items get hObject String index_selected get hObject Value item_selected items index_selected display item_selected When the end user selects an item in the pop up menu the callback function performs the following tasks Gets all the items in the pop up menu and stores them in the variable items Gets the numeric index of the selected item and stores it in the variable index_selected Gets the string value of the selected item and stores it in the variable item_selected Displays the selected item in the MATLAB Command Window 8 19 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 20 Panel Make the Panel Respond to Button Clicks You can create a callback function that executes when the end user right clicks or left clicks on the panel If you are working in GUIDE then right click the panel in the layout and select View Callbacks gt ButtonDownFcen to create the callback fun
81. of the standard toolbar you can add tools delete tools and change the order of the tools Add a tool the same way you would add it to a custom toolbar This code gets the handle of the standard toolbar and adds a toggle tool to it tbh findall fh Type uitoolbar tth uitoggletool tbh CData rand 20 20 3 Separator on HandleVisibility off a Figure 1 File 10 84 Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGasSs k AAV900GA4 42 08 a0 To remove a tool from the standard toolbar determine the handle of the tool to be removed and then use the delete function to remove it The following code deletes the toggle tool that was added to the standard toolbar above delete tth If necessary you can use the findall function to determine the handles of the tools on the standard toolbar Fonts and Colors for Cross Platform Compatibility Fonts and Colors for Cross Platform Compatibility In this section Default System Font on page 10 85 Standard Background Color on page 10 86 Default System Font By default user interface controls uicontrols use the default font for the platform on which they are running For example when displaying your UI on PCs user interface controls use MS San Serif When your UI runs on a different platform they use that computer s default font This provides a consistent look with respect to your UI and other app
82. slider function slider1 Callback hObject eventdata handles 8 15 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 16 hObject handle to slider1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X Hints get hObject Value returns position of slider get hObject Min and get hObject Max to determine slider_value get hObject Value display slider_value When the end user moves the slider the callback function gets the current value of the slider and displays it in the Command Window By default the slider s range is 0 1 To modify the range set the slider s Max and Min properties to the maximum and minimum values respectively List Box Populate Items in the List Box If you are developing a UI using GUIDE use the list box CreateFcn callback to add items to the list box This code is an example of a list box CreateFcn callback that populates the list box with the items Red Green and Blue function listbox1_CreateFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to listbox1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles empty handles not created until after all CreateFcns Hint listbox controls usually have a white background on Windows if ispc amp amp isequal get hObject BackgroundColor get 0 defaultUicontrolBackgroundColor set hObject Back
83. squares e Click and drag the mouse to erase the squares that you touch Click a another drawing tool to disable the Eraser 4 Click OK to close the dialog and return the icon you created or click Cancel to close the dialog without modifying the selected tool s icon 6 117 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE The Toolbar Editor and Icon Editor are shown together below 6 118 Toolbar Editor oo x4 Toolbar Layout a P x eons a oe eB a P Push Tool T Toggle Tool Tool Properties Toolbar Properties Predefined Tools CData icon p D new G Open E iconeditor lal Save gt Print amp Zoom in ON Zoom Out Import icon file Create a new icon below or type in an icon image file for editing m Pan kD Rotate Icon Edit Pane 16 X 16 fe Data Cursor D Colorbar E Legend pa Preview P Color reget Seo TEET ETERTENT Ot j ie View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy The Object Browser displays a hierarchical list of the objects in the figure including both components and menus As you lay out your UI check the object hierarchy periodically especially if your UI contains menus panes or button groups Open it from View gt Object Browser or by click the Object Browser icon on the GUIDE toolbar The following illustration shows a figure object and its child objects It also shows the child objects of a uipanel
84. that may not look good in your UI or may not be the standard font used for UIs on that system Also different versions of the same named font may have different size requirements for a given set of characters Standard Background Color The default component background color is the standard system background color on which the UI is displaying This color varies on different computer systems e g the standard shade of gray on the PC differs from that on UNIX system and may not match the default UI background color If you use the default component background color you can use that same color as the background color for your UI This provides a consistent look with respect to your UI and other applications To do this in GUIDE check Options gt Use system color scheme for background on the Layout Editor Tools menu Note This option is available only if you first select the Generate FIG file and MATLAB File option Cross Platform Compatible Units Cross platform compatible UIs should look correct on computers having different screen sizes and resolutions Since the size of a pixel can vary on different computer displays 6 121 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 122 using the default figure Units of pixels does not produce a UI that looks the same on all platforms For this reason GUIDE defaults the Units property for the figure to characters System Dependent Units Character units are defined by characters from the defau
85. that provide different kinds of plots surface mesh and contour When you click a push button the axes component displays the selected data set using the specified type of 3 D plot 1 About Uls in MATLAB Software How Does a UI Work Typically UIs wait for a user to manipulate a control and then respond to each user action in turn Each control and the UI itself has one or more callbacks named for the fact that they call back to MATLAB to ask it to do things A particular user action such as pressing a screen button or passing the cursor over a component triggers the execution of each callback The UI then responds to these events You as the UI creator write callbacks that define what the components do to handle events This kind of programming is often referred to as event driven programming In event driven programming callback execution is asynchronous that is events external to the software trigger callback execution In the case of MATLAB UIs most events are user interactions with the UI but the UI can respond to other kinds of events as well for example the creation of a file or connecting a device to the computer You can code callbacks in two distinct ways e As MATLAB language functions stored in files As strings containing MATLAB expressions or commands such as c sqrt a a b b or print Using functions stored in code files as callbacks is preferable to using strings because functions ha
86. the UI displays a plot of five lines each of which is generated from random numbers using the MATLAB rand 5 command The following figure shows an example 6 7 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE DD untitieai toj Ea File plot rand S z Update You can select other plots in the pop up menu Clicking the Update button displays the currently selected plot on the axes The UI also has a File menu with three items Open displays a dialog box from which you can open files on your computer Print opens the Print dialog box Clicking OK in the Print dialog box prints the figure Close closes the UI To view the code for these menu choices open the template in the Layout Editor and click the Editor button amp on the toolbar Modal Question Dialog The following figure shows an example of this template GUIDE Templates T untitled fig Push Button am Slider Radio Button Check Box leet Edit Text TM Static Text Pop up Menu EH Listbox E Table iv Axes i Panel z3 Button Group _EX ActiveX Control Tag figurel File Edit View Layout Tools Help OSH SLAC EAA E E 50 100 52 150 200 250 Salt 147 ihe 47 247 4 Current Point 16 99 Position 657 532 280 103 When you click the Run button the following dialog displays 300 a 6 9 6 Lay Out a UI Using GU
87. the axes and reset a number of axes properties including the ButtonDownF cn before plotting data To create an interface that lets the end user plot data interactively consider providing a component such as a push button to control plotting Such components properties are unaffected by the plotting functions If you must use the axes ButtonDownF cn to plot data then use functions such as line patch and surface Examples of GUIDE Uls Examples of GUIDE Uls The following are examples that are packaged with MATLAB The introductory text for most examples provides instructions on copying them to a writable folder on your system so you can follow along Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE on page 9 2 UI That Uses Persistent Data on page 9 7 UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots on page 9 20 Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI on page 9 30 Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI on page 9 46 Plot Workspace Variables in a GUIDE UI on page 9 52 UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters on page 9 57 Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE on page 9 68 Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI on page 9 79 8 29 Examples of GUIDE Uls Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE on page 9 2 UI That Uses Persistent Data on page 9 7 UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots on page 9 20 Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI on page 9 30 Interactiv
88. the callback function to accept additional arguments you must put the additional arguments at the end of the argument list in the function definition The eventdata Argument The eventdata argument provides detailed information to certain callback functions For example if the end user triggers the KeyPressFcn then MATLAB provides information regarding the specific key or combination of keys that the end user pressed If eventdata is not available to the callback function then MATLAB passes it as an empty array The following table lists the callbacks and components that use eventdata Callback Property Name Component WindowKeyPressFcn figure WindowKeyReleaseFcn WindowScrollWheel KeyPressFcn figure uicontrol uitable KeyReleaseFcn figure uicontrol uitable SelectionChangedFcn uibuttongroup CellEditCallback uitable CellSelectionCallback Renaming and Removing GUIDE Generated Callbacks Renaming Callbacks GUIDE creates the name of a callback function by combining the component s Tag property and the callback property name If you change the component s Tag value then GUIDE changes the callback s name the next time you save the UI 8 5 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 6 If you decide to change the Tag value after saving the UI then GUIDE updates the following items assuming that all components have unique Tag values Component s callback function definition Component s callback property v
89. the child of the main figure This statement creates a menu bar in the figure and puts the File menu on it For each of the menu items setting its Parent property to the handle of the parent menu hFileMenu causes it to appear on the File menu The Label property defines the text label for each menu item Setting the Separator property to on for creates a separator line above a menu item Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls For each of the menu items the Callback property specifies the callback that services that item These callbacks are defined as nested functions in the same file The Toolbar These statements define the toolbar and the two buttons it contains hToolbar uitoolbar Toolbar for Open and Print buttons Parent hMainFigure HandleVisibility callback hOpenPushtool uipushtool Open toolbar button Parent hToolbar TooltipString Open File CData iconRead fullfile matlabroot toolbox matlab icons opendoc mat HandleVisibility callback ClickedCallback hOpenMenuitemCallback hPrintPushtool uipushtool Print toolbar button Parent hToolbar TooltipString Print Figure CData iconRead fullfile matlabroot toolbox matlab icons printdoc mat HandleVisibility callback ClickedCallback hPrintMenuitemCallback The uitoolbar function creates the toolbar The uipushtool function creates t
90. the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove 6 31 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 32 The check box accommodates only a single line of text If you specify a component width that is too small to accommodate the specified String MATLAB software truncates the string with an ellipsis r Figure 1 gt e xs File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DG Ws AQoDeAL Create the check box with the box checked by setting the Value property to the value of the Max property default is 1 Set Value to Min default is 0 to leave the box unchecked Correspondingly when the user clicks the check box the software sets Value to Max when the user checks the box and to Min when the user clears it If you want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details Edit Text To create an edit text component that displays the initial text Enter your name here as shown in this figure A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help NG HS R AAODRA Enter your name here Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Specify the text to be displayed when the edit text co
91. this data at the top level makes the data accessible to all functions without having to pass them as arguments 3 Command line input processing 14 35 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 4 Figure window and component creation 63 UI initialization 6 Callback definitions These callbacks which service the UI components are local functions of the colorPalette main function and so have access to the data and component handles created at the top level without their having to be passed as arguments 7 Helper function definitions These helper functions are local functions of the colorPalette main function and so have access to the data and component handles created at the top level without their having to be passed as arguments UI Programming Techniques This topic explains the following UI programming techniques as they are used in the creation of the colorPalette Pass Input Arguments to the Program on page 14 36 e Pass Output to a Caller on Returning on page 14 37 Pass Input Arguments to the Program Inputs to the program are custom property value pairs colorPalette allows one such property Parent The names are case insensitive The colorPalette syntax is mGetColorFcn colorPalette Parent hPaletteContainer Definition and Initialization of the Properties The colorPalette function first defines a variable mInputArgs as varargin to accept the input arguments mInputArgs varargin
92. use their properties and methods to schedule tasks update information and time out processes For example you can set up a timer to acquire real time data at certain intervals which your UI then analyzes and displays The UI displays a surface plot of the peaks function and contains three uicontrols The Start Randomizing push button Starts the timer running which executes at a rate determined by the slider control At each iteration random noise is added to the surface plot The Stop Randomizing push button Halts the timer leaving the surface plot in its current state until you click the Start Randomizing button again The Timer Period slider Speeds up and slows down the timer changing its period within a range of 0 01 to 2 seconds 9 79 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 80 E ex guide timergui fo E Timer GUI Demo Son ranaonzna 0 01 Timer Period s 0 1 2 0 To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating_guis examples ex_guide_timergui fileattrib ex_guide timergui w guide ex_guide_timergui fig 2 From the GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button E The ex_guide_timergui m code displays in the MATLAB Editor The following figures show the UI when you run it The le
93. v Wam before clearing the Command Window Command Window Current Folder v Confirm when overwriting variables in MAT files Current Folder Editor Debugger v Confirm when overwriting workspace variables via drag and drop Current Folder Figure Copy Template e Prompt when editing files that do not exist Editor z Fonts a El debug Editor General GUIDE MAT Files a E Confirmation Dialogs o Co default callback implementation GUIDE Source Control a Confirm before exiting MATLAB General Java Heap Memory v Confirm when deleting variables Workspace GUIDE Help Keyboard Toolbars Variables Web a Workspace E S ox canei Apy Hep Prompt to Save on Activate When you activate a UI from the Layout Editor by clicking the Run button a dialog box informs you of the impending save and lets you choose whether or not you want to continue ED Activating will save changes to your figure file and MATLAB code Do you wish to continue Do not show this dialog again ve n 5 3 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options 5 4 Prompt to Save on Export From the Layout Editor when you select File gt Export a dialog box informs you of the impending save and lets you choose whether or not you want to continue GUIDE x 9 Exporting will save changes to your figure file and MATLAB code lt 7 Do you wish to continue Do not show this dialog again For more information on exporting a UI see Create Pr
94. you can set the property to the string default This ensures that the software uses the system default at run time You can use the Property Inspector to set this property 4 Inspector matlab ui control UL Mz Aj p mt STECKEN UU iri OUZ FontAngle normal z FontSize 8 0 2 FontUnits points X FontWeight normal D As an alternative use the set command to set the property in the UI code file For example if there is a push button in your UI and its handle is stored in the pushbutton1 field of the handles structure then the statement set handles pushbutton1 FontName default sets the FontName property to use the system default Design Cross Platform Uls in GUIDE Specify a Fixed Width Font If you want to use a fixed width font for a user interface control set its FontName property to the string fixedwidth This special identifier ensures that your UI uses the standard fixed width font for the target platform You can find the name of the fixed width font that is used on a given platform by querying the root FixedWidthFontName property get groot FixedWidthFontName Use a Specific Font Name You can specify an actual font name such as Times or Courier for the FontName property However doing so may cause your UI to not look as you intended when run on a different computer If the target computer does not have the specified font it will substitute another font
95. 15 6 Uninstall App To uninstall an app that appears in the apps gallery under My Apps 1 On the desktop toolstrip click the Apps tab 2 On the far right of the Apps section click the down arrow 3 Inthe apps gallery under My Apps right click the app and select Uninstall Hover over an app button to see a tooltip describing the app MATLAB deletes the app code from disk and removes the app from the apps gallery Install Apps in a Shared Network Location Install Apps in a Shared Network Location If you are responsible for administering MATLAB software for your business group consider installing apps in a shared network location This practice can be useful for instance if a member of your technical staff creates and packages apps that several staff members use You control installation upgrades and deinstallation to ensure that every staff member uses the same version of each app 1 Install each app within the same write protected shared network folder 2 Direct staff members to change their apps preferences to specify the network folder as the apps installation folder For details see Change Apps Installation Folder As needed reinstall an app to upgrade it to a new version or revert it to an earlier version When an app is no longer used you can uninstall it For details see Install or Reinstall App on page 15 5 and Uninstall App on page 15 6 15 7 15 Apps Change Apps Installation Fo
96. 2 Set the Window Size in GUIDE 2 5 Layout the Simple GUIDE UI 2 6 Code the Behavior of the Simple GUIDE UI 2 16 Open and Run the Simple GUIDE UI 2 22 Files Generated by GUIDE 2 24 Code Files and FIG Files 0 000000 eee 2 24 UI Code File Structure 0 000 00 eee eee 2 24 Adding Callback Templates to an Existing UI Code File 2 25 About GUIDE Generated Callbacks 2 26 vi A Simple Programmatic UI 3 Create a Simple UI Programmatically 3 2 Create a Code File for the Simple Programmatic UI 3 3 Create a Figure for the Simple Programmatic UI 3 3 Add Components to the Simple Programmatic UI 3 4 Code the Simple Programmatic UI Behavior 3 6 Verify Code and Run the Program 3 10 Create UIs with GUIDE Contents What Is GUIDE 4 GUIDE Getting Started 0 05 4 2 Wayouts ace fete hed wht ahd hee ha ae as 4 2 UL Programming se aea Seeking ecko sos a AES 4 2 GUIDE Tools Summary 000000 4 3 GUIDE Preferences and Options 5 GUIDE Preferences 0 0 00 cc eens 5 2 Set Preferences 0 00 cee ee eee 5 2 Confirmation Preferences 0 0000 e eee 5 2 Backward Compatibility Preference 5 4 All Other Preferences 0 000 e eee ees 5 4 GUIDE Options 0 0 0 0 0
97. 39 Position 644 233 532 440 Use Coordinates to Place Components The status bar at the bottom of the GUIDE Layout Editor displays Current Point The current location of the mouse relative to the lower left corner of the grid area in the Layout Editor Position The Position property of the selected component a 4 element vector distance from left distance from bottom width height where distances are relative to the parent figure panel or button group All values are given in pixels Rulers also display pixels 6 19 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 20 If you select a single component and move it the first two elements of the position vector distance from left distance from bottom are updated as you move the component If you resize the component the last two elements of the position vector width height are updated as you change the size The first two elements may also change if you resize the component such that the position of its lower left corner changes If no components are selected the position vector is that of the figure For more information see Use Coordinate Readouts on page 6 74 Add a Component to a Panel or Button Group To add a component to a panel or button group select the component in the component palette then move the cursor over the desired panel or button group The position of the cursor determines the component s parent GUIDE highlights the potential parent as
98. 9e 000 Engineering format with 7 14 digits precision Fixed dollars and cents 355 113 Ratio of small integers for positive for negative blank for zero OK Cancel Leave the Available column at the default value This allows MATLAB to chose based on the value of the Data property of the table For the Fixed Adj column select Choice List to create a pop up menu In the Choice List Editor click Insert to add a second choice and type Fixed and Adjustable as the 2 choices 6 61 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Choice Fixed Adjustable Note For a user to select items from a choice list the ColumnEditab1le property of the column that the list occupies must be set to true The pop up control only appears when the column is editable Set Row Properties In the Row tab leave the default RowName Show numbered row headers 6 62 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Rows T Unless the Show names entered below option is selected the number of rows appearing in the table is determined by the number of rows in Data Do not show row headers Show numbered row headers Show names entered below as the row headers Name Insert BS Copy ejwjn e tur Down OK Cancel Apply J Help Set Data Properties Use the Data property to specify the data in the table Create the data
99. ATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X After the preceding comments add the following Get the current position from the handles structure to pass to the modal dialog pos_size get handles figure1 Position Call modaldlg with the argument Position user_response modaldlg Title Confirm Close switch user_response case No take no action case Yes Prepare to close application window LP PAX delete handles figure1 end 10 Save closedlg m Run the Program 1 2 On the Layout Editor toolbar click the Run button gt In the closedlg dialog box click the Close push button The modal dialog box opens E Confirm Close koj el Are you sure you want to close Yes l No Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE 3 Click Yes or No Yes closes both dialog boxes Nocloses just the Confirm Close dialog box How Close Confirmation Dialogs Work This section describes how the dialogs work 1 When you click the Close button the close_pushbutton_ Callback performs these tasks a Gets the current position of the window from the handles structure with the command pos size get handles figure1 Position b Calls the modal dialog box with the command user_response modaldlg Title Confirm Close Tip This is an example of calling a UI with a property value pair In this case the figure property is Title and its value is
100. Actions on page 8 2 GUIDE Generated Callback Functions and Property Values on page 8 4 GUIDE Callback Syntax on page 8 5 Renaming and Removing GUIDE Generated Callbacks on page 8 5 Callbacks for Different User Actions UI and graphics components have certain properties that you can associate with specific callback functions Each of these properties corresponds to a specific user action For example a uicontrol has a property called Callback You can set the value of this property to be a handle to a callback function an anonymous function or a string containing MATLAB commands Setting this property makes your UI respond when the user interacts with the uicontrol If the Callback property has no specified value then nothing happens when the end user interacts with the uicontrol This table lists the callback properties that are available the user actions that trigger the callback function and the most common UI and graphics components that use them Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property ButtonDownF cn End user presses a mouse button axes figure uibuttongroup while the pointer is on the uicontrol uipanel uitable component or figure Callback End user triggers the component uicontextmenu uicontrol For example selecting a menu uimenu item moving a slider or pressing a push button CellEditCallback End user edits a value in a table uitable w
101. Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE 9 68 In this section About the Example on page 9 68 Design the 3 D Globe UI on page 9 69 Graphics Techniques Used in the 3 D Globe UI on page 9 74 About the Example This example shows how to create a UI with 3 D axes in which the Earth spins on its axis It accepts no inputs but it reads a matrix of topographic elevations for the whole Earth The UI provides controls to perform these tasks Start and stop the rotation Change lighting direction Display a latitude longitude grid or graticule Save the animation as a movie in a MAT file Exit the application Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE globegui To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating _guis examples globegui fileattrib globegui w guide globegui fig From GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button El The globegui m code displays in the MATLAB Editor Design the 3 D Globe UI Alternate the Label of a Push Button on page 9 71 Interrupt the Spin Callback on page 9 72 Make a Movie of the Animation on page 9 73 9 69 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls In the GUIDE Layout Editor the UI looks like this Y globegui fig File Edi
102. B tools to establish values for component properties The following sections describe some of the tools Mode or Tool Use it to Commands Plot edit mode Interactively edit and annotate plots plotedit Property Editor Edit graphical properties of objects propedit propertyeditor size and choose values for them Property Interactively display and edit inspect Inspector most object properties Align Distribute Align and distribute components align Tool with respect to one another Color Selector Choose a color from a palette of uisetcolor colors and obtain its value Font Selector Preview character font style and uisetfont Some of these tools return property values while others let you edit properties interactively without returning their values In particular the Property Inspector lets you interactively set almost any object property You then can copy property values and paste them into the Command Window or a code file However when you capture vector valued properties such as Color or Position the Inspector only lets you copy values one number at a time Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively Note The following sections describe some techniques for interactively refining the appearance of UIs If you are building a UI that opens a saved FIG file re saving that file will preserve most of the properties you interactively change If your program file crea
103. Clicking the button plots the selected data in the axes 3 13 Create Uls with GUIDE What Is GUIDE GUIDE Getting Started on page 4 2 GUIDE Tools Summary on page 4 3 What Is GUIDE GUIDE Getting Started 4 2 In this section UI Layout on page 4 2 UI Programming on page 4 2 UI Layout GUIDE is a development environment that provides a set of tools for creating user interfaces UIs These tools simplify the process of laying out and programming UIs Using the GUIDE Layout Editor you can populate a UI by clicking and dragging UI components such as axes panels buttons text fields sliders and so on into the layout area You also can create menus and context menus for the UI From the Layout Editor you can size the UI modify component look and feel align components set tab order view a hierarchical list of the component objects and set UI options UI Programming GUIDE automatically generates a program file containing MATLAB functions that controls how the UI behaves This code file provides code to initialize the UI and it contains a framework for the UI callbacks Callbacks are functions that execute when the user interacts with a UI component Use the MATLAB Editor to add code to these callbacks Note MATLAB software provides a selection of standard dialog boxes that you can create with a single function call For an example see the documentation f
104. Controller affect the aircraft s angle of attack and the amount of G force the pilot feels Note that the Simulink diagram f14 md1 must be open to run this program If you close the F14 Simulink model the program reopens it whenever it requires the model to execute Change the Controller Gains You can change gains in two blocks 1 The Proportional gain Kf in the Gain block 2 The Integral gain Ki in the Transfer Function block UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters You can change either of the gains in one of the two ways 1 Move the slider associated with that gain 2 Type anew value into the Current value edit field associated with that gain The block s values are updated as soon as you enter the new value in the UI Run the Simulation Once you have set the gain values you can run the simulation by clicking the Simulate and store results button The simulation time and output vectors are stored in the Results list Plot the Results You can generate a plot of one or more simulation results by selecting the row of results Runt Run2 etc in the Results list that you want to plot and clicking the Plot button If you select multiple rows the graph contains a plot of each result The graph is displayed in a figure which is cleared each time you click the Plot button The figure s handle is hidden so that only the UI can display graphs in this window Remove Results To remove a result from the Results list sele
105. CurrentValue_Callback hObject eventdata handles Ensure model is open model_open handles Get the new value for the Kf Gain NewStrVal get hObject String NewVal str2double NewStrvVal Check that the entered value falls within the allowable range if isempty NewVal NewVal lt 5 NewVal gt 0 Revert to last value as indicated by KfValueSlider OldVal get handles KfValueSlider Value set hObject String OldVal else Use new Kf value Set the value of the KfValueSlider to the new value set handles KfValueSlider Value NewVal1 Set the Gain parameter of the Kf Gain Block to the new value set_param f14 Controller Gain Gain NewStrVal end The callback for the Ki Current value follows a similar approach Run the Simulation from the UI The Simulate and store results button callback runs the model simulation and stores the results in the handles structure Storing data in the handles structure simplifies the process of passing data to other local function since this structure can be passed as an argument When you click the Simulate and store results button the callback performs these tasks Calls sim which runs the simulation and returns the data that is used for plotting e Creates a structure to save the results of the simulation the current values of the simulation parameters set by the UI and the run name and number UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters e Sto
106. Current_Phone get handles Contact_Phone string If empty then return if isempty Current_Name return end Get the current list of addresses from the handles structure Addresses handles Addresses Go through the list of contacts Determine if the current name matches an existing name for i 1 length Addresses if strcomp Addresses i Name Current_Name set handles Contact_Name string Addresses i Name set handles Contact_Phone string Addresses i Phone handles Index i guidata hObject handles return end end If it s a new name ask to create a new entry Answer questdlg Do you want to create a new entry Create New Entry Yes Cancel Yes UI That Uses Persistent Data switch Answer case Yes Addresses end 1 Name Current_Name Grow array by 1 Addresses end Phone Current_Phone index length Addresses handles Addresses Addresses handles Index index guidata hObject handles return case Cancel Revert back to the original number set handles Contact_Name string Addresses handles Index Name set handles Contact_Phone String Addresses handles Index Phone return end Data Update Confirmation The Contact Phone text box displays the phone number of the entry listed in the Contact Name text box If you type in a new number and click one of the push buttons Contact_Phone_Callback on page 9 13 in address _book m opens a question dialog
107. DE Preferences and Options e GUIDE Preferences on page 5 2 GUIDE Options on page 5 8 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options GUIDE Preferences 5 2 In this section Set Preferences on page 5 2 Confirmation Preferences on page 5 2 Backward Compatibility Preference on page 5 4 All Other Preferences on page 5 4 Set Preferences You can set preferences for GUIDE From the MATLAB Home tab in the Environment section click Preferences These preferences apply to GUIDE and to all UIs you create The preferences are in different locations within the Preferences dialog box Confirmation Preferences GUIDE provides two confirmation preferences You can choose whether you want to display a confirmation dialog box when you Activate a UI from GUIDE Export a UI from GUIDE Change a callback signature generated by GUIDE In the Preferences dialog box click MATLAB gt General gt Confirmation Dialogs to access the GUIDE confirmation preferences Look for the word GUIDE in the Tool column GUIDE Preferences MATLAB MATLAB General Confirmation Dialogs Preferences Apps Code Analyzer The following dialog boxes require user confirmation Select a check box if you want that dialog box to appear coe History State Dialog Box Description Tool Command Window v Warn before deleting Command History items Command History Comparison
108. IDE 6 10 Bonita soe Do you want to create a question dialog The dialog returns the text string Yes or No depending on which button you click Select this template if you want your UI to return a string or to be modal Modal dialogs are blocking which means that the code stops executing while dialog exists This means that the user cannot interact with other MATLAB windows until they click one of the dialog buttons To view the code for this dialog open the template in the Layout Editor and click the Editor button amp on the toolbar Set the UI Window Size in GUIDE Set the UI Window Size in GUIDE Set the size of the UI window by resizing the grid area in the Layout Editor Click the lower right corner of the layout area and drag it until the UI is the desired size If necessary make the window larger t 512 5 Position 520 380 560 420 As you drag the corner handle the readout in the lower right corner shows the current position of the UI in pixels regardless of the UI Units property setting Existing objects within the UI resize with the window if their Units are set to normalized Note Setting the Units property to characters nonresizable UIs or normalized resizable UIs gives the UI a more consistent appearance across platforms See Cross Platform Compatible Units on page 6 121 for more information Prevent Existing Objects from Resizing with the Window Existing o
109. IG file it uses this property value to determine that figure is a List Master UI If the Tag has any other value the program closes the figure and displays an error The Quit menu option closes the UI after checking whether the figure needs to be saved If the contents have changed its callback 1mquit calls the lmsaveas callback to give the user an opportunity to save The figure s CloseRequestFcn also uses the lmquit callback when the user clicks the figure s close box List Master Setup Functions Although the initial UI has no controls other than a menu the user can select File gt Save as to save a blank UI as a FIG file Opening the saved FIG file has the same result as executing the listmaster function The user can create a new list by selecting File gt New This executes setup functions that populate the UI with uicontrols The 1mnew callback manages these tasks calling setup functions in the following sequence The three setup functions are listed and described below Setup Function How Used lm_get_list_name Calls inputdlg to get name for new list enforcing size limit of 32 characters lm_make_ctrl_btns Creates three push buttons for list navigation and a check box to control line numbering This function also loads listmaster_icons mat and adds icons to the to push buttons Finally it sets each button s callback functions lm_make_edit_panel Creates a button group with two radio buttons that control the edi
110. Inthe Layout Editor select File gt Save 7 Inthe Save As dialog box in the File name field type modaldlg fig 5 H CY modaldlg fig fo lalz File Edit View Layout Tools Help A EE EEATT ERa Push Button a Slider Radio Button M Check Box mI Edit Text TaT Static Text 3 Pop up Menu Set Up a UI with a Close Button To set up a separate UI with a Close button In the GUIDE Layout Editor select File gt New In the GUIDE Quick Start dialog box select Blank GUI Default Then click OK From the component palette on the left drag a push button into the layout area Right click the push button and select Property Inspector Change the String property value to Close Change the Tag property value to cClose_pushbutton From the File menu select Save ON CO Oh WHND In Save As dialog box in the File name field type closedlg fig Then click Save 9 3 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 4 The code file cClosedlg m opens in the Editor On the Editor tab in the Navigate section click Go To and then select close_pushbutton_Callback The following generated code for the Close button callback appears in the Editor Executes on button press in close_pushbutton function close pushbutton _Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to close_pushbutton see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of M
111. Item 2 mh3 uimenu cmenu Label Item 3 You can specify any applicable Uimenu Properties when you define the context menu items See the uimenu reference page and Add Menu Bar Menus on page 10 66 for information about using uimenu to create menu items Note that context menus do not have an Accelerator property Note After you have created the context menu and all its items set their HandleVisibility properties to off by executing the following statements cmenuhandles findall figurehandle type uicontextmenu cmenuhandles HandleVisibility off menuitemhandles findall cmenuhandles type uimenu menuitemhandles HandleVisibility off Associate the Context Menu with Graphics Objects You can associate a context menu with the figure itself and with all components that have a UIContextMenu property This includes axes panel button group all user interface controls uicontrols This code adds a panel and an axes to the figure The panel contains a single push button ph uipanel Parent fh Units pixels Position 20 40 150 150 bhi uicontrol ph String Button 1 Position 20 20 60 40 ah axes Parent fh Units pixels Position 220 40 150 150 10 75 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 76 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help Nees s Aavoaecd aloe This code associates the context m
112. L A2 0H ao Managing the Layout in Resizable Uls To create a resizable UI and manage the layout when the user resizes the window set the figure s SizeChangedF cn property to be a handle to a callback function Code the callback function to manage the layout when the window size changes 10 36 Lay Out a UI Programmatically If your UI has another container such as a uipanel or uibuttongroup you can manage the layout of the container s child components in a separate callback function that you assign to the SizeChangedFcn property The SizeChangedF cn callback executes only under these circumstances The container becomes visible for the first time The container is visible while its drawable area changes The container becomes visible for the first time after its drawable area changes This situation occurs when the drawable area changes while the container is invisible and becomes visible later Note Typically the drawable area changes at the same time the outer bounds change However adding or removing menu bars or tool bars to a figure causes the outer bounds to change while the drawable area remains constant Therefore the SizeChangedFcn callback does not execute when you add or remove menu bars or tool bars This UI is a resizable version of the simple UI defined in Example of a Simple Layout on page 10 34 This code includes a figure SizeChangedF cn callback called resizeui The resizeui f
113. MAT file data using local functions in a GUIDE code file It steps you through the code that reads and displays data from a MAT file In addition the UI provides a File menu for saving a MAT file or loading a new one and a Contact menu for adding entries to the MAT file E Address Book babaka File Contact Contact Contact Name The MathWorks USA Contact Phone 508 647 7000 To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE 9 7 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 8 copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples addr fileattrib addr w guide address book fig 2 In the GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button amp The address book m code file opens in the MATLAB Editor Calling Syntax The address book _OpeningFcn on page 9 8 code in address _book m interprets the input arguments Ifyou call the address book function with no arguments the UI displays the default address book Ifyou call the address book function with a pair of arguments for example address book book my list mat the first argument book is a key word that the code looks for in the opening function If the key word matches the code uses the second argument as the MAT file for the address book address_book_OpeningFcn function address_book_OpeningFcn hObjec
114. MATLAB Creating Graphical User Interfaces R201 5a How to Contact MathWorks Latest news www mathworks com Sales and services www mathworks com sales_and_ services User community www mathworks com matlabcentral Technical support www mathworks com support contact_us Phone 508 647 7000 The MathWorks Inc 3 Apple Hill Drive Natick MA 01760 2098 MATLAB Creating Graphical User Interfaces COPYRIGHT 2000 2015 by The MathWorks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement The software may be used or copied only under the terms of the license agreement No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from The MathWorks Inc FEDERAL ACQUISITION This provision applies to all acquisitions of the Program and Documentation by for or through the federal government of the United States By accepting delivery of the Program or Documentation the government hereby agrees that this software or documentation qualifies as commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used or defined in FAR 12 212 DFARS Part 227 72 and DFARS 252 227 7014 Accordingly the terms and conditions of this Agreement and only those rights specified in this Agreement shall pertain to and govern the use modification reproduction release performance display and disclosure of the Program and Documentation by the federa
115. MATLAB products In addition you can create your own apps The Apps tab on the MATLAB Toolstrip displays all currently installed apps MATLAB R2013a Get More Install Package Apps App App FILE gt aA Command Window a B Sa PUBLISH VIEW Py FAVORITES w eoe 6 Curve Fitting Optimization MuPAD PID Tuning System Signal Analys Notebook Identification MATH STATISTICS AND OPTIMIZATION B O amp Curve Fitting Distribution MBC Model MuPAD Neural Net Fitting Fitting ees Notebook Clustering CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS Note You cannot run MATLAB Apps using MATLAB Compiler Runtime MCR Apps are for MATLAB to MATLAB deployment To run code using MCR the code must be packaged using MATLAB Compiler Where to Get Apps There are two key ways to get apps 16 2 Apps Overview MATLAB Products Many MATLAB products such as Curve Fitting Toolbox Signal Processing Toolbox and Control System Toolbox include apps In the apps gallery you can see the apps that come with your installed products Create Your Own You can create your own MATLAB app and package it into a single file that you can distribute to others The apps packaging tool automatically finds and includes all the files needed for your app It also identifies any MATLAB products required to run your app You can share your app directly with other users or share it with the MATLAB us
116. Membrane and then click the Mesh button The UI displays a mesh plot of the MathWorks L shaped Membrane logo 2 22 Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE 3 Try other combinations before closing the window 2 23 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE Files Generated by GUIDE 2 24 In this section Code Files and FIG Files on page 2 24 UI Code File Structure on page 2 24 Adding Callback Templates to an Existing UI Code File on page 2 25 About GUIDE Generated Callbacks on page 2 26 Code Files and FIG Files By default the first time you save or run your program GUIDE save two files A FIG file with extension fig that contains a complete description of the UI layout and each UI component such as push buttons axes panels menus and so on The FIG file is a binary file and you cannot modify it except by changing the layout in GUIDE FIG files are specializations of MAT files See Writing Custom Applications to Access MAT Files for more information A code file with extension m that initially contains initialization code and templates for some callbacks that control UI behavior You generally add callbacks you write for your UI components to this file As the callbacks are functions the UI code file can never be a MATLAB script When you save your UI the first time GUIDE automatically opens the code file in your default editor The FIG file and the code file must have the
117. Predefined Tools Tag Q New eo Open Make toolbar visible lal Save amp Print S Zoom In Sy Zoom Out More Property amp Pan Rotate Yee Data Cursor O colorbar EE Legend To add a tool drag an icon from the Tool Palette into the Toolbar Layout which initially contains the text prompt shown above and edit the tool s properties in the Tool Properties pane When you first create a UI no toolbar exists on it When you open the Toolbar Editor and place the first tool a toolbar is created and a preview of the tool you just added appears in the top part of the window If you later open a UI that has a toolbar the Toolbar Editor shows the existing toolbar although the Layout Editor does not Add Tools You can add a tool to a toolbar in three ways Drag and drop tools from the Tool Palette 6 111 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Select a tool in the palette and click the Add button Double click a tool in the palette Dragging allows you to place a tool in any order on the toolbar The other two methods place the tool to the right of the right most tool on the Toolbar Layout The new tool is selected indicated by a dashed box around it and its properties are shown in the Tool Properties pane You can select only one tool at a time You can cycle through the Tool Palette using the tab key or arrow keys on your computer keyboard You must have placed at least one tool on the toolbar After yo
118. Question Dialog template file contains code to performs these tasks Uses the nargin function to determine the number of user specified arguments which do not include hObject eventdata and handles e Parses varargin to obtain property name value pairs converting each name string to lower case Handles the case where the argument title is used as an alias for the figure Name property Handles the case string assigning the following value as a String property to the appropriate static text object function modalgui_OpeningFcn hObject eventdata handles varargin Insert custom Title and Text if specified by the user Hint when choosing keywords be sure they are not easily confused Initialize Uls Created Using GUIDE with existing figure properties See the output of set figure for a list of figure properties if nargin gt 3 for index 1 2 nargin 3 if nargin 3 index break end switch lower varargin index case title set hObject Name varargin index 1 case string set handles text1 String varargin index 1 end end end The if block loops through the odd elements of varargin checking for property names or aliases and the case blocks assign the following even varargin element as a value to the appropriate property of the figure or one of its components You can add more cases to handle additional property assignments that you want the opening function to perform Initi
119. Retrieve and Store Data The Contact Name text box displays the name of the address book entry If you type in a new name and press enter the Contact_Name_Callback on page 9 12 in address_book m does the following Ifthe name exists in the current address book the corresponding phone number displays Ifthe name does not exist a question dialog box asks you if you want to create a new entry or cancel and return to the name previously displayed 9 11 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 12 Ifyou create a new entry you must save the MAT file using the File gt Save menu The Contact_Name_ Callback callback uses the handles structure to access the contents of the address book and to maintain an index pointer handles Index that enables the callback to determine what name is displayed before you enter a new one The index pointer indicates what name is currently displayed The Check_And_Load function adds the address book and index pointer fields when you run the address_book function If you add a new entry the callback adds the new name to the address book and updates the index pointer to reflect the new value displayed The updated address book and index pointer are again saved using guidata in the handles structure Contact_Name_Callback function Contact_Name_Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin Get the strings in the Contact Name and Phone text box Current_Name get handles Contact_Name string
120. SHADI a My Panel The first argument passed to uipanel f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as another panel or a button group Title My Panel specifies a title to display on the panel Position 25 1 5 8 specifies the location and size of the panel as a fraction of the parent container In this case the panel is 50 percent of the width of the figure and 80 percent of its height The left edge of the panel is located at 25 percent of the figure s width from the left The bottom of the panel is located 10 percent of the figure s height from the bottom If the figure is resized the panel retains its original proportions The following commands add two push buttons to the panel Setting the Units property to normalized causes the Position values to be interpreted as fractions of the parent panel Normalized units allow the buttons to retain their original proportions when the panel is resized 10 23 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul b1 uicontrol p Style pushbutton String Button 1 Units normalized Position 1 55 8 3 b2 uicontrol p Style pushbutton String Button 2 Units normalized Position 1 15 8 3 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGMs k SAAC9024 4 0 My Panel Button Gro
121. T file or specify a new file The dialog box returns the selected file name and path The final steps include Using fullfile to create a platform independent path name Calling save to save the new data in the MAT file Updating the handles structure to contain the new MAT file name Calling guidata to save the handles structure Save_Callback function Save Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin Get the Tag of the menu selected Tag get hObject Tag Get the address array Addresses handles Addresses Based on the item selected take the appropriate action switch Tag case Save Save to the default addrbook file File handles LastFile save File Addresses case Save _As Allow the user to select the file name to save to filename pathname uiputfile fF mate ne ee a Save as If Cancel was selected then return if isequal filename pathname 0 0 return else Construct the full path and save File fullfile pathname filename save File Addresses handles LastFile File UI That Uses Persistent Data guidata hObject handles end end Clear UI Fields The Create New menu clears the Contact Name and Contact Phone text fields to facilitate adding a new name and number The New Callback callback sets the text String properties to empty strings function New_Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin set handles Contact_Name String set handle
122. Tab key the entire contents is highlighted and the editing cursor is at the end right side of the string A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help a TODEA FAEERE Enter your na Ifyou want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details You specify the text font to display in the edit box by typing the name of a font residing on your system into the FontName entry in the Property Inspector On Microsoft Windows platforms the default is MS Sans Serif on Macintosh and UNIX platforms the default is Helvetica Tip To find out what fonts are available type uisetfont at the MATLAB prompt a dialog displays containing a list box from which you can select and preview available fonts When you select a font its name and other characteristics are returned in a structure from which you can copy the FontName string and paste it into the Property Inspector Not all fonts listed may be available to users of your UI on their systems Static Text To create a static text component with text Select a data set as shown in this figure 6 34 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSGaS RAQVOes S O Specify the text that appears in the component by setting the
123. To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function my_slider hfig figure data struct val 0O diffMax 1 Slider uicontrol Parent hfig Style slider Units normalized Position 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 1 Tag Slider Callback slider_callback button uicontrol Parent hfig Style pushbutton UnLts normalized Position 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 String Display Difference es Callback button_callback function slider_callback hObject eventdata sval hObject Value diffMax hObject Max sval data val sval data diffMax diffMax end function button_callback hObject eventdata display data val data diffMax end end The main function defines a struct array called data When the user moves the slider the slider_callback function updates the val and dif fMax fields of the data structure When the end user clicks the push button the button_callback function displays the values stored in data Note Nested functions are not recommended for GUIDE UIs Store Data Using the guidata Function The guidata function provides a way to share data with the figure window You can store or retrieve the your data in any callback through the hObject component This means that unlike working with UserData or application data you do not have to Share Data Among Callbacks search for a specific UI c
124. UIs Create a complex UI with many components or one that interacts with another UI Creating complex UIs programmatically lets you control exact placement of the components and provides reproducibility How to Create a Ul with GUIDE 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE Create a Simple Ul Using GUIDE 2 2 This example shows how to use GUIDE to create a simple user interface UI such as shown in the following figure E A Simple GUI Lo ea 10 Surf 5 push buttons 0 5 10 Select Data static text 40 Peaks pop up menu axes Subsequent topics guide you through the process of creating this UI If you prefer to view and run the code that created this UI without creating it set your current folder to one to which you have write access Copy the example code and open it in the Editor by issuing the following MATLAB commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples simple gui fileattrib simple_gui w guide simple gui fig edit simple _gui m To run the UI on the Editor tab in the Run section click Run gt Open a New UI in the GUIDE Layout Editor 1 Start GUIDE by typing guide at the MATLAB prompt Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE Create New GUI GUIDE templates GUI with Uicontrols GUI with Axes and Menu A Modal Question Dialog sf home 00 ah juser Documents MATLAB t Browse
125. Units myunits else rect end clipboard copy rect Place set string on system Clipboard as well as returning it 10 47 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 48 The setpos function uses figure units to set the component Position property First setpos gets and saves the Units property of the component and sets that property to figure units After setting the object position the function restores the original units of the object The following steps show how to use setpos to reposition a button away from its default position 1 Put this statement into your UI code file and then execute it btn1 uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOSGMS F A80908K4 42 08 2 Put the following statement in your UI code file execute it and then drag out a Position for object btn1 rect setpos btn1 Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Hep OGMSs k AAC9eCLs A 08 gt 10 49 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 50 4 The button Position is set returned and placed on the system clipboard rect 37 362 127 27 Add a Position parameter and empty value to the uicontrol command from step 1 in your UI code file as follows btni uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Position
126. Value 1 Position 30 20 130 20 i Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSHsl k AAg9ead V Display file extension The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style checkbox specify the uicontrol to be a check box The next pair String Display file extension puts a text label on the check box The Value property specifies whether the box is checked Set Value to the value of the Max property default is 1 to create the component with the box checked Set Value to Min default is 0 to leave the box unchecked Correspondingly when the user clicks the check box MATLAB sets Value to Max when the user checks the box and to Min when the user unchecks it The Position property specifies the location and size of the check box In this example the check box is 130 pixels wide and 20 high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom Slider This code creates a slider f figure s uicontrol fh Style slider Min 0 Max 100 Value 25 SliderStep 0 05 0 2 Position 30 20 150 30 10 13 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 14 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DGmMes k AAV90
127. X Control Tag figurel Current Point 153 333 Position 680 465 409 333 You can also open the Toolbar Editor from the Tools menu 6 108 Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls T untitled1 fig DSH mae rsat Push Button a Slider Radio Button M Check Box felt Edit Text TT Static Text 3 Pop up Menu Zl Listbox Fl Toggle Button E Table iv Axes i Panel 8 Button Group X ActiveX Control Tag figurel i File Edit View Layout Help Run Align Objects Grid and Rulers Menu Editor Tab Order Editor Toolbar Editor N GUI Options Ctri T Current Point 85 333 Position 680 465 409 333 The Toolbar Editor gives you interactive access to all the features of the uitoolbar uipushtool and uitoggletool functions It only operates in the context of GUIDE you cannot use it to modify any of the built in MATLAB toolbars However you can use the Toolbar Editor to add modify and delete a toolbar from any UI in GUIDE Currently you can add one toolbar to your UI in GUIDE However your UI can also include the standard MATLAB figure toolbar If you need to you can create a toolbar that looks like a normal figure toolbar but customize its callbacks to make tools such as pan zoom and open behave in specific ways Note
128. a Among Multiple GUIDE UIs 12 9 Manage Callback Execution 13 Interrupt Callback Execution 13 2 How to Control Interruption 13 2 Callback Behavior When Interruption is Allowed 13 2 Example sg ieee bee Rad hee we LES NE Ce a EAG Ge ee 13 3 Examples of UIs Created Programmatically 14 Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic UIs 14 2 About the Example 0 0 0 0 ceca 14 2 View the Example Code 000005 14 3 Generate the Graphing Commands and Data 14 3 Create the UI and Its Components 14 4 Tmitialize thenWil 3 4r2 Se yao E AREE vier sate 14 7 Define the Callbacks 0 00 0 14 8 Updating the Plot 0 rass eaa eee ee 14 11 Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic NOD dee se E Seon Me gate eT ewe Ge pe Lae a ne Dek gee Pale dane 14 12 Techniques Illustrated in the Example 14 12 About the Example 0 0 000 00 eee 14 12 xiii View the Example Code 0005 14 14 Set Up and Interact with the uitable 14 14 Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI 14 20 About the Example 0 0 00 ee 14 20 View the Example Code 000 14 21 Use the UI recica ei ne oe bc es a es 14 22 Program List Master 0 0000 eee ee eee 14 26 Add an Import from File Option to List Master 14 31 Add a Rena
129. a GUIDE UI 9 52 In this section About the Example on page 9 52 Read Workspace Variables on page 9 53 Read Selections from List Box on page 9 54 About the Example This example shows how to create a UI that uses a list box to display names of variables in the base workspace and then plot them Initially no variable names are selected in the list box The UI contains controls that perform these tasks Update the list Select multiple variables in the list box Exactly two variables must be selected Create linear semilogx and semilogy line graphs of selected variables The program evaluates the plotting commands in the base workspace It does no validation before plotting When you use this UI you are responsible for selecting pairs of variables that can be plotted against one another The top most selection is used as the x variable the lower one as the y variable Plot Workspace Variables in a GUIDE UI BB simple Plotter 5 eae Select 2 Variables to Plot Plotting Functions x1 y1 y3 Update Listbox To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples 1lb fileattrib lb w guide lb fig 2 From GUIDE Layout Editor click th
130. abel is replaced with sellabel The poplabel and sellabel objects are the Population and Selection labels on axes1 and axeS2 respectively These strings are appended to the current Title for uipanel3 to create a title for the plot in the new figure axes1fig or axes2fig Use Plot in New Window Feature Whenever you right click one of the axes in the UI and select Open plot in new window a new figure is generated containing the graph in the axes The callbacks do not check whether a graph exists in the axes axeS2 is empty until you select cells in the Data Set or whether a previously opened figure contains the same graph A new figure is always created and the contents of axes1 or axeS2 are copied into it For example you could right click a periodogram in axes1 and select Open plot in new window It is your responsibility to remove the new window when it is no longer needed The context menus can be programmed to do this Because their callbacks call guidata to save the handle of the last figure created for each of the axes another callback can delete or reuse either figure For example the plot_ax1_Callback and plot_ax2_Callback callbacks could check guidata for a valid axes handle stored in handles axesicopy or handles axes2copy and reuse the axes instead of creating a new figure Related Examples 7 Fast Fourier Transform FFT The FFT in One Dimension 9 45 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI
131. ac VR ae ah a bee PR BUR E Sica Oba 7 3 Create Programmatic Files from GUIDE Files 7 4 Rename GUIDE UIs and Files 7 5 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow Callbacks for Different User Actions GUIDE Generated Callback Functions and Property Wales sugea ose gee aaa GUIDE Callback Syntax Renaming and Removing GUIDE Generated Callbacks Initialize UIs Created Using GUIDE Opening Function Output Function Callbacks for Specific Components How to Use the Example Code Push Button Toggle Button Radio Button Check Box 004 Edit Text Field Shder no ere a EE E EEEE oars Pop Up Menu Panel en aina taane eaaa se tele Button Group Menu Item 8 2 8 2 8 4 8 5 8 7 8 9 8 11 8 11 8 12 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 18 8 20 8 21 8 22 8 25 8 26 8 29 Examples of GUIDE UIs 9 Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE About the Example Set Up the Close Confirmation Dialog Box Set Up a UI with a Close Button 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 3 ix x Contents Run the Program 0 ee ees How Close Confirmation Dialogs Work UI That Uses Persistent Data About the Examp
132. ains information about your app such as included files and a description Therefore if you exit the dialog box before clicking the Package button the prj file remains even though a mlappinsta11 file is not created The prj file enables you to quit and resume the app creation process where you left off To create an app installation file 1 On the desktop Toolstrip click the Apps tab 2 Ihn the File section click Package App 3 Click Add main file and specify the file that you use to run the app you created The main file must be callable with no input and must be a function or method not a script MATLAB analyzes the main file to determine other MATLAB files on which the main file depends For more information see Dependency Analysis on page 16 10 Tip The main file must return the figure handle of your app for MATLAB to remove your app files from the search path when users exit the app For more information see What Is the MATLAB Search Path Functions created by GUIDE return the figure handle 4 Add additional files required to run your app by clicking Add files folders Such files are data image and other files that were not included via dependency analysis 16 5 16 Packaging GUls as Apps 16 6 You can include external interfaces such as MEX files ActiveX or Java in the mlappinstall file although doing so can restrict the systems on which your app can run Describe your app
133. al Template Code Initially the input function template contains these lines of code e handles output hObject adds a new element output to the handles structure and assigns it the value of the input argument hObject which is the figure object e guidata hObject handles saves the handles structure You must use the guidata function to save any changes that you make to the handles structure It is not sufficient just to set the value of a handles field e uiwait handles myui initially commented out blocks program execution until uiresume is called or the window is closed Note that uiwait allows the user access to other MATLAB windows Remove the comment symbol for this statement if you want the UI to be blocking when it opens Output Function The output function returns to the command line outputs that are generated during its execution It is executed when the opening function returns control and before control returns to the command line This means that you must generate the outputs in the opening function or call uiwait in the opening function to pause its execution while other callbacks generate outputs 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 10 Function Naming and Template GUIDE names the output function by appending OutputFcn to the name of the UI This is an example of an output function template as it might appear in the myui code file Outputs from this function are returned to the command line function varargou
134. alue References in the code file to the corresponding field in the handles structure To rename a callback function without changing the component s Tag property 1 Change the name in the callback function definition 2 Update the component s callback property by changing the first argument passed to the anonymous function For example the original callback property for a push button might look like this hObject eventdata myui pushbutton1 Callback hObject eventdata guidata hObject In this example you must change the string pushbutton1_Callback to the new function name 3 Change all other references to the old function name to the new function name in the UI code file Deleting Callbacks You can delete a callback function when you want to remove or change the function that executes when the end user performs a specific action To delete a callback function 1 Search and replace all instances that refer to the callback function in your code 2 Open the UI in GUIDE and replace all instances that refer to the callback function in the Property Inspector 3 Delete the callback function More About Anonymous Functions Initialize Uls Created Using GUIDE Initialize Uls Created Using GUIDE In this section Opening Function on page 8 7 Output Function on page 8 9 Opening Function The opening function is the first callback in every UI code file It is executed ju
135. and Move Components rrerisernremnmgrenrrenrs corer Interruptible V On KeyPressFcn 2 KeyReleaseFcn 2 ListboxTop 1 0 2 Max 1 0 Min 0 0 2 Position 2 729 0 417 1 031 0 417 SliderStep EB 1x2 double array 2 String Push Button 2 Style pushbutton z Tag pushbutton1 2 TooltipString 2 UlContetMenu lt None gt B Units inches UserData centimeters Value characters Visible normalized ee aoe pixels 2 Click the sign next to Position The Property Inspector displays the elements of the Position property 6 77 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE F E Inspector matlab ui control UIControl o e EJ Be Hi e Max 10 rae Min 0 0 2 2 729 0 417 1 031 0 417 x 2 7291666666666665 2 y 0 41666666666666663 2 width 1 03125 2 height 0 41666666666666663 Ole SliderStep EX 1x2 double array 2 String Push Button Ca Style pushbutton mY 3 Ifyou have selected Only one component type the x and y coordinates of the point where you want the lower left corner of the component to appear More than one component type either the x or the y coordinate to align the components along that dimension 4 Reset the Units property to its previous setting either characters or normalized Note Setting the Units property to characters nonresizable UIs or normalized resizable UIs gives the UI a more consistent appearance across platforms See Cross Platform C
136. and axes whenever the user resizes the window The button height width and left edge stay the same when the window resizes The bottom edge of the button bbottomedge allows 50 pixels of space between the top of the figure and the top of the button The value of the axes height axheight is 75 of the available height in the figure The value of the axes bottom edge axbottomedge allows 30 pixels of space between the top of the figure and the top of the axes In this calculation the max function limits this value to nonnegative values Lay Out a UI Programmatically The value of the axes width axwidth allows 50 pixels of space between the right side of the axes and the right edge of the figure In this calculation the max function limits this value to nonnegative values Notice that all the layout code is inside the resizeui function It is a good practice to put all the layout code inside the SizeChangedFcn callback to ensure the most accurate results Also it is important to delay the display of the entire UI window until after all the variables that a SizeChangedF cn callback uses are defined Doing so can prevent the SizeChangedF cn callback from returning an error To delay the display of the window set the Visible property of the figure to off After you define all the variables that your SizeChangedFcn callback uses set the Visible property to on Manage the Stacking Order of Grouped Components If yo
137. annot include ActiveX components in the tab order When you create a UI GUIDE sets the tab order at each level to be the order in which you add components to that level in the Layout Editor This may not be the best order for the user Note Tab order also affects the stacking order of components If components overlap those that appear lower in the tabbing order are drawn on top of those that appear higher in the order See Front to Back Positioning on page 6 72 for more information The figure in the following UI contains an axes component a slider a panel static text and a pop up menu Of these only the slider the panel and the pop up menu at the figure level can be tabbed The panel contains three push buttons which can all be tabbed Customize Tabbing Behavior in a GUIDE UI 4 T untitled fg lele z File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGe 4eOre 4B hd Nay Current Point 62 3 Position 680 450 379 348 To examine and change the tab order of the panel components click the panel background to select it then select Tools gt Tab Order Editor in the Layout Editor 6 89 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 90 E3 UlControl pushbutton2 Surf UlIControl pushbutton3 Mesh UIControl pushbutton4 Contour cD UlControl popupmenul Peaks The Tab Order Editor displays the panel s components in their current tab order To c
138. arns you that you will modify the behavior of the tool when you change a callback field or click the View button next to it and asks if you want to proceed or not Custom Tools The two icons at the top of the Tool Palette create pushtools and toggletools These have no built in behavior except for managing their appearance when clicked on and off Consequently you need to provide your own callback s when you add one to your toolbar In order for custom tools to respond to clicks you need to edit their callbacks to create the behaviors you desire Do this by clicking the View button next to the callback in the Tool Properties pane and then editing the callback in the Editor window Add and Remove Separators Separators are vertical bars that set off tools enabling you to group them visually You can add or remove a separator in any of three ways Right click on a tool s preview and select Show Separator which toggles its separator on and off Check or clear the check box Separator to the left in the tool s property pane Change the Separator property of the tool from the Property Inspector After adding a separator that separator appears in the Toolbar Layout to the left of the tool The separator is not a distinct object or icon it is a property of the tool Move Tools You can reorder tools on the toolbar in two ways 6 113 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 114 e Drag a tool to a new position Select a tool in t
139. ate a push button with label Button 1 as shown in this figure 6 25 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOGWMS kF AAU9C4 A2 08 Specify the push button label by setting the String property to the desired label in this case Button 1 aE SliderStep B 1x2 double array CRM cuton Style pushbutton Taa mwachhuttani To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove The push button accommodates only a single line of text If you specify more than one line only the first line is shown If you create a push button that is too narrow to accommodate the specified String MATLAB software truncates the string with an ellipsis 6 26 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Butto If you want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details To add an image to a push button assign the button s CData property as an m by n by 3 array of RGB values that defines a truecolor image You must do this programmatically in the opening function of the UI code file For
140. bbox aborts you receive an error and no uicontrol is created 4 Inthe editor select getrect in the uicontrol statement and type in place of it The statement now looks like this Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively btni uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Position 5 Place your cursor between the empty brackets and type Ctrl V or right click and select Paste Allowing for differences in coordinate values the statement looks like this one btn1 uicontrol Style pushbutton String Push Me Position 55 253 65 25 Remember that rbbox returns coordinates in figure units pixels in this example If the default Units value of a component is not the same as the figure specify it to be the same when you make the component For example the default Units of a uipanel is normalized To sketch a uipanel position use code that uses figure Units as in the following example pnli uipanel Title Inputs Units get gcf Units Position getrect Two MATLAB utilities for composing UIs can assist you in specifying positions Use getpixelposition to obtain a position vector for a component in units of pixels regardless of its Units setting The position origin is with respect to the parent of the component or the enclosing figure Use setpixelposition to specify a new component position in pixels The Units property of the component remains unchanged after
141. be UI Automatically Refresh Plot ina GUIDE UI About the Example 0 0000 c eee eae The Timer Implementation 0005 Create UIs Programmatically 9 69 9 74 9 79 9 79 9 81 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 Structure of Programmatic UI Code Files File Organization File Template Run the Program Create Figures for Programmatic UIs Programmatic Components 005 Add Components to a Programmatic UI User Interface Controls 0 0 0 Tables Panels Button Groups AXES 2 oe sists Sa ActiveX Controls How to Set Font Characteristics 0 Lay Out a UI Programmatically Component Placement and Sizing Managing the Layout in Resizable UIs Manage the Stacking Order of Grouped Components Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively Set Positions of Components Interactively Align Components 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 6 10 9 10 9 10 21 10 22 10 24 10 26 10 28 10 28 10 31 10 31 10 36 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 51 xi Set Colors Interactively 00 000 e eae 10 58 Set Font Characteristics Interactively 10 59 Customize Tabbing Behavior in a Programmatic UI 10 62 How Tabbing Works 0 00000 e eee 10 62 Default Tab Order 0 0 0 0 eee 10 62 Change th
142. be accessed only from within a Figure within Callbacks callback The UI cannot be accessed from the command line or from a script This is the default Off GUI never becomes Current The UI can not be accessed from a callback Figure the command line or a script without the handle On GUI may become Current Figure The UI can be accessed from a callback from Command Line from the command line and from a script Other Use settings from Property You control accessibility by setting the Inspector HandleVisibility and IntegerHandle properties from the Property Inspector Generate FIG File and MATLAB File Select Generate FIG file and MATLAB file in the GUI Options dialog box if you want GUIDE to create both the FIG file and the UI code file this is the default Once you have selected this option you can select any of the following items in the frame to configure UI code Generate Callback Function Prototypes on page 5 10 GUI Allows Only One Instance to Run Singleton on page 5 11 Use System Color Scheme for Background on page 5 11 See Files Generated by GUIDE on page 2 24 for information about these files Generate Callback Function Prototypes If you select Generate callback function prototypes in the GUI Options dialog GUIDE adds templates for the most commonly used callbacks to the code file for most components You must then insert code into these templates GUIDE Opt
143. bers strings of characters or combinations of them The stats matrix is a 9 by 2 cell array in which each row is a separate statistic computed from the table argument The last statistic is not computed by setStats it comes from the plotPeriod function when it computes and plots the FFT periodogram and is passed to setStats as the peak parameter Specify the Type of Data Plot From the UI you can choose either of two types of plots to display from the plot_type pop up menu Sunspots v Year Plots Time series line graphs displaying sunspot occurrences year by year default Periodogram Plots Graphs displaying the FFT derived power spectrum of sunspot occurrences by length of cycle in years When the plot type changes one or both axes refresh They always show the same kind of plot but the bottom axes is initially empty and does not display a graph until you select at least 11 rows of the data table The plot_type control callback is plot_type_ Callback GUIDE generates it and you must add code to it that updates plots appropriately In the example the callback consists of this code function plot_type Callback hObject eventdata handles Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI hObject handle to plot_type see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X Customized as follows Determine state of the
144. bjects within the UI resize with the window if their Units are set to normalized To prevent them from resizing with the window perform these steps 1 Set each objects Units property to an absolute value such as inches or pixels before enlarging the UI To change the Units property for all the objects in your UI simultaneously drag a selection box around all the objects and then click the Property Inspector button E and set the Units 2 When you finish enlarging the UI set each object s Units property back to normalized 6 11 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Set the Window Position or Size to an Exact Value 1 6 In the Layout Editor open the Property Inspector for the figure by clicking the E button with no components selected In the Property Inspector scroll to the Units property and note whether the current setting is characters or normalized Click the down arrow at the far right in the Units row and select inches In the Property Inspector display the Position property elements by clicking the sign to the left of Position Change the x and y coordinates to the point where you want the lower left corner of the window to appear and its width and height Reset the Units property to its previous setting as noted in step 2 Maximize the Layout Area You can make maximum use of space within the Layout Editor by hiding the GUIDE toolbar and status bar and showing only tool icons as follows 1 2
145. ble folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples two_axes fileattrib two_axes w guide two_axes fig 2 From the GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button El The two_axes m code displays in the MATLAB Editor 9 21 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 22 If you run the two_axes program and click the Plot button the UI appears as shown in the preceding figure The code evaluates the expression displayed at the top of the UI using parameters that you enter in the f1 f2 and t fields The upper line graph displays a Fourier transform of the computed signal displayed in the lower line graph UI Design This UI plots two graphs depicting three input values Frequency one f1 e Frequency two f2 A time vector t When you click the Plot button the program puts these values into a MATLAB expression that is the sum of two sine functions x Ssin 2 pi f1 t sin 2 pi f2 t Then the program calculates the FFT fast Fourier transform of x and plots the data in the frequency domain and the time domain in separate axes Default Values for Inputs The program provides default values for the three inputs This enables you to click the Plot button and see a result as soon as you run the program The defaults indicate typical values The default values are created by setting the String property of the edit text The following figure shows how
146. button HandleVisibility on of f Default is on Determines if an object s handle is visible in its parent s list of children For toolbars and their tools set HandleVisibility to off to protect them from operations not intended for them Separator off on Default is off Draws a dividing line to left of the push tool or toggle tool State off on Default is off Toggle tool state on is the down or depressed position of f is the up or raised position TooltipString String Text of the tooltip associated with the push tool or toggle tool For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see the Uitoolbar Properties Uipushtool Properties and Uitoggletool Properties Toolbars The following statements add a toolbar to a figure and then add a push tool and a toggle tool to the toolbar By default the tools are added to the toolbar from left to right in the order they are created Create the toolbar h figure bh uitoolbar fh ct th Add a push tool to the toolbar a 20 05 0 95 5 imgi 1 repmat a 16 1 imgi 2 repmat a 16 1 imgi 3 repmat flipdim a 2 16 1 pth uipushtool tbh CData imgi TooltipString My push tool HandleVisibility off Create Toolbars for Programmatic Uls Add a toggle tool to the toolbar img2 rand 16 16 3 tth uitoggletool tbh CData
147. c Text In this UI the static text serves as a label for the pop up menu This topic shows you how to change the static text to read Select Data 1 Inthe layout area click the static text 2 In the Property Inspector click the button next to String In the String dialog box that displays replace the existing text with the phrase Select Data 2 13 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 14 Position 69891622154 4 SliderStep EB 122 double array 2 EX E static Tee 2 Style text 3 Click OK The phrase Select Data appears in the static text component above the pop up menu Select Data m Peaks Zi I Save the UI Layout When you save a layout GUIDE creates two files a FIG file and a code file The FIG file with extension fig is a binary file that contains a description of the layout The code file with extension m contains MATLAB functions that control the UI behavior Save and run your program by selecting Tools gt Run 2 GUIDE displays a dialog box displaying Activating will save changes to your figure file and MATLAB code Do you wish to continue Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE Click Yes GUIDE opens a Save As dialog box in your current folder and prompts you for a FIG file name Browse to any folder for which you have write privileges and then enter the file name Simple_ gui for the FIG file GUIDE saves both the FIG file and the code file using this
148. c es 5 8 The GUI Options Dialog Box 00 005 5 8 Resize BehaviOr operta as ba Bee aches bets lke S 5 9 Command Line Accessibility 2005 5 9 Generate FIG File and MATLAB File 5 10 Generate FIG File Only 0 5 12 6 GUIDE Templates 00 0000 cece es 6 2 Access the Templates 0 0 000 cece eee 6 2 Template Descriptions 0 0 0 6 3 Set the UI Window Size in GUIDE 6 11 Prevent Existing Objects from Resizing with the Wan COW eseru ead elie Sie Sate el See ea ee 6 11 Set the Window Position or Size to an Exact Value 6 12 Maximize the Layout Area 0 00000 6 12 GUIDE Components 00 000 6 13 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area 6 17 Place Components 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 6 17 User Interface Controls 0 0 0 0 6 23 Panels and Button Groups 000005 6 44 Akes e Bon Ged AGN gy SNE Sues ad tee Water Gea a Rees 6 50 Tables ienes ir ree a ere cee ee ae 6 54 ActiveX Component 0 0 0 cee eee eae 6 65 Resize GUIDE UI Components 6 67 Copy Paste and Arrange Components 6 70 Select Components 0 0 0 c eee eae 6 70 Copy Cut and Clear Components 6 71 Paste and Duplicate Components 6 71 Front to Back Positioning 0 0005 6 72 Locate and Move Components
149. calling either of these functions Align Components Use the align Function on page 10 51 e Use Align Distribute Tools on page 10 55 After you position components they still might not line up perfectly To make final adjustments use the align function from the Command Window As an interactive alternative use the Align Distribute tool which is available from the figure menu The following sections describe both approaches Use the align Function Use the align function to align user interface controls and axes This function enables you to line up the components vertically and horizontally You can also distribute the components evenly across their span or specify a fixed distance between them 10 51 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 52 A syntax for the align function is align HandleList HorizontalAlignment VerticalAlignment The following table lists the possible values for these parameters HorizontalAlignment VerticalAlignment None Left Center Right Distribute None Top Middle Bottom Distribute or Fixed or Fixed All handles in HandleList must have the same parent See the align reference page for information about other syntaxes The align function positions components with respect to their bounding box shown as a blue dashed line in the following figures For demonstration purposes create three push buttons in arbitrary places using the following code fh figure Position
150. cker ColumnName Population and Selection Tag data_stats TooltipString statistics for table and selection RowNameto nine strings N Min Max Mean Median Std Dev 1st Year Last Year and Est Period The Table Property Editor looks like this before you close it Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI E Ta re x Columns Rows Data Unless the Show names entered below option is selected the number of rows Colors Y appearing in the table is determined by the number of rows in Data Do not show row headers Show numbered row headers Name Insert 1 IN 2 Min 2 Copy 3 Max Sar 4 Mean Pelete 5 Median E Ma E 6 Std Dev tur 7 istYear a 8 Last Year Down 9 Est Period ox Cane Apply Help The Data Statistics table does not use any callbacks Use the Axes tool iy to drag out an axes within the top half of the Sunspots v Year Plots panel leaving its name as axes1 Drag out a second axes leaving its name as axes2 inside the Sunspots v Year Plots panel directly below the first axes Leave enough space below each axes to display the x axis labels Identify the axes with labels Using the Text tool drag out a small rectangle in the upper right corner of the upper axes axe 1 Double click it and in the Property Inspector change its String property to Population and its Tag proper
151. cmp get handles timer Running on stop handles timer set handles timer Period period start handles timer else If timer is stopped reset its period only set handles timer Period period end The slider callback must stop the timer to reset its period because timer objects do not allow their periods to vary while they are running update_display update display is the callback for the timer object It adds Gaussian noise to the ZData of the surface plot handles guidata hfigure Z get handles surf ZData Z Z 0 1 randn size Z set handles surf ZData Z Because update_display is not a GUIDE generated callback it does not include handles as one of its calling arguments Instead it accesses the handles structure by calling guidata The callback gets the ZData of the surface plot from the handles surf member of the structure It modifies the Z matrix by adding noise using randn and then resets the ZData of the surface plot with the modified data It does not modify the handles structure figure1_CloseRequestFcn MATLAB calls the figure1_CloseRequestFcn when you click the close box on the UI window The callback cleans up the application before it exits stopping and deleting the timer object and then deleting the figure window Necessary to provide this function to prevent timer callback from causing an error after code stops executing Before exiting if the timer is running stop
152. code to create the UI and tab through the components This code change does not alter the default tab order This is because the pop up menu does not have the same parent as the push buttons The figure is the parent of the panel and the pop up menu Change the Tab Order in the uipanel Get the Children property of the uipanel and then modify the order of the array elements This code gets the children of the uipanel and stores it in the variable ch ch ph Children ch 3x1 UIControl array UIControl Surf UIControl Mesh UIControl Contour Next call the uistack function to change the tab order of buttons This code moves the Mesh button up one level making it the last item in the tab order uistack ch 2 up 1 Customize Tabbing Behavior in a Programmatic UI The tab order of the three buttons is now Contour then Surf then Mesh This command shows the new child order ph Children ans 3x1 UIControl array UIControl Mesh UIControl Surf UIControl Contour Note Tab order also affects the stacking order of components If components overlap those that appear higher in the child order display on top of those that appear lower in the order 10 65 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Create Menus for Programmatic Uls 10 66 In this section Add Menu Bar Menus on page 10 66 Add Context Menus to a Programmatic UI on page 10 73 Add Menu Bar Menus Use the uimenu function to a
153. column indices of the cell s edited PreviousData previous data for the cell s edited EditData string s entered by the user NewData EditData or its converted form set on the Data property Empty if Data was not changed Error error string when failed to convert EditData data get hObject Data data_sum sum sum data When the end user finishes editing a table cell this function gets all the values in the table and calculates the sum of all the table values The ColumnEditable property must be set to true in at least one column to allow the end user to edit cells in the table For more information about creating tables and modifying their properties in GUIDE see Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Axes The code in this section is an example of an axes ButtonDownF cn that triggers when the end user clicks on the axes Callbacks for Specific Components function axes1_ ButtonDownFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to axes1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA pt get hObject CurrentPoint The coordinates of the pointer display in the MATLAB Command Window when the end user clicks on the axes but not when that user clicks on another graphics object parented to the axes 8 27 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 28 Note Most MATLAB plotting functions clear
154. component String property to the desired text in this case Select a data set Ba gi Min Position 20 20 60 20 SliderStep EA 1x2 double array text Style To display the amp character in a list item use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove If your component is not wide enough to accommodate the specified String MATLAB software wraps the string 6 35 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Select a data set Ifyou want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details You can specify a text font including its FontName FontWeight FontAng1le FontSize and FontUnits properties For details see the previous topic Edit Text on page 6 32 and for a programmatic approach the section How to Set Font Characteristics on page 10 28 Pop Up Menu To create a pop up menu also known as a drop down menu or combo box with items one two three and four as shown in this figure Fa A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGas e ARAT79a4Z 2 0 Specify the pop up menu items to be displayed by setting the String pro
155. ct eventdata diffMax hObject Max hObject Value setappdata hObject Parent slidervalue hObject Value setappdata hObject Parent difference diffMax end function button_callback hObject eventdata currentval getappdata hObject Parent slidervalue diffval getappdata hObject Parent difference display currentval diffval end When the user moves the slider the slider_callback function calls setappdata to save the new slider value using the name slidervalue The next line of code calls setappdata to save another value dif fMax using the name difference Both calls to setappdata store the data in the figure When the user clicks the push button the button_callback function calls getappdata to retrieve the values named slidervalue and difference Then the final command in the button_callback function displays those values If you are developing a UI using GUIDE you can use setappdata and getappdata in the same way Create Nested Callback Functions Programmatic Uls You can nest callback functions inside the main function of a programmatic UI When you do this the nested callback functions share a workspace with the main function As a result the nested functions have access to all the UI components and variables defined in the main function The following example code uses nested functions to share data about 12 5 12 Manage Application Defined Data 12 6 the slider position
156. ct handle to copy_menu_item see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA display Copy menu item selected function tofile_menu_item_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to tofile_menu_item see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA filename path uiputfile myfile m Save file name The function names might be different in your UI depending on the tag names you specify in the GUIDE Menu Editor The callback functions trigger in response to these actions When the end user selects the Edit menu the edit_menu_Callback function displays the text Edit menu selected in the MATLAB Command Window When the end user hovers the mouse over the Copy menu item the copy_menu_item Callback function displays the text Copy menu item selected in the MATLAB Command Window When the end user clicks and releases the mouse button on the To File menu item the tofile_menu_item_ Callback function displays a dialog box that prompts the end user to select a destination folder and file name The tofile_menu_item Callback function calls the uiputfile function to prompt the end user to supply a destination file and folder If you want to create a menu item that prompts the user for an existing file for example if your UI has an O
157. ct the row or rows you want to remove and click the Remove button Run the Program The UI window is nonblocking and nonmodal because it is designed to be used as an analysis tool Resize and Command Line Settings The UI has the following GUIDE options selected to control the resize and command line behavior Select Tools gt GUI Options to view these settings Resize behavior Non resizable Command line accessibility Off e Check box items selected 9 59 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 60 Generate callback function prototypes GUI allows only one instance to run Open the Simulink Block Diagrams This example is designed to work with the f 14 Simulink model Because the program sets parameters and runs the simulation the 14 model must be open when the UI is displayed When the program runs the model_open local function executes The model_open function performs these tasks Determines if the model is open find _system Opens the block diagram for the model and the subsystem where the parameters are being set if not open already open_system Changes the size of the controller Gain block so it can display the gain value set_param Brings the UI window forward so it is displayed on top of the Simulink diagrams figure Sets the block parameters to match the current settings in the UI Here is the code for model _open function model_open handles if isempty find_system Name f14
158. ction This code is an example of a ButtonDownF cn callback in GUIDE function uipanel1_ButtonDownFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to uipanel1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA display Mouse button was pressed When the end user clicks on the panel this function displays the text Mouse button was pressed in the Command Window Resize the Window and Panel By default GUIDE UIs cannot be resized but you can override this behavior by selecting Tools gt GUI Options and setting Resize behavior to Proportional Programmatic UIs can be resized by default and you can change this behavior by setting the Resize property of the figure on or off When your UI is resizable the position of components in the window adjust as the user resizes it If you have a panel in your UI then the panel s size will change with the window s size Use the panel s SizeChangedFcn callback to make your UI perform specific tasks when the panel resizes This code is an example of a panel s SizeChangedF cn callback in a GUIDE UI When the end user resizes the window this function modifies the font size of static text inside the panel function uipaneli_SizeChangedFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to uipanel1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure w
159. ctoror click the Property Inspector button E 1 In the Property Inspector scroll to the Units property and note whether the current setting is characters or normalized Click the button next to Units and then 6 68 change the setting to inches from the pop up menu Interruptible KeyPressFcn KeyReleaseFcn ListboxTop 1 0 Max 10 Min 0 0 Position 2 729 0 417 1 031 0 417 SliderStep 1x2 double array String Push Button Style pushbutton Tag pushbuttonl TooltipString UIContextMenu lt None gt Es UserData centimeters Value characters Visible normalized points pixels Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area 2 Click the sign next to Position The Property Inspector displays the elements of the Position property F Ba 8 ex Max Min x E sy width height SliderStep String Style g Inspector matlab ui control UIControl 272904171021 0 417 2 7291666666666665 0 41666666666666663 0 41666666666666663 1x2 double array 7 3 Type the width and height you want the components to be 4 Reset the Units property to its previous setting either characters or normalized Note To select multiple components they must have the same parent That is they must be contained in the same figure panel or button group See Select Components on page 6 70 for more information Setting the Units property to characters nonresizable UIs or normaliz
160. d callbackdata arguments when it calls the function If you define additional input arguments then the values you pass to the callback must exist in the workspace when the end user triggers the callback Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow Like callbacks specified as function handles MATLAB checks callbacks specified as cell arrays for syntax errors and missing dependencies when you assign the callback to the component If there is a problem in the callback function then MATLAB returns an error immediately instead of waiting for the end user to trigger the callback This behavior helps you to find problems in your code before the end user encounters them Specify a String of MATLAB Commands Not Recommended You can use string callbacks for a few simple commands but the callback can become difficult to manage if it contains more than a few commands The string you specify must consist of valid MATLAB expressions which can include arguments to functions For example hb uicontrol Style pushbutton String Plot dine Callback plot rand 20 3 The callback string plot rand 20 3 is a valid command and MATLAB evaluates it when the end user clicks the button If the callback string includes a variable for example plot myvar The variable myvar must exist in the base workspace when the end user triggers the callback or it returns an error The variable does not need to exist at t
161. d change the list string to lt empty gt if isequal numResults length currentVal resultsStr lt empty gt currentVal 1 set handles RemoveButton handles PlotButton Enable off end Ensure that list box Value is valid then reset Value and String currentVal min currentVal size resultsStr 1 set handles ResultsList Value currentVal String resultsStr Store the new ResultsData guidata hObject handles Plot Results Data The Plot button callback creates a plot of the run data and adds a legend The data to plot is passed to the callback in the handles structure which also contains the gain UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters settings used when the simulation ran When you click the Plot button the callback performs these tasks Collects the data for each run selected in the Results list including two variables time vector and output vector and a color for each result run to plot Generates a string for the legend from the stored data Creates the figure and axes for plotting and saves the handles for use by the Close button callback e Plots the data adds a legend and makes the figure visible Plot Into the Hidden Figure The figure that contains the plot is created as invisible and then made visible after adding the plot and legend To prevent this figure from becoming the target for other plotting commands its HandleVisibility and IntegerHand1e properties are set to off Thi
162. d color in the preview area Display the red green and blue values for the newly selected color are displayed in the R G and B fields in the UI 2 Clicking the Eraser toggle button is equivalent to selecting no color 3 Clicking the More Colors button displays a second dialog box containing more colors la Color ELC OOHHH i 1 Tmj E ELLI L mE EEn NNE OOO0O0O HE EES OOO0O EEE S O000 H E E E OOOOH EEE OOOOH EEE 4 Clicking the close box on the main dialog returns a function handle You can call the returned function to get the RGB values of the selected color For example this code calls the ColorPalette program which returns a function handle in the variable getmycolor The second line calls getmycolor to get the RGB values getmycolor colorPalette rgb getmycolor The getmycolor function returns a 1 by 3 vector of values It returns a NaN value if the user selects the Eraser button Call the colorPalette Function With Input Arguments You can call the colorPalette function with input arguments 14 33 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically mGetColorFecn colorPalette Parent hPaletteContainer The colorPalette function accepts property name value pairs as input arguments Only the Parent is supported This property specifies the handle of the parent figure or panel that contains the color palette If the call to colorPalette does not specify a parent it uses the current f
163. d to Min when the user deselects it If you want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details To add an image to a radio button assign the button s CData property an m by n by 3 array of RGB values that defines a truecolor image You must do this programmatically in the opening function of the UI code file For example the array img defines a 16 by 24 by 3 truecolor image using random values between 0 and 1 generated by rand img rand 16 24 3 set handles radiobutton1 CData img Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Note To manage exclusive selection of radio buttons and toggle buttons put them in a button group See Button Group on page 6 48 for more information Check Box To create a check box with label Display file extension that is initially checked as shown in this figure r ry Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGas k AQOdeA V Display file extension Specify the check box label by setting the String property to the desired label in this case Display file extension e Bil es Min 00 Position 20 20 60 20 SliderStep EH 12 double array Display file extension Style checkbox Tan To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in
164. data is the same for GUIDE and programmatic UIs Store Data as Application Data You can share data using application data To store application data call the setappdata function setappdata obj name value The first input 0bj is the graphics object in which to store the data The second input name is a string that identifies the value The third input value is the value you want to store To retrieve application data use the getappdata function data getappdata obj name The component 0bj must be the graphics object containing the data The second input name must match the string you used to store the data Unlike USerData which only holds only one variable you can use Setappdata to store multiple variables The following programmatic UI code uses application data to share two values To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function my_slider hfig figure setappdata hfig slidervalue 0O setappdata hfig difference 1 Share Data Among Callbacks slider uicontrol Parent hfig Style slider Units normalized Position 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 1 Tag slider Callback slider_callback button uicontrol Parent hfig Style pushbutton Units Normalized es Position 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 string Display Values Callback button_callback end function slider_callback hObje
165. dd a menu bar menu to your UI A syntax for uimenu is mh uimenu parent PropertyName PropertyValue Where mh is the handle of the resulting menu or menu item See the uimenu reference page for other valid syntaxes These topics discuss use of the MATLAB standard menu bar menus and describe commonly used menu properties and offer some simple examples Display Standard Menu Bar Menus on page 10 66 Commonly Used Properties on page 10 67 How Menus Affect Figure Docking on page 10 68 Menu Bar Menu on page 10 70 Display Standard Menu Bar Menus Displaying the standard menu bar menus is optional This figure s menu bar contains the standard menus Create Menus for Programmatic Uls Figure 1 E xs File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help If you use the standard menu bar menus any menus you create are added to it If you choose not to display the standard menu bar menus the menu bar contains only the menus that you create If you display no standard menus and you create no menus the menu bar itself does not display Use the figure MenuBar property to display or hide the MATLAB standard menu bar shown in the preceding figure Set MenuBar to figure the default to display the standard menus Set MenuBar to none to hide them fh MenuBar figure Display standard menu bar menus fh MenuBar none Hide standard menu bar menus In these statements
166. default command line output for lbox2 handles output hObject 9 47 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 48 Update handles structure guidata hObject handles if nargin 3 initial_dir pwd elseif nargin gt 4 if strcmpi varargin 1 dir if exist varargin 2 dir initial_dir varargin 2 else errordlg Input argument must be a valid folder Input Argument Error return end else errordlg Unrecognized input argument Input Argument Error return end end Populate the listbox load_listbox initial_dir handles Load the List Box A local function loads items into the list box This local function accepts the path to a folder and the handles structure as input arguments and performs these steps Changes to the specified folder so that the code can navigate up and down the tree as required Uses the dir command to get a list of files in the specified folder and to determine which name is a folder and which is a file dir returns a structure dir_struct with two fields name and isdir containing this information Sorts the file and folder names Sortrows and saves the sorted names and other information in the hand1es structure so that this information can be passed to other functions The name structure field is passed to sortrows as a cell array which is transposed to get one file name per row The isdir field and the sorted index values sorted_index are saved as vectors in the ha
167. dify your data in a callback function modify the handles array and then store it using guidata This slider callback function shows how to modify and store the handles array in a callback function function slider1_Callback hObject eventdata handles handles myvalue 2 guidata hObject handles end To see a full example of a GUIDE UI that uses the guidata function follow these steps to copy and examine the code 1 Set your current folder to one to which you have write access Share Data Among Callbacks Copy the example code copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples sliderbox_guidata fileattrib sliderbox_guidata w Display this example in the GUIDE Layout Editor guide sliderbox_guidata fig View the code in the Editor by clicking the Editor button amp Run the program by clicking the Run Figure button gt Sharing Data Among Multiple GUIDE Uls Example of Sharing Data Between Two Uls To see a full featured example that uses application data and the guidata function to share data between two separate UIs use these steps to copy run and examine the code 1 2 Set your current folder to one to which you have write access Copy the example code with this command copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples changeme fileattrib changeme w Display the UIs in two GUIDE Layout Editors with these commands guid
168. difying it to let the caller specify the prompt string Do nothing if the user cancels the dialog Obtain the handle of the uipanel with tag lmtitlepaneltag Set the Title property of the uipanel to the string that the user specifies After renaming the list the user can save the to a new FIG file by selecting Save as If the UI had been saved previously saving it to a new file preserves that version of the UI with its original name and contents 14 31 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments In this section About the Example on page 14 32 Copy and View the Color Palette Code on page 14 34 Local Function Summary for Color Palette on page 14 34 Code File Organization on page 14 35 UI Programming Techniques on page 14 36 About the Example This example shows how to create a UI that supports optional input and output arguments The example also shows how to present a standard color selection dialog box to the user A Figure 1 KS File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help S F AAG0C aal 0E OGa 2 m m R 1 G 0 B 0 Use the Color Palette These are the basic steps for using the color palette 14 32 UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments 1 Clicking a color cell toggle button makes the program perform these actions Display the selecte
169. dow Help DSGMs k iAAQV90eC A 08 ive F Use the delete function to remove a tool from the toolbar The following statement removes the E toggle tool from the toolbar The toggle tool handle is tth delete tth 10 82 Create Toolbars for Programmatic Uls File If necessary you can use the findall function to determine the handles of the tools on a particular toolbar Note After you have created a toolbar and its tools set their HandleVisibility properties off by executing statements similar to the following toolbarhandle HandleVisibility off toolhandles toolbarhandle Children toolhandles HandleVisibility off Display and Modify the Standard Toolbar You can choose whether or not to display the MATLAB standard toolbar highlighted in red below You can also add or delete tools from the standard toolbar Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help 10 83 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI Display the Standard Toolbar Use the figure Toolbar property to display or hide the standard toolbar Set Toolbar to figure to display the standard toolbar Set Toolbar to none to hide it fh Toolbar fh Toolbar figure none Display the standard toolbar Hide the standard toolbar o 6 o 6 In these statements fh is the handle of the figure The default ToolBar value is auto which uses the MenuBar property value Modify the Standard Toolbar Once you have the handle
170. draw a graph into the axes when the NextPlot property has its default value of replace To keep customized properties as you want them set NextPlot to replacechildren in the Property Inspector as shown here 1b Eim LineStyleOrderIndex 1 0 2 LineWidth 0 5 CA MinorGridAlpha 0 25 2 MinorGridAlphaMode auto z MinorGridColor S MinorGridLineStyle z LLL NextPlot replacechildren X OuterPosition new PickableParts add PlotBoxAspectRatio replace PlotBoxAspectRatioMode replacechildren ly Position 12 0 3 925 44 0 LJ YZ Projection orthographic is Table Tables enable you to display data in a two dimensional table You can use the Property Inspector to get and set the object property values 6 54 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties of a table component are listed in the table below These are grouped in the order they appear in the Table Property Editor Please refer to uitable documentation for detail of all the table properties Create a Table Group Property Values Description Column ColumnName 1 by n cell array The header label of of strings the column numbered empty matrix ColumnFormat Cell array of strings Determines display and editability of columns ColumnWidth 1 by n cell array or Width of each auto column in pixels individual column
171. e tb uicontrol f Style togglebutton String Left Right Tile Value 0 Position 30 20 100 30 10 11 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 12 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGMs k AAVRVEA a Left Right Tile The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style togglebutton specify the uicontrol to be a toggle button String Left Right Tile puts a text label on the toggle button The Value 0O deselects the toggle button by default To select raise the toggle button set Value equal to the Max property To deselect the toggle button set Value equal to the Min property By default Min 0 and Max 1 Position 30 20 100 30 specifies the location and size of the toggle button In this example the toggle button is 100 pixels wide and 30 pixels high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom Note You can also display an icon on a toggle button See Displaying an Icon on a Push Button on page 10 10 for more information Check Box This code creates a check box f Cc figure uicontrol f Style checkbox String Display file extension oil Add Components to a Programmatic UI
172. e bc bc object_handle BackgroundColor Sketch a Position Vector rbbox is a useful function for setting positions When you call it you drag out a rubber band box anywhere in the figure You receive a position vector for that box when you release the mouse button Be aware that when rbbox executes A figure window must have focus The mouse cursor must be within the figure window e Your left mouse button must down Because of this behavior you must call rbbox from a function or a script that waits for you to press the mouse button The returned position vector specifies the rectangle you draw in figure units The following function called setpos calls rbbox to specify a position for a component It returns the position vector you drag out and also places it on the system clipboard function rect setpos object_handle Use RBBOX to establish a position for a UI component object_handle is a handle to a uicomponent that uses any Units Internally figure Units are used disp Drag out a Position for object inputname 1 waitforbuttonpress So that rbbox does not return immediately rect rbbox User drags out a rectangle releases button Pressing a key aborts rbbox so check for null width amp height if rect 3 0 amp amp rect 4 0 Save and restore original units for object myunits object_handle Units object_handle Units get gcf Units object_handle Position rect object_handle
173. e 2 14 GUIDE created two files a FIG file simple_gui fig that contains the UI layout and a file simple_gui m that contains the code that controls how the UI behaves The code consists of a set of MATLAB functions that is it is not a script But the UI did not Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE respond because the functions contain no statements that perform actions yet This topic shows you how to add code to the file to make the UI functional Generate Data to Plot This topic shows you how to generate the data to be plotted when the user clicks a button The opening function generates this data by calling MATLAB functions The opening function which initializes a UI when it opens is the first callback in every GUIDE generated code file In this example you add code that creates three data sets to the opening function The code uses the MATLAB functions peaks membrane and sinc 1 Display the opening function in the MATLAB Editor If the file simple _gui mis not already open in the editor open from the Layout Editor by selecting View gt Editor On the EDITOR tab in the NAVIGATE section click Go To and then select simple gui OpeningFcn The cursor moves to the opening function which contains this code oe Executes just before simple gui is made visible function simple _gui_OpeningFcn hObject eventdata handles varargin This function has no output args see OutputFcn hObject handle to figure eventdata
174. e Create New GUI tab selected as shown in the following figure This tab contains a list of the available templates E curve Quick start oe Create New GUI Open Existing GUI GUIDE templates Preview Blank GUI Default GUI with Uicontrols GUI with Axes and Menu Modal Question Dialog BLANK i home 00 ah juser Documents MATLAB t Cancel l Help GUIDE Templates To use a template 1 Select a template in the left pane A preview displays in the right pane 2 Optionally name your UI now by selecting Save new figure as and typing the name in the field to the right GUIDE saves the UI before opening it in the Layout Editor If you choose not to name the UI at this point GUIDE prompts you to save it and give it a name the first time you run your program 3 Click OK to open the UI template in the Layout Editor Template Descriptions GUIDE provides four fully functional templates They are described in the following sections Blank GUI on page 6 3 GUI with Uicontrols on page 6 4 GUI with Axes and Menu on page 6 6 Modal Question Dialog on page 6 8 Out of the box none of the UI templates include a menu bar or a toolbar Neither can they dock in the MATLAB desktop You can however override these GUIDE defaults to provide and customize these controls See the sections Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 and Create Toolbars for
175. e Editor button El The 1b m code displays in the MATLAB Editor Read Workspace Variables When the UI initializes it queries the workspace variables and sets the list box String property to display these variable names Adding the following local function to the UI code 1b m accomplishes this using evalin to execute the who command in the base workspace The who command returns a cell array of strings which are used to populate the list box 9 53 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 54 function update_listbox handles vars evalin base who set handles listbox1 String vars The function input argument is the handles structure set up by the GUIDE This structure contains the handle of the list box as well as the handles of all other components in the UI The callback for the Update Listbox push button also calls update_listbox Read Selections from List Box To use the UI select two variables from the workspace and then choose one of three plot commands to create a graph plot semilogx or semilogy No callback for the list box exists in the code file One is not needed because the plotting actions are initiated by push buttons Enable Multiple Selection Use the Property Inspector to set these properties on the list box To enable multiple selection in a list box change the default values of the Min and Max properties so that Max Min gt 1 Selecting Multiple Items List box selection follows the standard for
176. e List Box in a GUIDE UI on page 9 46 Plot Workspace Variables in a GUIDE UI on page 9 52 UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters on page 9 57 Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE on page 9 68 Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI on page 9 79 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE 9 2 In this section About the Example on page 9 2 Set Up the Close Confirmation Dialog Box on page 9 2 Set Up a UI with a Close Button on page 9 3 Run the Program on page 9 4 How Close Confirmation Dialogs Work on page 9 5 About the Example This example shows how to create a modal dialog box to work with a UI that has a Close button Clicking the Close button displays the modal dialog box which asks Are you sure you want to close zJ closedlg l o amp 27 E Confirm Close ka B Are you sure you want to close Neo Set Up the Close Confirmation Dialog Box 1 On the Home tab in the Environment section click Preferences gt GUIDE gt Show names in component palette 2 Inthe Command window type guide 3 Inthe GUIDE Quick Start dialog box select Modal Question Dialog Then click OK Modal Dialog Box in GUIDE 4 Inthe Layout Editor right click the static text Do you want to create a question dialog and select Property Inspector 5 Change the String property value to Are you sure you want to close 6
177. e Show grid button is initially of f causing the graticule not to display Show grid toggles the mesh object s Visible property As mentioned earlier enlarging the graticule by 2 percent before plotting prevents the terrain surface from obscuring it Orient the Globe and Graticule The globe and graticule rotate as if they were one object under the control of a pair of hgtransform objects Within the figure the HG objects are set up in this hierarchy Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE HG Hierarchy for the Example i Inserted Axes Light tilt xform rotate xform globe graticule surface surface The tilt transform applies a rotation about the x axis of 0 5091 radians equal to 23 44 degrees the inclination of the Earth s axis of rotation The rotate transform initially has a default identity matrix The spinstopbutton_ Callback subsequently updates the matrix to rotate about the z axis by 0 01745329252 radians 1 degree per iteration using the following code a az az 0 01745329252 set hgrotate Matrix makehgtform zrotate az drawnow Refresh the screen Light the Globe and Shift the Light Source A light object illuminates the globe initially from the left Two sliders control the light s position which you can manipulate whether the globe is standing still or rotating The light is a child of the axes so is not affected by either of the hgtransforms The call to light uses no parameters other
178. e Tab Order in the uipanel 10 64 Create Menus for Programmatic UIs 10 66 Add Menu Bar Menus 00000 ues 10 66 Add Context Menus to a Programmatic UI 10 73 Create Toolbars for Programmatic UIs 10 79 Use the uitoolbar Function 04 10 79 Commonly Used Properties 000005 10 79 Toolbars sre aea Aa ck la Sa Gh eed Shean Ges teal ava he 10 80 Display and Modify the Standard Toolbar 10 83 Fonts and Colors for Cross Platform Compatibility 10 85 Default System Font 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 10 85 Standard Background Color 10 86 Code a Programmatic UI 11 Initialize a Programmatic UI 11 2 Examples iin o3 kd ved al ta sesh oes Glee CR ead 11 2 Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow 11 5 Callbacks for Different User Actions 11 5 How to Specify Callback Property Values 11 7 Callback Syntax eneee g nie oa ees 11 9 xii Contents Manage Application Defined Data 12 Share Data Among Callbacks 12 2 Overview of Data Sharing Techniques 12 2 Store Data in UserData or Other Object Properties 12 3 Store Data as Application Data 12 4 Create Nested Callback Functions Programmatic UV TS e a Mase Sug 8h Mean ahaa Fc glee a tata hinted 12 5 Store Data Using the guidata Function 12 6 Sharing Dat
179. e changeme_main guide changeme_dialog View the code in the editor by clicking the Editor button El in both Layout Editors Run the changeme_main program by clicking Run Figure button gt in that UIs Layout Editor Example of Sharing Data Among Three Uls To see a full featured example that uses guidata and UserData data to share data among three UIs use these steps to copy run and examine the code 1 2 Set your current folder to one to which you have write access Copy the example code with this command 12 9 12 Manage Application Defined Data copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples guide fileattrib guide w 3 Display the UIs in three GUIDE Layout Editors with these commands guide guide iconeditor guide guide _toolpalette guide guide _colorpalette 4 View the code in the editor by clicking the Editor button SJ in each Layout Editor Run the guide_iconeditor program by clicking Run Figure button gt in that UTs Layout Editor More About Nested Functions 12 10 Manage Callback Execution 13 Manage Callback Execution Interrupt Callback Execution 13 2 In this section How to Control Interruption on page 13 2 Callback Behavior When Interruption is Allowed on page 13 2 Example on page 13 3 MATLAB lets you control whether or not a callback function can be interrupted while it is executi
180. e in your current folder or at a location that is on your MATLAB path Run the Program You can display your UI at any time by executing the code file For example if your UI code file is myui m type myui at the command line Provide run time arguments as appropriate The file must reside on your path or in your current folder When you execute the code a fully functional copy of the UI displays on the screen If the file includes code to initialize the UI and callbacks to service the components you can manipulate components that it contains 10 3 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Create Figures for Programmatic Uls 10 4 In MATLAB software a UI is a figure Before you add components to it create the figure explicitly and obtain a handle for it In the initialization section of your file use a statement such as the following to create the figure fh figure where fh is the figure handle Note If you create a component when there is no figure MATLAB creates a figure automatically but does not return the figure handle When you create the figure you can also specify properties for the figure The most commonly used figure properties are shown in the following table auto Property Values Description MenuBar figure none Default is figure Display or hide the MATLAB standard menu bar menus If none and there are no user created menus the menu bar itself is removed Name
181. e lines are useful when you want to establish a reference for component alignment at an arbitrary location in the Layout Editor Creating Guide Lines To create a guide line click the top or left ruler and drag the line into the layout area Align GUIDE UI Components Guide line for te horizontal alignment Guide line for vertical alignment Click top or left ruler and drag e guide to desired position 62 a 12 Current Point 0 195 Position 680 436 450 362 6 87 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Customize Tabbing Behavior in a GUIDE UI 6 88 A UI s tab order is the order in which components of the UI acquire focus when a user presses the Tab key on the keyboard Focus is generally denoted by a border or a dotted border You can set independently the tab order of components that have the same parent The figure window each panel and each button group has its own tab order For example you can set the tab order of components that have the figure as a parent You can also set the tab order of components that have a panel or button group as a parent If in tabbing through the components at the figure level a user tabs to a panel or button group then subsequent tabs sequence through the components of the panel or button group before returning to the level from which the panel or button group was reached Note Axes cannot be tabbed From GUIDE you c
182. e that creates static text and sets the font properties f figure Position 300 300 385 285 txt1 uicontrol f Style text String inputdlg String Static Text uisetfont Position 50 200 150 40 The inputd1lg dialog box appears first After you enter a string and click OK the uisetfont dialog box opens for you to set font characteristics for displaying the string r 10 60 Font Font Style Size Arial Black Bold 10 Arial E Plain 8 iz 9 Arial Narrow Italic Arial Rounded MT Bold Bold Italic 12 Arial Unicode MS 14 AvantGarde 18 Baskerville Old Face z 24 i7 Sample The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog 1234567890 Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively When you specify a font style and size and click OK the text appears in the figure window File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOGMs k ASC9GK4 a 08 10 61 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI Customize Tabbing Behavior in a Programmatic UI 10 62 In this section How Tabbing Works on page 10 62 Default Tab Order on page 10 62 Change the Tab Order in the uipanel on page 10 64 How Tabbing Works The tab order is the order in which components of the UI acquire focus when the user presses the keyboard Tab key Focus is generally denoted by a border or a dotted border Tab order is determined s
183. eC4 2 08 pop The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style slider specifies the uicontrol to be a slider Min O and Max 100 specify the range of the slider to be 0 100 The Min property must be less than Max Value 25 sets the default slider position to 25 The number you specify for this property must be within the range Min Max SliderStep 0 05 0 2 specifies the fractional amount that the thumb moves when the user clicks the arrow buttons or the slider trough also called the channel In this case the slider s thumb position changes by the smaller amount 5 percent when the user clicks an arrow button It changes by the larger amount 20 percent when the user clicks the trough Specify SliderStep to be a two element vector minor_step major_step The value of minor_step must be less than or equal to major_step To ensure the best results do not specify either value to be less than 1e 6 Setting major_step to 1 or higher causes the thumb to move to Max or Min when the trough is clicked As major_step increases the thumb grows longer When major_step is 1 the thumb is half as long as the trough When major_step is greater than 1 the thumb continues to grow slowly approaching the full length of the trough
184. ecause the while loop code does not monitor the state of the Make movie check box The ishand1e test prevents the getf rame from generating an error if the axes is destroyed before the while loop finishes When the while loop terminates the callback prints the results of capturing movie frames to the Command Window and writes the movie to a MAT file if filming filename sprintf globe i mat filming 1 disp Writing movie to file filename save filename globeframes end Note Before creating a movie file with the UI make sure that you have write permission for the current folder The file name of the movie ends with the number of frames it contains Supposing the movie s file name is globe360 mat you play it with 9 73 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls load globe360 axis equal off movie globeframes The playback looks like this ia globegui b Graphics Techniques Used in the 3 D Globe UI To learn more about how this UI uses Handle Graphics to create and view 3 D objects read the following sections Create the Graphic Objects on page 9 75 Texture and Color the Globe on page 9 75 e Plot the Graticule on page 9 76 e Orient the Globe and Graticule on page 9 76 9 74 Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE Light the Globe and Shift the Light Source on page 9 77 Create the Graphic Objects The axes1_CreateFcn function initializes the axe
185. ecifies whether plotting replacechildren Default adds graphics replaces is replace graphics and resets axes properties to default or replaces graphics only Position 4 element vector distance Size of the component and from left distance from its location relative to its bottom width height parent Units normalized Units of measurement used centimeters to interpret position vector characters inches pixels points Default is normalized For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see Axes Properties See commands such as the following for more information on axes objects plot surf line bar polar pie contour imagesc and mesh Many of these graphing functions reset axes properties by default according to the setting of its NextPlot property which can cause unwanted behavior in a UI such as resetting axis limits and removing axes context menus and callbacks See Create 6 51 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 52 Axes on page 6 52 and Axes on page 10 26 for information about setting the NextPlot property Create Axes Here is an axes in a GUIDE UI ta untitled 1 X 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Use these guidelines when you create axes objects in GUIDE Allow for tick marks to be placed outside the box that appears in the Layout Editor The axes above looks like this in the layout editor placeme
186. ed resizable UIs gives the UI a more consistent appearance across platforms See Cross Platform Compatible Units on page 6 121 for more information 6 69 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Copy Paste and Arrange Components 6 70 This topic provides basic information about selecting copying pasting and deleting components in the layout area In this section Select Components on page 6 70 Copy Cut and Clear Components on page 6 71 Paste and Duplicate Components on page 6 71 Front to Back Positioning on page 6 72 Select Components You can select components in the layout area in the following ways Click a single component to select it e Press Ctrl A to select all child objects of the figure This does not select components that are child objects of panels or button groups Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangle that encloses the components you want to select If the rectangle encloses a panel or button group only the panel or button group is selected not its children If the rectangle encloses part of a panel or button group only the components within the rectangle that are child objects of the panel or button group are selected Select multiple components using the Shift and Ctrl keys In some cases a component may lie outside its parent s boundary Such a component is not visible in the Layout Editor but can be selected by dragging a rectangle that enclo
187. election data is generated during mouseDown events mouse drags in the data table The uitable passes this stream of cell indices but not cell values via the eventdata structure to the data_table_CellSelectionCallback callback The callback s code reads the indices from the Indices member of the eventdata When the callback runs for each new value of eventdata it turns the event data into a set of rows selection eventdata Indices 1 selection unique selection The event data contains a sequence of row column indices for each table cell currently selected one cell per line The preceding code trims the list of indices to a list of selected rows removing column indices Then it calls the unique MATLAB function to eliminate any duplicate row entries which arise whenever you select both columns For example suppose eventdata Indices contains BRWOWND Naaa 2 This indicates that you selected the first three rows in column one Year and rows three and four in column two Sunspots by holding down the Ctrl key when selecting numbers in the second column The preceding code transforms the indices into this vector RON This vector enumerates all the selected rows If the selection includes less than 11 rows as it does here the callback returns because computing statistics for a sample that small is not useful When the selection contains 11 or more rows the data table is obtained the selection is cached in the
188. emCallback function calls the questdlg function to create and open the question dialog box shown in the following figure r lA Close axesMenuT E Close axesMenuToolbar e If the user clicks the No button the callback returns If the user clicks the Yes button the callback closes the window Updating the Plot Here is the code for the LocalUpdatePlot function Because it is a nested function localUpdatePlot has access to the same data and UI components as the other callback functions function localUpdatePlot Helper function for plotting the selected plot type mPlotTypes hPlotsPopupmenu Value 2 hPlotAxes end The localUpdatePlot function gets the pop up menu Value property to identify the selected menu item from the first column of the mPlotTypes 5 by 2 cell array Then localUpdateP lot calls the corresponding anonymous function from the second column in the cell array See Also Axes Properties Figure Properties Uicontrol Properties More About Anonymous Functions 14 11 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI 14 12 In this section Techniques Illustrated in the Example on page 14 12 About the Example on page 14 12 View the Example Code on page 14 14 Set Up and Interact with the uitable on page 14 14 Techniques Illustrated in the Example The example shows how t
189. enu with the figure and with the axes by setting the UIContextMenu property of the figure and the axes to the handle cmenu of the context menu fh UIContextMenu ah UIContextMenu cmenu Figure cmenu Axes Right click on the figure or on the axes The context menu appears with its upper left corner at the location you clicked Right click on the panel or its push button The context menu does not appear Create Menus for Programmatic Uls File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DSGES k AAC9R E Force Display of the Context Menu If you set the context menu Visible property on the context menu is displayed at the location specified by the Position property without the user taking any action In this example the context menu Position property is 10 215 cmenu Visible on The context menu displays 10 pixels from the left of the figure and 215 pixels from the bottom 10 77 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOS MS F AAC9RL A 08 If you set the context menu Visible property to off or if the user clicks outside the context menu the context menu disappears 10 78 Create Toolbars for Programmatic Uls Create Toolbars for Programmatic Uls In this section Use the uitoolbar Function on page 10 79 Commonly Used Properties on page 10 79 Toolbars on page 10 80 Display and Modify the
190. eparately for the children of each parent For example child components of the figure window have their own tab order Child components of each panel or button group also have their own tab order If in tabbing through the components at one level a user tabs to a panel or button group then the tabbing sequences through the components of the panel or button group before returning to the level from which the panel or button group was reached For example if a figure window contains a panel that contains three push buttons and the user tabs to the panel then the tabbing sequences through the three push buttons before returning to the figure Note You cannot tab to axes and static text components You cannot determine programmatically which component has focus Default Tab Order The default tab order for each level is the order in which you create the components at that level The following code creates a UI that contains a pop up menu with a static text label a panel with three push buttons and an axes fh figure Position 200 200 450 270 pmh uicontrol fh Style popupmenu String peaks membrane sinc Customize Tabbing Behavior in a Programmatic UI Position 290 200 130 20 sth uicontrol fh Style text String Select Data Position 290 230 60 20 ph uipanel Parent fh Units pixels Position 290 30 130 150 ah axes Parent fh Units pixels
191. er community by uploading it to the MATLAB File Exchange When others install your app they do not need to be concerned with the MATLAB search path or other installation details Watch this video for an introduction to creating apps Packaging and Installing MATLAB Apps 2 min 58 sec Tip User contributed code including some apps is available from the MATLAB File Exchange You can also find functions and example code there that can be useful as a foundation for an app you want to build Why Create an App When you create an app package MATLAB creates a single app installation file mlappinstall that enables you and others to install your app easily In particular when you package an app the app packaging tool Performs a dependency analysis that helps you find and add the files your app requires Reminds you to add shared resources and helper files Stores information you provide about your app with the app package This information includes a description a list of additional MATLAB products required by your app and a list of supported platforms Automates app updates versioning 16 3 16 Packaging GUls as Apps 16 4 In addition when others install your app It is a one click installation Users do not need to manage the MATLAB search path or other installation details Your app appears alongside MATLAB toolbox apps in the apps gallery Best Practices and Requirements for Creating an App Best practic
192. ers when the end user clicks on an area in the UI that is outside of the text field Retrieve Numeric Values If you want to interpret the contents of an edit text field as numeric values then convert the characters to numbers using the str2doubl1e function The str2doub1e function returns NaN for nonnumeric input This code is an example of an edit text field callback function that interprets the user s input as numeric values function edit1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to edit1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA P P P Hints get hObject String returns contents of edit1 as text str2double get hObject String returns contents as a double input str2double get hObject string if isnan input errordlg You must enter a numeric value Invalid Input modal uicontrol hObject return else display input end When the end user enters values into the edit text field and presses the Enter key the callback function gets the value of the String property and converts it to a numeric value Then it checks to see if the value is NaN nonnumeric If the input is NaN then the callback presents an error dialog box Slider This code is an example of a slider callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the slider Callback property to make it execute when the end user moves the
193. es Write the app as an interactive application with a user interface written in the MATLAB language All interaction with the app is through the user interface Make the app reusable Do not make it necessary for a user restart the app to use different data or inputs with it Ensure the main function returns the handle of the main figure The main function created by GUIDE returns the figure handle by default Although not a requirement doing so enables MATLAB to remove the app files from the search path when users exit the app If you want to share your app on MATLAB File Exchange you must release it under a BSD license In addition there are restrictions on the use of binary files such as MEX files p coded files or DLLs Requirements The main file must be a function not a script Because you invoke apps by clicking an icon in the apps gallery the main function cannot have input arguments It can however take optional arguments Package Apps Package Apps Package apps you create into an app package for sharing with others When you create an app package MATLAB creates a single app installation file mlappinstall The installation file enables you and others to install your app and access it from the apps gallery without concern for installation details or the MATLAB path Note As you enter information in the Package Apps dialog box MATLAB creates and saves a prj file continuously A prj file cont
194. es Snap To Layout Grid View Layout Grid Smart Align and Distribute Align Distribute Tool Align Distribute Brushing Basic Fitting Data Statistics 10 55 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul The following steps illustrate how to use the Align Distribute tool to arrange components in a UI The tool provides the same options as the align function discussed in Use the align Function on page 10 51 Aa O N 10 56 Select Tools gt Edit Plot Select the components that you want to align Select Tools gt Align Distribute Tool In the Vertical panel choose the third Distribute option the same as the align function Middle VerticalAlignment option In the Horizontal panel choose the first Align option the same as the align function Left HorizontalAlignment option Click Apply File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help HaaesMac eoed a A Align Distribute Tool Vertical Align Distribute Set spacing 20 Horizontal Align Distribute Set spacing 20 The buttons align as shown Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively Note One thing to remember when aligning components is that the align function uses units of points while the Align Distribute tool uses units of pixels Neither method changes the Units property of the components you align however You can also select the A
195. es must be in the current folder or on the MATLAB path For more information on how callbacks work see Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow on page 8 2 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE e GUIDE Templates on page 6 2 Set the UI Window Size in GUIDE on page 6 11 e GUIDE Components on page 6 13 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area on page 6 17 Copy Paste and Arrange Components on page 6 70 Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 Align GUIDE UI Components on page 6 79 e Customize Tabbing Behavior in a GUIDE UI on page 6 88 e Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 e Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy on page 6 119 Design Cross Platform UIs in GUIDE on page 6 120 UI Design References on page 6 123 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE GUIDE Templates 6 2 In this section Access the Templates on page 6 2 Template Descriptions on page 6 3 Access the Templates GUIDE provides several templates that you can modify to create your own UIs The templates are fully functional programs You can access the templates in two ways From the MATLAB toolstrip on the HOME tab in the FILE section selectNew gt Graphical User Interface Ifthe Layout Editor is already open select File gt New In either case GUIDE displays the GUIDE Quick Start dialog box with th
196. es the UI figure This is the Close button callback function CloseButton_Callback hObject eventdata handles Close the UI and any plot window that is open if isfield handles PlotFigure amp amp ishandle handles PlotFigure close handles PlotFigure end close handles F14ControllerEditor The List Box Callback and Create Function This UI does not use the list box callback but the push buttons reference the list box in their callbacks Simulate and store results Remove and Plot GUIDE automatically inserts an empty callback function when you add the list box to the layout It also sets the Callback property to execute this local function whenever users interact with the list box You can delete the listbox callback function from the UI code and also delete the list box s Callback property value in the Property Inspector Set the Background to White The list box create function enables you to determine the background color of the list box The following code shows the create function for the list box that is tagged ResultsList function ResultsList_CreateFcn hObject eventdata handles Hint listbox controls usually have a white background change usewhitebg to O to use default See ISPC and COMPUTER usewhitebg 1 if usewhitebg set hObject BackgroundColor white else set hObject BackgroundColor get groot defaultUicontrolBackgroundColor end 9 67 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls
197. etermined by the font size The height you set in the position vector is ignored Note The pop up menu does not provide for a label Use a Static Text on page 6 34 component to label the pop up menu List Box To create a list box with items one two three and four as shown in this figure 6 38 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Figure 1 2 28 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help CODEC TACE Specify the list of items to be displayed by setting the String property to the desired list Use the Property Inspector editor to enter the list You can open the editor by clicking the button to the right of the property name 6 39 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 40 E Inspector matlab ui control UIControl lo amp es Be Bi er Position 20 20 60 20 5 SliderStep Bw 1x2 double array sing Style S Tag To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove If the width of the component is too small to accommodate one or more of the specified strings MATLAB software truncates those strings with an ellipsis Specify selection by using the Value property together with the Max and Min properties To select a sin
198. example the array img defines a 16 by 64 by 3 truecolor image using random values between 0 and 1 generated by rand img rand 16 64 3 set handles pushbutton1 CData img where pushbutton1 is the push button s Tag property Note See ind2rgb for information on converting a matrix X and corresponding colormap i e an X MAP image to RGB truecolor format Slider To create a slider as shown in this figure 6 27 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 28 A Figure 1 E File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help B AAVSOD2 AA T EE Specify the range of the slider by setting its Min property to the minimum value of the slider and its Max property to the maximum value The Min property must be less than Max Specify the value indicated by the slider when it is created by setting the Value property to the appropriate number This number must be less than or equal to Max and greater than or equal to Min If you specify Value outside the specified range the slider is not displayed The slider Value changes by a small amount when a user clicks the arrow button and changes by a larger amount when the user clicks the trough also called the channel Control how the slider responds to these actions by setting the SliderStep property Specify SliderStep as a two element vector minor_step major_step where minor_step is less than or equal to major_step Because specify
199. ft figure shows the initial state of the UI The right figure shows the UI after running the timer for 5 seconds at its default period of 1 count per second Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI E ex guide timergui Lo ea Timer GUI Demo Stop Randomizng E ex guide timergui fo ea Timer GUI Demo Start Randomizing 0 0 KI EN 0 01 Timer Period s 1 2 0 al 0 01 Timer Period s 0 1 2 E For details about timer properties methods and events see Use a MATLAB Timer Object and the timer reference page The Timer Implementation Each callback in the UI either creates modifies starts stops or destroys the timer object The following sections describe what each callbacks does ex_guide_timergui_OpeningFcn on page 9 82 startbtn_Callback on page 9 82 stopbtn_Callback on page 9 82 periodsldr_Callback on page 9 82 update_display on page 9 83 lt figurel_CloseRequestFcn on page 9 83 9 81 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 82 ex_guide_timergui_OpeningFcn ex_ guide timergui_OpeningFcn creates the timer using the following code handles timer timer ExecutionMode fixedRate Run timer repeatedly Period 1 Initial period is 1 sec TimerFcn update_display hObject Specify callback The opening function also initializes the slider Min Max and Value properties
200. function opens a blank UI with the title ListMaster and a File menu and returns its figure handle 2 Select New from the File menu to start a new list The program presents a dialog box using inputd1g 3 Type a name for the list you want to create and click OK The New menu item s callback 1mnew prompts the user for a list name and creates the UI window with all the UI components Lists of Items in a Programmatic Ul 1 Put data for mylist here a B V Number list Replace Add Put data for mylist here Because the positions of all controls are specified in normalized Units the UI is resizable Only the button icons and the text fonts have a fixed size 14 23 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 24 Import Data into List Master You can import data into the UI at any time If the UI already contains data the data you import replaces it You can import data from a cell array in the MATLAB workspace Each element of the cell array must contain a line of text corresponding to a single list item For example you can define a list of grocery items as follows groceries 1 dozen large eggs 1 2 gallon milk 5 lb whole wheat flour 1 qt vanilla ice cream If you load the example MAT file senators110cong matand display it in the Variables editor you can see it is structured this way Use spaces as separators between words in lists If a list co
201. g Use the GUIDE Open Existing GUI tab to open a FIG file for which no code file with the same name exists in the same folder When you save the figure or UI with Generate FIG file only selected GUIDE saves only the FIG file You must update any corresponding code files yourself as appropriate If you want GUIDE to manage the UI code file for you change the selection to Generate FIG file and MATLAB file before saving the UI If there is no corresponding code file in the same location GUIDE creates one If a code file with the same name as the original figure or UI exists in the same folder GUIDE overwrites it To prevent overwriting an existing file save the UI using Save As from the File menu Select another file name for the two files GUIDE updates variable names in the new code file as appropriate GUIDE Options Callbacks for Uls without Code Even when there is no code file associated with a UI FIG file you can still provide callbacks for UI components to make them perform actions when used In the Property Inspector you can type callbacks in the form of strings built in functions or MATLAB code file names when your program runs it will execute them if possible If the callback is a file name it can include arguments to that function For example setting the Callback property of a push button to sqrt 2 causes the result of the expression to display in the Command Window ans 1 4142 Any file that a callback execut
202. g property to Quit Click the Callback property to create a callback for the button in the code file tablestat m GUIDE sets the Callback of the Quit item to quit_Callback In the code file for the quit_Callback function enter close ancestor hObject figure Save the UI in GUIDE naming it tablestat fig This action also saves the code file as tablestat m Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI Initialize the Data Table Although you can use the Opening Function to load data into a table this example uses GUIDE to put data into the Data Set table This way the data becomes part of the figure after you save it Initializing the table data causes the table to have the same number of rows and columns as the variable that it contains 1 Access the sunspot example data set In the Command Window type load sunspot dat The variable sunspot a 288 by 2 double array displays in the MATLAB workspace 2 Open the Property Inspector for the data table by double clicking the Data Set table In the Property Inspector click the Table Editor icon E to the right of the Data property to open the Table Property Editor In the Table Property Editor select Table from the list in the left hand column 5 Select the bottom radio button Change data value to the selected workspace variable below 6 From the list of workspace variables in the box below the radio button select sunspot and click OK GUIDE inserts the suns
203. g the mlappinstal11 file see Change Apps Installation Folder on page 15 8 Run Uninstall Reinstall and Install Apps Run Uninstall Reinstall and Install Apps In this section Run App on page 15 5 Install or Reinstall App on page 15 5 Uninstall App on page 15 6 Run App To run an installed app apps that install with MathWorks products and apps that you installed separately 1 2 3 4 On the desktop toolstrip click the Apps tab At the end of the Apps section click the down arrow In the apps gallery browse the apps to find the one you want to run Hover over an app button to see a tooltip describing the app Click the app button You can run multiple custom apps concurrently including multiple instances of the same app Install or Reinstall App To install or reinstall an app that you or someone else wrote 1 2 3 4 On the desktop toolstrip click the Apps tab In the File section click Install App In the Install App dialog box specify a MATLAB app installer mlappinstall file and then click Open In the App Installer dialog box click Install or Reinstall MATLAB installs or reinstalls the app and displays it in the apps gallery When you install an app using the mlappinstall1 file MATLAB manages the MATLAB path for you Therefore you can run the app from the apps gallery without adjusting your desktop environment 15 Apps
204. gallery under My Apps The MATLAB Central File Exchange contains apps covering a range of applications From there you can download an app install it in your apps gallery and then run it with a single click View App File List View App File List In this section Before Installing on page 15 3 After Installing on page 15 3 Before Installing Before installing an app you or someone else wrote you can view the list of app files 1 In the Current Folder browser navigate to the folder to which you downloaded the app Right click the mlappinsta11 file and select Show Details At the bottom of the Current Folder browser in the Details panel click the View File List expander gt MATLAB displays the list of files in the app After Installing After installing an app you or someone else wrote you can see the list of app files and the contents of each file hOoOnN Click the desktop Apps tab Click the down arrow at the end of the Apps section Under My Apps hover over the installed app Within the tooltip click the View File List expander MATLAB displays a list of links to the source files Click a file link The file opens in the MATLAB Editor Note If you modify the files in an app the app behavior can change If you modify files and then want to revert to the original app reinstall the original 15 Apps mlappinstall file For information on locatin
205. gle item when the component is created set Value to a scalar that indicates the index of the selected list item where 1 corresponds to the first item in the list To select more than one item when the component is created set Value to a vector of indices of the selected items Value 1 3 results in the following selection Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area m Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOGMs k ASAV90R4 4 0 To enable selection of more than one item you must specify the Max and Min properties so that their difference is greater than 1 For example Max 2 Min 0 Max default is 1 Min default is O If you want no initial selection set the Max and Min properties to enable multiple selection i e Max Min gt 1 and then set the Value property to an empty matrix Ifthe list box is not large enough to display all list entries you can set the ListBoxTop property to the index of the item you want to appear at the top when the component is created If you want to set the position or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details Note The list box does not provide for a label Use a Static Text on page 6 34 component to label the list box Toggle Button To create a toggle button with label Left Righ
206. groundColor white end set hObject String Red Green Blue The last line set hObject String Red Green Blue populates the contents of the list box If you are developing a UI programmatically without GUIDE then populate the list box when you create it For example function myui Callbacks for Specific Components figure uicontrol Style Listbox String Red Green Blue Position 40 70 80 50 end Change the Selected Item When the end user selects a list box item the list box s Value property changes to a number that corresponds to the item s position in the list For example a value of 1 corresponds to the first item in the list If you want to change the selection in your UI code then change the Value property to another number between 1 and the number of items in the list For example you can use the handles structure in GUIDE to access the list box and change the Value property set handles listbox1 Value 2 The first argument handles 1listbox1 might be different in your code depending on the value of the list box Tag property Write the Callback Function This code is an example of a list box callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the list box Callback property to make it execute when a selects an item in the list box function listbox1_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to listbox1 see GCBO eventdata re
207. gure Units property back to characters and the components Units properties to characters nonresizable UIs or normalized resizable UIs before you save the UI UI Design References UI Design References Many Web sites such as the following provide guidelines for designing UIs AskTog Essays on good design and a list of First Principles for good user interface design The author Bruce Tognazzini is a well respected user interface designer http www asktog com basics firstPrinciples html GUI Design Handbook A detailed guide to the use of UI controls http www fast consulting com desktop htm Usability Glossary An extensive glossary of terms related to UI design usability and related topics http www usabilityfirst com glossary main cgi Usability Net Covers design principles user centered design and other usability and design related topics http www usabilitynet org management b_design htm 6 123 Save and Run a GUIDE UI Save a GUIDE UI on page 7 2 Create Programmatic Files from GUIDE Files on page 7 4 Rename GUIDE UIs and Files on page 7 5 7 Save and Run a GUIDE UI Save a GUIDE UI 7 2 In this section Save a UI on page 7 2 Create a Backward Compatible GUIDE Fig File on page 7 2 Append New Callbacks to an Existing GUIDE Code File on page 7 3 Save a Ul To save a UI in GUIDE use any of the following methods On the La
208. h This topic contains simple examples of callbacks for each type of component The examples are written for GUIDE unless otherwise stated For general information about coding callbacks see Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow or Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow In this section How to Use the Example Code on page 8 11 Push Button on page 8 12 Toggle Button on page 8 12 Radio Button on page 8 13 Check Box on page 8 14 Edit Text Field on page 8 14 Slider on page 8 15 List Box on page 8 16 Pop Up Menu on page 8 18 Panel on page 8 20 Button Group on page 8 21 Menu Item on page 8 22 Table on page 8 25 Axes on page 8 26 How to Use the Example Code If you are working in GUIDE then right click on the component in your layout and select the appropriate callback property from the View Callbacks menu Doing so creates an empty callback function that is automatically associated with the component The specific function name that GUIDE creates is based on the component s Tag property so your function name might be slightly different than the function name in the example code Do not change the function name that GUIDE creates in your code To use the example code in your UI copy the code from the example s function body into your function s body 8 11 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 12 If you are c
209. hDisplays table handles item if isequal item 1 ax handles axes1 elseif isequal item 2 ax handles axes2 end peak plotPeriod ax table get handles plot_type Value stats get handles data_stats Data stats setStats table stats item peak set handles data_stats Data stats set ax FontSize 7 0 If you are reading this document in the MATLAB Help Browser click the names of the functions underlined above to see their complete code including comments in the MATLAB Editor Display Graphs in New Figure Windows The tablestat UI contains code to display either of its graphs in a larger size in a new figure window when you right click either axes and selects the pop up menu item Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI Open plot in new window The static text string tagged newf ig above the plot panel Right click plots for larger view informs you that this feature is available The axes respond by ah WN Creating a new figure window Copying their contents to a new axes parented to the new figure Resizing the new axes to use 90 of the figure s width Constructing a title string and displaying it in the new figure Saving the figure and axes handles in the hand1es structure for possible later use or destruction Note Handles are saved for both plots but each time a new figure is created for either of them the new handles replace the old ones if any making previou
210. hange the tab order select a component and press the up or down arrow to move the component up or down in the list If you set the tab order for the first three components in the example to be 1 Surf push button 2 Contour push button 3 Mesh push button the user first tabs to the Surf push button then to the Contour push button and then to the Mesh push button Subsequent tabs sequence through the remaining components at the figure level Create Menus for GUIDE Uls Create Menus for GUIDE Uls In this section Menus for the Menu Bar on page 6 91 Context Menus on page 6 101 You can use GUIDE to give UIs menu bars with pull down menus as well as context menus that you attach to components You can create both types of menus using the Menu Editor Access the Menu Editor from the Tools menu or click the Menu Editor button EJ E8 Menu Editor Melo tt x lo B amp a Properties _ To add a menu click here or on Nothi ited the New Menu button sees i on the toolbar Menu Bar Context Menus Menus for the Menu Bar How Menus Affect Figure Docking on page 6 92 6 91 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 92 Add Standard Menus to the Menu Bar on page 6 93 Create a Menu on page 6 93 Add Items to a Menu on page 6 96 Additional Drop Down Menus on page 6 98 e Cascading Menus on page 6 98 When you create a drop down me
211. haves accordingly You can use the Object Browser to determine the child objects of a panel or button group View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy on page 6 119 tells you how You can add a new panel or button group to a UI in order to group any of its existing controls In order to include such controls in a new panel or button group do the following The instructions refer to panels but you do the same for components inside button groups 1 Select the New Panel or New Button Group tool and drag out a rectangle to have the size and position you want The panel will not obscure any controls within its boundary unless they are axes tables or other panels or button groups Only overlap panels you want to nest and then make sure the overlap is complete 2 You can use Send Backward or Send to Back on the Layout menu to layer the new panel behind components you do not want it to obscure if your layout has this problem As you add components to it or drag components into it the panel will automatically layer itself behind them Now is a good time to set the panel s Tag and String properties to whatever you want them to be using the Property Inspector 3 Open the Object Browser from the View menu and find the panel you just added Use this tool to verify that it contains all the controls you intend it to group together If any are missing perform the following steps 4 Drag controls that you want to include but don t fit within the panel i
212. he Components If several components have the same parent you can use the Alignment Tool to align them to one another To align the three push buttons Select all three push buttons by pressing Ctrl and clicking them 2 Select Tools gt Align Objects 3 Make these settings in the Alignment Tool Left aligned in the horizontal direction 20 pixels spacing between push buttons in the vertical direction Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE f untitled fig File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGa 42Or 4B Pes p Ls at EEI V Set spacing 20 pixels DONC ooe AG BR _ Set spacing 20 pixels 4 Click OK T Gee Gaon on Multi Multi 69 22 2 9 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 10 File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGE 427 4B hs PSP i TT Static Text Histo Hi Toggle suon E Table a Pani Tag 3 components selected Current Point 202 300 Position 316 Multi 69 22 z Label the Push Buttons Each of the three push buttons specifies a plot type surf mesh and contour This topic shows you how to label the buttons with those options 1 Select View gt Property Inspector Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE Be Bil ex E ALim 01 ALimMode auto ActivePositionProperty position AmbientLightColor mm BeingDeleted Off Box Off BoxStyle back
213. he existing code file 7 3 7 Save and Run a GUIDE UI Create Programmatic Files from GUIDE Files 7 4 You can export a GUIDE FIG file and code file to a single programmatic code file Executes the resulting code file displays the UI and no FIG file is required To export a UI that is open in GUIDE select File gt Export If the UI contains binary data for example icons or USerData exporting it sometimes generates a MAT file containing that data The resulting code file contains instructions for reading the MAT file The MAT file must be on the MATLAB search path when the code file executes Rename GUIDE Uls and Files Rename GUIDE Uls and Files To rename a UI rename the FIG file using Save As from the Layout Editor File menu GUIDE renames both the FIG file and the UI code file updates any callback properties that contain the old name to use the new name and updates all instances of the file name in the body of the code Note Do not rename GUIDE files by changing their names outside of GUIDE or the UI will not function properly 7 5 Programming a GUIDE UI Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow on page 8 2 Initialize UIs Created Using GUIDE on page 8 7 Callbacks for Specific Components on page 8 11 Examples of GUIDE UIs on page 8 29 8 Programming a GUIDE UI Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow 8 2 In this section Callbacks for Different User
214. he selected components Look for the highlight as described in Add a Component to a Panel or Button Group on page 6 20 6 75 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 76 In some cases one or more of the selected components may lie outside its parent s boundary Such a component is not visible in the Layout Editor but can be selected by dragging a rectangle that encloses it or by selecting it in the Object Browser Such a component is visible in the active UI See View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy on page 6 119 for information about the Object Browser Note To select multiple components they must have the same parent That is they must be contained in the same figure panel or button group Use Arrow Keys to Move Components Select one or more components that you want to move then press and hold the arrow keys until the components have moved to the desired position Note that the components remain children of the figure panel or button group from which you move them even if they move outside its boundaries Set the Component s Position Property Select one or more components that you want to move Then open the Property Inspector from the View menu or by clicking the Property Inspector button amp 1 In the Property Inspector scroll to the Units property and note whether the current setting is characters or normalized Click the button next to Units and then change the setting to inches from the pop up menu Locate
215. he selected item A value of 1 selects the first item Position 30 80 130 20 specifies the location and size of the pop up menu In this example the pop up menu is 130 pixels wide It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 80 pixels from the bottom The height of a pop up menu is determined by the font size the height you set in the position vector is ignored List Box This code creates a list box figure b uicontrol f Style listbox String one two three four Position 30 20 130 80 Value 1 f 1 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OUGas k AAV9Oe 4 4a 0 10 19 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 20 The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style listbox specify the uicontrol to be a list box String one two three four defines the list items Position 30 20 130 80 specifies the location and size of the list box In this example the list box is 130 pixels wide and 80 high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom The final pair of arguments Value 1 sets the list selection to the first item in the list To select a single item set the Value property to be a sca
216. he time you assign callback property value but it must exist when the end user triggers the callback Unlike callbacks that are specified as function handles or cell arrays MATLAB does not check string callbacks for syntax errors or missing dependencies If there is a problem with the code in your string it remains undetected until the end user triggers the callback Callback Syntax All callback functions that you reference as function handles or cell arrays must accept the at least two input arguments hObject and callbackdata All other input arguments must appear after hObject and callbackdata in the function definition The hObject argument is a handle to the UI component that triggered the callback The callbackdata argument provides additional information to certain callback functions For example if the end user triggers the KeyPressFcn then MATLAB provides information regarding the specific key or combination of keys that the end user pressed If callbackdata is not available to the callback function then MATLAB passes 11 9 11 codea Programmatic Ul 11 10 it as an empty array The following table lists the callbacks and components that use callbackdata Callback Property Name Component WindowKeyPressFcn figure WindowKeyReleaseFcn WindowScrollWheel KeyPressFcn figure uicontrol uitable KeyReleaseFcn figure uicontrol uitable SelectionChangedFcn uibuttongroup CellEditCallback uitable Ce
217. he toolbar and click one of the arrow buttons below the right side of the toolbar If a tool has a separator to its left the separator moves with the tool Remove Tools You can remove tools from the toolbar in three ways Select a tool and press the Delete key Select a tool and click the Delete button on the UI Right click a tool and select Delete from the context menu You cannot undo any of these actions Edit a Tool s Properties You edit the appearance and behavior of the currently selected tool using the Tool Properties pane which includes controls for setting the most commonly used tool properties CData The tool s icon Tag The internal name for the tool Enable Whether users can click the tool Separator A bar to the left of the icon for setting off and grouping tools Clicked Callback The function called when users click the tool Off Callback uitoggletool only The function called when the tool is put in the off state On Callback uitoggletool only The function called when the tool is put in the on state See Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow on page 8 2 for details on programming the tool callbacks You can also access these and other properties of the selected tool with the Property Inspector To open the Property Inspector click the More Properties button on the Tool Properties pane Edit Tool Icons To edit a selected toolbar icon click the Edit b
218. he two push buttons in the toolbar The uipushtool TooltipString property assigns a tool tip that displays when the user moves the mouse pointer over the button and leaves it there The CData property specifies a truecolor image that displays on the button For these two buttons the utility iconRead function supplies the image For each of the uipushtools the CLickedCallback property specifies the callback that executes when the user clicks the buttons Initialize the UI This code creates the plot that appears when the UI initially displays This code also checks to see if the user provided an output argument Update the plot with the initial plot type localUpdatePlot Define default output and return it if it is requested by users mOutputArgs 1 hMainFigure if nargout gt 0 varargout 1 nargout mOutputArgs 14 7 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 8 end The localUpdateP1lot function creates a plot in the axes The localUpdatePlot function gets the pop up menu s Value property to determine which plot the user selected The default output argument is the handle of the main figure Define the Callbacks This topic defines the callbacks that make the UI respond to user interactions Because the callback functions are nested inside the main function they have access to all data and components defined in the main function Although the UI has six components that are serviced by
219. hen replace the value with the string you want to use as the identifier In the following figure Tag is set to mybutton p E Inspector matlab ui control UIControl Cole e a Ail es String Z Push Button 3 Style pushbutton Tag pushbuttonl e TanltinStrine Ea iu User Interface Controls User interface controls include push buttons toggle buttons sliders radio buttons edit text controls static text controls pop up menus check boxes and list boxes 6 23 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 24 To define user interface controls you must set certain properties To do this 1 2 Use the Property Inspector to modify the appropriate properties Open the Property Inspector by selecting View gt Property Inspector or by clicking the Property Inspector button E In the layout area select the component you are defining Subsequent topics describe commonly used properties of user interface controls and offer a simple example for each kind of control Commonly Used Properties on page 6 24 Push Button on page 6 25 Slider on page 6 27 Radio Button on page 6 29 Check Box on page 6 31 Edit Text on page 6 32 Static Text on page 6 34 Pop Up Menu on page 6 36 List Box on page 6 38 Toggle Button on page 6 41 Note See GUIDE Components on page 6 13 for descriptions of these components See Callbacks for Specific Components on
220. hose cells are editable CellSelectionCall End user selects cells in a table uitable ClickedCallback End user clicks the push tool or uitoggletool uipushtool toggle tool with the left mouse button CloseRequestFcn The figure closes figure Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property CreateFcn Callback executes when MATLAB axes figure uibuttongroup creates the object but before itis uicontextmenu uicontrol displayed uimenu uipushtool uipanel uitable uitoggletool uitoolbar DeleteFcn Callback executes just before axes figure uibuttongroup MATLAB deletes the figure uicontextmenu uicontrol uimenu uipushtool uipanel uitable uitoggletool uitoolbar KeyPressFen End user presses a keyboard key figure uicontrol uipanel while the pointer is on the object uipushtool uitable uitoolbar KeyReleaseFcn End user releases a keyboard key figure uicontrol uitable while the pointer is on the object OffCallback Executes when the State of a uitoggletool toggle tool changes to off OnCallback Executes when the State of a uitoggletool toggle tool changes to on SizeChangedFcn End user resizes a button group figure uipanel figure or panel whose Resize uibuttongroup property is on SelectionChanged End user selects a different radio uibuttongroup button or toggle button within a button gr
221. ider To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function my_slider hfig figure slider uicontrol Parent hfig Style slider Units normalized Position 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 1 rag slzdert ysa UserData struct val 0 diffMax 1 Callback slider_callback button uicontrol Parent hfig Style pushbutton Units normalized Position 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 string Display Difference Callback button_callback end function slider_callback hObject eventdata sval hObject Value diffMax hObject Max sval data struct val sval diffMax diffMax hObject UserData data 12 3 12 Manage Application Defined Data 12 4 end function button_callback hObject eventdata h findobj Tag slideri data h UserData display data val data diffMax end When the user moves the slider the slLider_callback function stores the current slider value and the difference between the current and maximum values in the UserData property When the user clicks the push button the button_callback function finds the component containing the Tag property Slider1 Then the last two commands in the button_callback function get and display the values stored in the slider s USerData property respectively You can store any MATLAB variable in the UserData property The syntax for storing and retrieving
222. ies and explain each of these steps Commonly Used Properties on page 10 73 e Create the Context Menu Object on page 10 74 Add Menu Items to the Context Menu on page 10 74 e Associate the Context Menu with Graphics Objects on page 10 75 Force Display of the Context Menu on page 10 77 Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe a context menu object are shown in the following table These properties apply only to the menu object and not to the individual menu items Property Values Description HandleVisibility on off Default is on Determines if an object s handle is visible in its parent s list of children For menus set HandleVisibility to off to protect menus from operations not intended for them Parent Figure handle Handle of the context menu s parent figure Position 2 element vector Distances from the bottom left corner of the distance from left parent figure to the top left corner of the distance from bottom context menu This property is used only when Default is 0 0 you programmatically set the context menu Visible property to on 10 73 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Property Values Description Visible off on Default is Indicates whether the context menu is of f currently displayed While the context menu is displayed the property value is on when the context menu is not displayed its value is
223. iew Callbacks 73 Button Group Property Inspector X ActiveX Control Table Property Editor lt r Tag uitablel Current Point 202 206 Position 26 75 412 150 Use the Table Property Editor When you open it this way the Table Property Editor displays the Column pane You can also open it from the Property Inspector by clicking one of its Table Property Editor icons a in which case the Table Property Editor opens to display the pane appropriate for the property you clicked Clicking items in the list on the left hand side of the Table Property Editor changes the contents of the pane to the right Use the items to activate controls for specifying the table s Columns Rows Data and Color options The Columns and Rows panes each have a data entry area where you can type names and set properties on a per column or per row basis You can edit only one row or column 6 57 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 58 definition at a time These panes contain a vertical group of five buttons for editing and navigating Button Purpose Accelerator Keys Windows Macintosh Insert Inserts a new column or row definition Insert Insert entry below the current one Delete Deletes the current column or row Ctrl D Cmd D definition entry no undo Copy Inserts a Copy of the selected entry ina Ctrl P Cmd P new row below it Up Moves selected entry up one row Ctrl Cmd uparrow uparrow Down Moves selected entry down one r
224. ifies which column to draw or erase haxes To draw lines and delete lines from the axes hprompt To remove the prompt which only displays until the first line is plotted from the axes Keying on the column argument the callback takes the following actions Extracts data from the table and calls plot specifying data from the given column as YData and setting its DisplayName property to the column s name Deletes the appropriate line from the plot when a check box is deselected based on the line s DisplayName property Here is the plot_callback code function plot_callback hObject eventdata column hObject Handle to Plot menu eventdata Not used column Number of column to plot or clear colors b m r Use consistent color for lines colnames htable ColumnName colname colnames column if hObject Value Turn off the advisory text it never comes back hprompt Visible off Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI Obtain the data for that column ydata htable Data haxes NextPlot Add Draw the line plot for column plot haxes ydata column DisplayName colname Color colors column else Adding a line to the plot S 6 Find the lineseries object and delete it delete findobj haxes DisplayName colname end end 14 19 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI In this secti
225. igure gcf Unrecognized property names or invalid values are ignored Copy and View the Color Palette Code To obtain copies of the program files for this example follow these steps 1 Set your current folder to one for which you have write access 2 Copy the example code to your folder Then open colorPalette m in the Editor copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating_guis examples colorPalette m fileattrib colorPalette m w copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating_guis examples iconRead m fileattrib iconRead m w copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating_guis examples eraser gif fileattrib eraser gif w edit colorPalette m Caution Do not modify and save the files to the examples folder from which you copied them Local Function Summary for Color Palette The color palette example includes the callbacks listed in the following table Function Description colorCellCallback Called by hPalettePanelSelectionChanged when any color cell is clicked eraserToolCallback Called by hPalettePanelSelectionChanged when the Eraser button is clicked hMoreColorButtonCallback Executes when the More Colors button is clicked It calls uisetcolor to open the standard color selection dialog box and calls localUpdateColor to update the preview 14 34 UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments Function Description
226. imum allowed The height element of the position vector is not changed Radio Button To create a radio button with label Indent nested functions as shown in this figure 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help USGAs k ARVDVEL indent nested functions Specify the radio button label by setting the String property to the desired label in this case Indent nested functions 6 29 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 30 E E Inspector matlab ui control UIControl lo amp ss Deli Ei m SliderStep EH 1x2 double array 9 Style radiobutton T To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove The radio button accommodates only a single line of text If you specify more than one line only the first line is shown If you create a radio button that is too narrow to accommodate the specified String MATLAB software truncates the string with an ellipsis indent ne Create the radio button with the button selected by setting its Value property to the value of its Max property default is 1 Set Value to Min default is 0 to leave the radio button unselected Correspondingly when the user selects the radio button the software sets Value to Max an
227. ing Select a set specifys the text that displays If you specify a component width that is too small to accommodate the specified String MATLAB wraps the string Position 30 50 130 30 specifies the location and size of the static text In this example the static text is 130 pixels wide and 20 high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 50 pixels from the bottom Editable Text Field This code creates an editable text field txtbox f figure txtbox uicontrol f Style edit String Enter your name here Position 30 50 130 20 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGMS R AA0984 Enter your name here The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style edit specify the style of the uicontrol to be an editable text field Add Components to a Programmatic UI String Enter your name here specifies the default text to display The next pair Position 30 50 130 20 specifies the location and size of the text field In this example the text field is 130 pixels wide and 20 pixels high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 50 pixels from the bottom To enable multiple line input the value of Max Min must be greater than 1 a
228. ing very small values can cause unpredictable slider behavior make both minor_step and major_step greater than 1e 6 Set major_step to the proportion of the range that clicking the trough moves the slider thumb Setting it to 1 or higher causes the thumb to move to Max or Min when the trough is clicked As major_step increases the thumb grows longer When major_step is 1 the thumb is half as long as the trough When major_step is greater than 1 the thumb continues to grow slowly approaching the full length of the trough When a slider serves as a scroll bar you can uses this behavior to indicate how much of the document is currently visible by changing the value of major_step Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area gt Arrow button RI a minor _step Trough major_step Ifyou want to set the location or size of the component to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details The slider component provides no text description or data entry capability Use a Static Text on page 6 34 component to label the slider Use an Edit Text on page 6 32 component to enable a user to input a value to apply to the slider Note On Mac platforms the height of a horizontal slider is constrained If the height you set in the position vector exceeds this constraint the displayed height of the slider is the max
229. interpreted relative to the panel If you move the panel its children move with it and maintain their positions on the panel Button Group on page 6 48 Button groups are like panels but are used to manage exclusive selection behavior for radio buttons and toggle buttons Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 You can create toolbars containing push buttons and toggle buttons Use the GUIDE Toolbar Editor to create toolbar buttons Choose between predefined buttons such as Save and Print and buttons that you customize with your own icons and callbacks 6 15 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 16 Component Icon Description ActiveX X ActiveX components enable you to display ActiveX controls Component on in your UI They are available only on the Microsoft page 6 65 Windows platform An ActiveX control can be the child only of a figure window It cannot be the child of a panel or button group Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area In this section Place Components on page 6 17 User Interface Controls on page 6 23 Panels and Button Groups on page 6 44 Axes on page 6 50 Table on page 6 54 ActiveX Component on page 6 65 Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 Place Components The component palette at the left side of the Layout Editor contains
230. ion plot_button_Callback hObject eventdata handles x y get_var_names handles evalin base plot x y The command to evaluate is created by concatenating the strings and variables and looks like this try evalin base semilogx x y catch ex errordlg ex getReport basic Error generating semilogx plot modal end The try catch block handles errors resulting from attempting to graph inappropriate data When evaluated the result of the command is plot x y 9 55 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls The other two plotting buttons work in the same way resulting in semilogx x y and semilogy x y 9 56 UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters In this section About the Example on page 9 57 How to Use the UI on page 9 58 Run the Program on page 9 59 Program the Slider and Edit Text Components on page 9 60 Run the Simulation from the UI on page 9 62 Remove Results from List Box on page 9 64 Plot Results Data on page 9 64 The Help Button on page 9 66 Close the UI on page 9 66 The List Box Callback and Create Function on page 9 67 About the Example This example shows how to create a GUIDE UI that sets the parameters of a Simulink model runs the simulation and plots the results in a figure window The following figure shows the UI after running three simulati
231. ions GUIDE also adds a callback whenever you edit a callback routine from the Layout Editor s right click context menu and when you add menus to the UI using the Menu Editor See Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow for general information about callbacks Note This option is available only if you first select the Generate FIG file and MATLAB file option GUI Allows Only One Instance to Run Singleton This option allows you to select between two behaviors for the figure window Allow MATLAB software to display only one instance of the UI at a time Allow MATLAB software to display multiple instances of the UI If you allow only one instance the software reuses the existing figure whenever the command to run your program is executed If a UI window already exists the software brings it to the foreground rather than creating a new figure If you clear this option the software creates a new figure whenever you issue the command to run the program Even if you allow only one instance of a UI to exist initialization can take place each time you invoke it from the command line For example the code in an OpeningFcn will run each time a GUIDE program runs unless you take steps to prevent it from doing so Adding a flag to the hand1es structure is one way to control such behavior You can do this in the OpeningFcn which can run initialization code if this flag doesn t yet exist and skip that code if it does No
232. is blank the name is ListMaster Ifthe UI contains a list the name is Listmaster followed by a list name Called from a blank UI the function requests a name and then populates the figure with all controls Called from a UI that contains a list 1mnew calls the main listmaster function to create a new UI and uses that figure s handle instead of its own when populating it with controls Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI List Master List Callbacks The six callbacks not associated with menu items are listed and described in this table Callback Function How Used move list _item Called by the Move Up and Move Down push buttons to nudge items up and down list enable _updown Called from various local functions to enable and disable the Move Up and Move Down buttons and to keep the edit text box and list box synchronized delete list item Called from the Delete button to remove the currently selected item from the list it keeps it in the edit text box in case the user decides to restore it enter_edit A KeypressFcn called by the edit text box when the user types a character it sets the application data Edit flag when the user types Return commit_edit A Callback called by the edit text box when a user types Return or clicks elsewhere it checks the application data Edit flag set by enter_edit and commits the edit text to the list only if Return was the last key pressed This avoids committi
233. istance from bottom width height Default units for push buttons are pixels Each uicontrol call returns the handle of the push button created Add the pop up menu and its static text label by adding these statements to the code file following the push button definitions The first statement creates a popup menu The second statement creates a text component that serves as a label for the popup menu htext uicontrol Style text String Select Data Position 325 90 60 15 hpopup uicontrol Style popupmenu String Peaks Membrane Sinc Position 300 50 100 25 Create a Simple UI Programmatically The pop up menu component String property uses a cell array to specify the three items in the pop up menu Peaks Membrane and Sinc The text component the String property specifies instructions for the user For both components the Position property specifies the size and location of each component distance from left distance from bottom width height Default units for these components are pixels Add the axes by adding this statement to the code file ha axes Units pixels Position 50 60 200 185 The Units property specifies pixels so that the axes has the same units as the other components Following all the component definitions add this line to the code file to align all components except the axes along their centers align hsurf hmesh hcontour htext hpopup
234. istics Use the FontName property to specify a particular font for a user interface control panel button group table or axes Use the uisetfont function to display a dialog that allows you to choose a font style and size all at once myfont uisetfont Add Components to a Programmatic Ul Font Century Schoolbook Century Century Gothic Century Schoolbook Chaparral Pro Charlemagne Std Chiller Colonna MT Style Plain Bold Italic Bold Italic Sample The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog 1234567890 uisetfont returns the selections as a structure array myfont FontName Century Schoolbook FontWeight normal FontAngle normal FontSize 9 FontUnits points You can use this information to set font characteristics of a component in the UI btn uicontrol btn FontName myfont FontName btn FontSize myfont FontSize Alternatively you can set all the font characteristics at once set btn myfont 10 29 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Related Examples Callbacks for Specific Components 10 30 Lay Out a UI Programmatically Lay Out a Ul Programmatically You can adjust the size and location of components and manage front to back order of grouped components by setting certain property values This topic explains how to use these properties to get the layout you want It also explains how to use the SizeChangedFcn callback to contro
235. it if strcemp get handles timer Running on stop handles timer 9 83 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls end Destroy timer delete handles timer Destroy figure delete hObject 9 84 Create Uls Programmatically Lay Out a UI Programmatically Create Menus for Programmatic UIs Create Toolbars for Programmatic UIs Create a Simple UI Programmatically Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow Callbacks for Specific Components Share Data Among Callbacks Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Structure of Programmatic UI Code Files on page 10 2 e Create Figures for Programmatic UIs on page 10 4 e Programmatic Components on page 10 6 Add Components to a Programmatic UI on page 10 9 e Lay Out a UI Programmatically on page 10 31 Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively on page 10 40 e Customize Tabbing Behavior in a Programmatic UI on page 10 62 e Create Menus for Programmatic UIs on page 10 66 e Create Toolbars for Programmatic UIs on page 10 79 e Fonts and Colors for Cross Platform Compatibility on page 10 85 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Structure of Programmatic UI Code Files 10 2 In this section File Organization on page 10 2 File Template on page 10 2 Run the Program on page 10 3 File Organization Typically a UI code file has the following ordered
236. it in the Property Inspector 2 Click the right hand column next to UIContextMenu to see a drop down list 3 From the list select plot_axes1 Perform the same steps for axes2 but select plot_axes2 as its UIContextMenu Code Context Menu Callbacks The two context menu items perform the same actions but create different objects Each has its own callback Here is the plot_ax1_Callback callback for axes1 function plot_axi_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to plot_ax1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X X X P Displays contents of axes1 at larger size in a new figure ye 6 Create a figure to receive this axes data axesifig figure Copy the axes and size it to the figure axesicopy copyobj handles axes1 axesifig set axesicopy Units Normalized Position 05 20 90 60 Assemble a title for this new figure str get handles uipanel3 Title for get handles poplabel String title str Fontweight bold Save handles to new fig and axes in case Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI we want to do anything else to them handles axesifig axesifig handles axesicopy axesicopy guidata hObject handles The other callback plot_ax2_Callback is identical to plot_ax1_Callback except that all instances of 1 in the code are replaced by 2 and popl
237. items to Item 1 assign each subitem a keyboard accelerator and disable the first subitem sehi uimenu ehi Label Choice 1 Accelerator C Enable off seh2 uimenu eh1 Label Choice 2 Accelerator H Figure 1 My menu temi Choice 1 A z a D a o O V Item2 Choice2 Ctrl H ly The Accelerator property adds keyboard accelerators to the menu items Some accelerators may be used for other purposes on your system and other actions may result The Enable property disables the first subitem Choice 1 so a user cannot select it when the menu is first created The item appears dimmed Note After you have created all menu items set their HandleVisibility properties off by executing the following statements menuhandles findall figurehandle type uimenu menuhandles HandleVisibility off See the section Menu Item for information about programming menu items Create Menus for Programmatic Uls Add Context Menus to a Programmatic UI Context menus appear when the user right clicks on a figure or UI component Follow these steps to add a context menu to your UI 1 Create the context menu object using the uicontextmenu function 2 Add menu items to the context menu using the uimenu function 3 Associate the context menu with a graphics object using the object s UIContextMenu property Subsequent topics describe commonly used context menu propert
238. ith handles and user data see GUIDATA set hObject Units Points panelSizePts get hObject Position panelHeight panelSizePts 4 Callbacks for Specific Components set hObject Units normalized newFontSize 10 panelHeight 115 texth findobj Tag texti set texth FontSize newFontSize If your UI has nested panels then they will resize from the inside out in child to parent order Note To make the text inside a panel resize automatically set the fontUnits property to normalized Button Group Button groups are similar to panels but they also manage exclusive selection of radio buttons and toggle buttons When a button group contains multiple radio buttons or toggle buttons the button group allows the end user to select only one of them Do not code callbacks for the individual buttons that are inside a button group Instead use the button group s SelectionChangedF cn callback to respond when the end user selects a button This code is an example of a button group SelectionChangedFcn callback that manages two radio buttons and two toggle buttons function uibuttongroup1 SelectionChangedFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to the selected object in uibuttongroup1 eventdata structure with the following fields EventName string SelectionChanged read only OldValue handle of the previously selected object or empty NewValue handle of the currently selected object
239. itialization tasks Do not edit this code Opening function Performs your initialization tasks before the user has access to the UI Output function Returns outputs to the MATLAB command line after the opening function returns control and before control returns to the command line Component and figure Control the behavior of the UI window and of individual callbacks components MATLAB software calls a callback in response to a particular event for a component or for the figure itself Utility helper Perform miscellaneous functions not directly associated with an functions event for the figure or a component Adding Callback Templates to an Existing UI Code File When you save the UI GUIDE automatically adds templates for some callbacks to the code file If you want to add other callbacks to the file you can easily do so Within GUIDE you can add a local callback function template to the code in any of the following ways Select the component for which you want to add the callback and then Right click the mouse button and from the View callbacks submenu select the desired callback From View gt View Callbacks select the desired callback 2 25 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 26 Double click a component to show its properties in the Property Inspector In the Property Inspector click the pencil and paper icon a next to the name of the callback you want to install in the code file For to
240. ize from the top the window moves to the location where you release the mouse button SizeChangedFen uicontrol units are in characters Figure Size get hObject Position This is the figure s original position in pixel units Original_Size 350 700 470 250 If the figure seems to be maximized do not resize at all pix_pos get hObject Position scr_size get groot ScreenSize if 99 scr_size 3 lt pix_pos 3 Apparently maximized UI That Uses Persistent Data When docked get out return end If resized figure is smaller than original figure then compensate However do not change figure size if it is docked just adjust uicontrols if strcmp get hObject WindowStyle docked if Figure _Size 3 lt Original_Size 3 If the width is too small then reset to origianl width set hObject Position Figure_Size 1 Figure_Size 2 Original Size 3 Original_Size 4 Figure Size get hObject Position end if abs Figure_Size 4 Original_Size 4 gt 10 pixels Do not allow the height to change set hObject Position Figure_Size 1 Figure_Size 2 Figure Size 4 Original_Size 4 Figure_Size 3 Original_Size 4 end movegui hObject onscreen end Get Contact_Name field Position for readjusting its width C_N_pos get handles Contact_Name Position ratio Figure_Size 3 Original_Size 3 Reset it so that its width remains proportional to figure
241. l expression The following code shows how the plot_button_Callback obtains the input Get user input fi str2double get handles f1_input String f2 str2double get handles f2_input String t eval get handles t_input String Calculate Data After constructing the string input parameters to numeric form and assigning them to local variables the next step is to calculate data for the two graphs The plot_button_Callback computes the time domain data using an expression of sines x Sin 2 pi f1 t sin 2 pi f2 t The callback computes the frequency domain data as the Fourier transform of the time domain data y Fft x 512 For an explanation of this computation see the fft function 9 27 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 28 Plot Data The final task for the plot_button_Callback is to generate two plots This involves Targeting plots to the appropriate axes For example this code directs a graph to the time axes plot handles time_axes t x Providing the appropriate data to the plot function Turning on the axes grid which the plot function automatically turns off Note Performing the last step is necessary because many plotting functions including plot clear the axes and reset properties before creating the graph This means that you cannot use the Property Inspector to set the XMinorTick YMinorTick and grid properties in this example because they are reset when the callback executes p
242. l government or other entity acquiring for or through the federal government and shall supersede any conflicting contractual terms or conditions If this License fails to meet the government s needs or is inconsistent in any respect with federal procurement law the government agrees to return the Program and Documentation unused to The MathWorks Inc Trademarks MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks Inc See www mathworks com trademarks for a list of additional trademarks Other product or brand names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Patents MathWorks products are protected by one or more U S patents Please see www mathworks com patents for more information Revision History November 2000 June 2001 July 2002 June 2004 October 2004 March 2005 September 2005 March 2006 May 2006 September 2006 March 2007 September 2007 March 2008 October 2008 March 2009 September 2009 March 2010 September 2010 April 2011 September 2011 March 2012 September 2012 March 2013 September 2013 March 2014 October 2014 March 2015 Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only Online Only
243. l have not have a docking arrow unless the figure displays a menu bar or a toolbar either standard or customized When it has no docking arrow users can undock it from the desktop but will be unable to redock it there However when you provide your own menu bar or toolbar using GUIDE it can display the docking arrow if you want the UI window to be dockable See the following sections and Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 for details Note UIs that are modal dialogs figures with WindowStyle set to modal cannot have menu bars toolbars or docking controls For more information see the DockControls MenuBar ToolBar and WindowStyle property descriptions in Figure Properties Add Standard Menus to the Menu Bar The figure MenuBar property controls whether your UI displays the MATLAB standard menus on the menu bar GUIDE initially sets the value of MenuBar to none If you want your UI to display the MATLAB standard menus use the Property Inspector to set MenuBar to figure Ifthe value of MenuBar is none GUIDE automatically adds a menu bar that displays only the menus you create Ifthe value of MenuBar is figure the UI displays the MATLAB standard menus and GUIDE adds the menus you create to the right side of the menu bar In either case you can enable the user to dock and undock the window by setting the figure s DockControls property to on Create a Menu 1 Start a new menu by clicking the New Men
244. l the UI s resizing behavior In this section Component Placement and Sizing on page 10 31 Managing the Layout in Resizable UIs on page 10 36 Manage the Stacking Order of Grouped Components on page 10 39 Component Placement and Sizing A UI layout consists of a figure and one or more components that you place inside the figure Accurate placement and sizing of each component involves setting certain properties and understanding how the inner and outer boundaries of the figure relate to each other Location and Size of Outer Bounds and Drawable Area The area inside the figure which contains the UI components is called the drawable area The drawable area is inside the outer bounds of the figure but does not include the menu bar or tool bar You can control the location and size of the drawable area by setting the figure s Position property as a four element row vector The first two elements of this vector specify the location The last two elements specify the size By default the figure s Position values are in pixels This command creates a figure and sets the Position value The left edge of the drawable area is 258 pixels from the left side of the screen Its bottom edge is 132 pixels up from the bottom of the screen Its size is 560 pixels wide by 420 pixels high f figure Position 258 132 560 420 10 31 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul B Figure 1 File Edit View Insert
245. lar that indicates the position of the item in the list To select more than one item set the Value property to be a vector of values To enable your users to select multiple items set the values of the Min and Max properties such that Max Min is greater than 1 Here is a list box that allows multiple selections and has two items selected initially lb uicontrol f Style listbox String one two three four Max 2 Min O Value 1 3 Position 30 20 130 80 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSGMs k ASAC90R 4 4 0 Add Components to a Programmatic UI If you want no initial selection set these property values Set the Max and Min properties such that Max Min is greater than 1 Set the Value property to an empty matrix If the list box is not large enough to display all list entries you can set the ListBoxTop property to the index of the item you want to appear at the top when the component is created Tables This code creates a table and populates it with the values returned by magic 5 f figure tb uitable f Data magic 5 The first Uitable argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Data magic 5 specifies the table data In this case the data is the
246. lated radio buttons That is when you select one button the previously selected button is deselected To activate a radio button click the mouse button on the object The display indicates the state of the button Use a button group to manage mutually exclusive radio buttons Sliders accept numeric input within a specified range by enabling the user to move a sliding bar which is called a slider or thumb Users move the slider by clicking the slider and dragging it by clicking in the trough or by clicking an arrow The location of the slider indicates the relative location within the specified range Static Text on page 10 15 uicontrol Static text controls display lines of text Static text is typically used to label other controls provide directions to the user or indicate values associated with a slider Users cannot change static text interactively 10 7 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 8 Component Function Description Tables on page 10 21 Toggle Button on page 10 11 uitable uicontrol Tables contain rows of numbers text strings and choices grouped by columns They size themselves automatically to fit the data they contain Rows and columns can be named or numbered Callbacks are fired when table cells are selected or edited Entire tables or selected columns can be made user editable Toggle buttons generate an action and indicate whether they a
247. lback receives invalid input it disables the Plot button preventing its callback from running Finally it restores focus to itself selecting the text that did not validate so that you can re enter a value For example here is the response to input of a time vector 1 2 6 4 5 7 9 that does not monotonically increase i Signal Analysis sin 2 pi f1 t sin 2 pi f2 t 300 Frequency start inc end 1264579 t must incre 9 26 UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots In this figure the two plots reflect the last successful set of inputs f1 31 41 f2 120 andt 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 The time vector 1 2 6 4 5 7 9 appears highlighted so that you can enter a new valid value The highlighting results from executing the command uicontrol hObject in the preceding code listing Plot Push Button Behavior When you click the Plot button the plot_button_ Callback performs three basic tasks it gets input from the edit text components calculates data and creates the two plots Get Input The first task for the plot_button_Callback is to read the input values This involves e Reading the current values in the three edit text boxes using the handles structure to access the edit text handles Converting the two frequency values f 1 and f2 from strings to doubles using str2double e Evaluating the time string using eval to produce a vector t which the callback used to evaluate the mathematica
248. lder 15 8 By default MATLAB installs apps from mlappinstal11 files in the userpath Apps appname folder The userpath is the path returned by userpath and appname is the name of the installed app sometimes with an additional character added to the name To change the apps installation folder 1 On the Home tab in the Environment section click Preferences gt MATLAB gt Apps 2 Inthe Apps Install Folder field specify a folder name to which you have write access 3 Click OK Note If you change the app installation folder then apps installed before the change are no longer accessible from the apps gallery Apps installed with MATLAB products are an exception To make inaccessible apps accessible again move their appname folders and contents to the new installation folder and then restart MATLAB Packaging GUls as Apps Apps Overview on page 16 2 Package Apps on page 16 5 Modify Apps on page 16 7 Share Apps on page 16 8 MATLAB App Installer File mlappinstall on page 16 9 Dependency Analysis on page 16 10 16 Packaging GUls as Apps Apps Overview What Is an App A MATLAB app is a self contained MATLAB program with a user interface that automates a task or calculation All the operations required to complete the task getting data into the app performing calculations on the data and getting results are performed within the app Apps are included in many
249. le mlappinstall 16 9 Dependency Analysis 0 0 00 eee eens 16 10 XV Introduction to Creating Uls About Uls in MATLAB Software What Is a UI on page 1 2 How Does a UI Work on page 1 4 Ways to Build MATLAB UIs on page 1 5 1 About Uls in MATLAB Software What Is a UI A user interface UT is a graphical display in one or more windows containing controls called components that enable a user to perform interactive tasks The user does not have to create a script or type commands at the command line to accomplish the tasks Unlike coding programs to accomplish tasks the user does not need to understand the details of how the tasks are performed UI components can include menus toolbars push buttons radio buttons list boxes and sliders just to name a few UIs created using MATLAB tools can also perform any type of computation read and write data files communicate with other UIs and display data as tables or as plots The following figure illustrates a simple UI that you can easily build yourself E simple gui c E Surf 10 ER Mesh 5 0 Contour 5 10 Select Data 40 40 20 Peaks 20 The UI contains these components An axes component A pop up menu listing three data sets that correspond to MATLAB functions peaks membrane and sinc What Is a UI A static text component to label the pop up menu Three buttons
250. le Calling Syntax MAT file Validation UI Behavior Overall UI Characteristics 0 00005 UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots About the Example UI Design Validate Input as Numbers 000005 Plot Push Button Behavior 0005 Synchronized Data Presentations ina GUIDE UI About the Example Recreate the UI Interactive List Box ina GUIDE UI About the Example Implement the List Boxeo teete Betis oe eles Sex Plot Workspace Variables ina GUIDE UI About the Example Read Workspace Variables 0 000005 Read Selections from List Box 04 UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters About the Example How to Use the UI Run the Program Program the Slider and Edit Text Components Run the Simulation from the UI Remove Results from List Box 0 Plot Results Data The Help Button Close the UI The List Box Callback and Create Function Animation with Slider About the Example Controls in GUIDE 9 4 9 5 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 17 9 20 9 20 9 22 9 24 9 27 9 30 9 30 9 32 9 46 9 46 9 47 9 52 9 52 9 53 9 54 9 57 9 57 9 58 9 59 9 60 9 62 9 64 9 64 9 66 9 66 9 67 9 68 9 68 Design the 3 D Globe UI 0 anaana Graphics Techniques Used in the 3 D Glo
251. lications on the same platform If you have set the FontName property to a named font and want to return to the default value you can set the property to the string default This ensures that MATLAB software uses the system default at run time pbhi FontName default Specify a Fixed Width Font If you want to use a fixed width font for a user interface control set its FontName property to the string fixedwidth This special identifier ensures that your UI uses the standard fixed width font for the target platform You can find the name of the fixed width font that is used on a given platform by querying the root FixedWidthFontName property get groot FixedWidthFontName Use a Specific Font Name You can specify an actual font name such as Times or Courier for the FontName property However doing so may cause your UI to appear differently than you intended when run on a different computer If the target computer does not have the specified font it substitutes another font that may not look good in your UI or may not be the standard font used on that system Also different versions of the same named font may have different size requirements for a given set of characters 10 85 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 86 Standard Background Color MATLAB uses the standard system background color of the system on which the UI is running as the default component background color This color varies on different computer
252. lign or Distribute option from the figure Tools menu to perform either operation immediately For example here are the six options available from the Align menu item G A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOG BS BLN Vv Edit Pot Zoom In Zoom Out Pan Rotate 3D Data Cursor Brush Link Reset View Options d Pin to Axes Snap To Layout Grid View Layout Grid Smart Align and Distribute Align Distribute Tool Align N i Left Edges Distribute i Centers X Brushing i Right Edges Basic Fitting Top Edges Data Statistics Middles Y Bottom Edges 10 57 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 58 Set Colors Interactively Specifying colors for Color ForegroundColor BackgroundColor FontColor and plotting object color properties can be difficult without seeing examples of colors The uisetcolor function opens a dialog that returns color values you can use to set these properties For example this command opens a dialog that allows the user to choose a color object_handle BackgroundColor uisetcolor When the user clicks OK the uisetcolor function returns an RGB values ra Figure 1 oja File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help a NSHIkA 0DA al NOUOUOS EHE OOOOH Eee oK Cance You can combine setting position and color into one line of code or one function for example btni uicontrol String
253. lignment of the uicontrol text specified as center left or right This property determines the justification of the String property text Interactive Control expand all gt Callback Callback function that executes when user interacts with uicontrol default function handle cell array string gt ButtonDownFen Button press callback function Javascriptvoid 0 Scroll in the help window to view descriptions of other properties 10 44 Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively The following Inspector image illustrates using the Inspector to change the Max property of a slider uicontrol from its default value 1 0 to 10 0 z Inspector matlab ui control UIControl Bi e FontWeight normal ForegroundColor gt HandleVisibility on 7 HorizontalAlignment center X Interruptible v On KeyPressFcn Cd KeyReleaseFcn ListboxTop 1 0 100 ol Min 0 0 20 20 60 20 E the double array Position SliderStep Edit with the Property Editor The Property Editor has a more graphical interface than the Property Inspector The interface is convenient for setting properties that affect the appearance of components To open it for a component in the Command Window type propedit object_handle Alternatively omit the argument and type plotedit on The figure enters plot edit mode Select the object you want to edit and cha
254. llSelectionCallback Manage Application Defined Data 12 Manage Application Defined Data Share Data Among Callbacks 12 2 In this section Overview of Data Sharing Techniques on page 12 2 Store Data as Application Data on page 12 4 Overview of Data Sharing Techniques Store Data Using the guidata Function on page 12 6 Sharing Data Among Multiple GUIDE UIs on page 12 9 Store Data in UserData or Other Object Properties on page 12 3 Create Nested Callback Functions Programmatic UIs on page 12 5 Many Uls contain interdependent controls menus and graphics objects Since each callback function has its own scope you must explicitly share data with those parts of your UI that need to access it The table below describes several different methods for sharing data within your UI Method Description Requirements and Trade Offs Store Data in UserData or Other Object Properties on page 12 3 Store Data as Application Data on page 12 4 Use dot syntax object property to store or retrieve the value of an object property All UI components have a UserData property that can store any MATLAB data Associate data with a specific component using the setappdata function You can access it later using the getappdata function Requires access to the component to set or retrieve the properties UserData holds only one variable at
255. lot In the following code listing notice how the handles structure provides access to the handle of the axes when needed Plot_Button Callback function plot_button_Callback hObject eventdata handles varargin hObject handle to plot_button see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB P P P handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA Get user input f1 str2double get handles f1_input String f2 str2double get handles f2_input String t eval get handles t_input String oe Calculate data sin 2 pi fi t sin 2 pi f2 t fft x 512 y conj y 512 1000 0 256 512 nAsS lt x Create frequency plot in proper axes plot handles frequency_axes f m 1 257 set handles frequency_axes XMinorTick on grid on Create time plot in proper axes plot handles time_axes t x set handles time_axes XMinorTick on grid on UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots Resize and Command Line Options Select Tools gt GUI Options to set these options in your UI Resize behavior Proportional Selecting Proportional as the resize behavior enables you to resize the UI window Using this option setting when you resize the UI everything expands or shrinks proportionately except text Command line accessibility Callback When UIs include axes their handles should be visible from other objects callbacks This enables you to use plo
256. lt system font The width of a character unit equals the width of the letter x in the system font The height of a character unit is the distance between the baselines of two lines of text Note that character units are not square Units and Resize Behavior If you set the resize behavior from the GUI Options dialog box GUIDE automatically sets the units for the UI components in a way that maintains the intended look and feel across platforms To specify the resize behavior option select Tools gt GUI Options and select an item from the Resize behavior pop up menu Ifyou choose Non resizable GUIDE defaults the component units to characters If you choose Proportional GUIDE defaults the component units to normalized Ifyou choose Other Use SizeChangedF cn GUIDE defaults the component units to characters However you must provide a SizeChangedFcn callback to customize the resize behavior The Non resizable and Proportional options enable your UI to automatically adjust the size and relative spacing of components when the UI displays on different computers Note GUIDE does not automatically adjust component units if you modify the figure s Resize property programmatically or in the Property Inspector At times it might be convenient to use a more familiar unit of measure e g inches or centimeters when you are laying out the UI However to preserve the look of your UI on different computers remember to change the fi
257. me List Option to List Master 14 31 UI for a Program That Accepts Arguments 14 32 About the Example 0 0 0 0 eee 14 32 Copy and View the Color Palette Code 14 34 Local Function Summary for Color Palette 14 34 Code File Organization 0 00 0 14 35 UI Programming Techniques 0005 14 36 Apps Find Apps coitus 2 cic e Mahi Laan ee a be 15 2 View App File List 0 0 00 cee 15 3 Before Installing 0 0 0 0 cece eee 15 3 After Installing 006 ace Gea See sa ee bees 15 3 Run Uninstall Reinstall and Install Apps 15 5 RUT App neas socucaore Race Bae Sci Mee a NA auarwree la Races 15 5 Install or Reinstall App 2 0 0 0 0 cee eee 15 5 Uninstall Appr ccs dd eaan WG coe bas od BH e WS wre A ee 15 6 Install Apps in a Shared Network Location 15 7 Change Apps Installation Folder 15 8 Xiv Contents Packaging GUIs as Apps 16 APPS OVERVIEW io acs BR i A wh AG A ERY 16 2 What Istan App ais teenies ce tk Reds edi ld tee a 16 2 Where to Get Apps 0 0 cece ee eee 16 2 Why Create an App 0 0 0 eee eee 16 3 Best Practices and Requirements for Creating an App 16 4 PackagecApps sei ed ae has Re EE OE hoe his Gk 16 5 Modify Apps vis ois ek Lene he LE Ones Oa OE LEE OP 16 7 Share Apps esis nse ete essa Boe es ded Pee ane Paes eae wes 16 8 MATLAB App Installer Fi
258. mmand line accessibility options Unless you explicitly specify a figure handle many commands such as plot alter the current figure the figure specified by the root CurrentFigure property and returned by the gcf command The current figure is usually the figure that is most recently created drawn into or mouse clicked You can programmatically designate a figure h where h is its handle as the current figure in four ways 1 set groot CurrentFigure h Makes figure h current but does not change its visibility or stacking with respect to other figures 2 figure h Makes figure h current visible and displayed on top of other figures 3 axes h Makes existing axes h the current axes and displays the figure containing it on top of other figures 4 plot h or any plotting function that takes an axes as its first argument also makes existing axes h the current axes and displays the figure containing it on top of other figures The gcf function returns the handle of the current figure 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options 5 10 h gcf For a UI created in GUIDE set the Command line accessibility option to prevent users from inadvertently changing the appearance or content of a UI by executing commands at the command line or from a script or function such as plot The following table briefly describes the four options for Command line accessibility Option Description Callback GUI becomes Current The UI can
259. more information and additional tips and techniques see Add a Component to a Panel or Button Group on page 6 20 and the uipanel documentation 6 47 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Button Group To create a button group with title My Button Group as shown in the following figure A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OGesl e AR0984 a 0 My Button Group Specify the button group title by setting the Title property to the desired string in this case My Button Group 6 48 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Baa SelectionChangedFcn t ShadowColor SizeChangedFcn Tag uibuttongroupl ER 5 1 oxtton croup TitlePosition lefttop Nt _ To display the amp character in the title use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove Specify the location of the button group title by selecting one of the available TitlePosition property values from the pop up menu in this case lefttop You can position the title at the left middle or right of the top or bottom of the button group 6 49 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 50 a 7 g Inspector matlab ui container ButtonGroup Ba ahl ex noaa a SelectionChangedFcn p 4 ShadowColor SizeChangedFcn Ci
260. most systems Ctrl click left mouse button noncontiguous multi item selection Shift click left mouse button contiguous multi item selection Use one of these techniques to select the two variables required to create the plot Return Variable Names for the Plotting Functions The local function get_var_names returns the two variable names that are selected when you click one of the three plotting buttons The function does these tasks Gets all the items in the list box from the String property Gets the indices of the selected items from the Value property Plot Workspace Variables in a GUIDE UI Returns two string variables if there are two items selected Otherwise get_var_names displays an error dialog box stating that you must select two variables Here is the code for get_var_names function var1 var2 get_var_names handles list_entries get handles listbox1 String index_selected get handles listbox1 Value if length index_selected 2 errordlg You must select two variables Incorrect Selection modal j else vari list_entries index_selected 1 var2 list_entries index_selected 2 end Callbacks for the Plotting Buttons The callbacks for the plotting buttons call get_var_names to get the names of the variables to plot and then call evalin to execute the plot commands in the base workspace For example here is the callback for the plot function funct
261. mponent Tag You can delete a callback from a component by clearing it from the Property Inspector this action does not remove anything from the code file You can specify the same callback function for multiple components to enable them to share code After you delete a component in GUIDE all callbacks it had remain in the code file If you are sure that no other component uses the callbacks you can then remove the Files Generated by GUIDE callback code manually For details see Renaming and Removing GUIDE Generated Callbacks on page 8 5 2 27 A Simple Programmatic UI 3 A Simple Programmatic UI Create a Simple UI Programmatically This example shows how to create a simple UI programmatically such as the one shown here 6 Figure 1 Simple GUI File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OUSGMS FE ARV9LRA A 0H af Subsequent topics guide you through the process of creating this UI If you prefer to view and run the code that created this UI without creating it set your current folder to one to which you have write access Copy the example code and open it in the Editor by issuing the following MATLAB commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples simple_gui2 fileattrib simple_gui2 w edit simple_gui2 m Note This code uses dot notation to set graphics object properties Dot notation runs in
262. mponent is created by setting the String property to the desired string in this case Enter your name here Be 8 er Position 20 20 60 20 SliderStep ee 1x2 double array String Enter your name here Tag To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove To enable multiple line input specify the Max and Min properties so that their difference is greater than 1 For example Max 2 Min 0O Max default is 1 Min default is 0 MATLAB software wraps the string and adds a scroll bar if necessary On all platforms when the user enters a multiline text box via the Tab key the editing cursor is placed at its previous location and no text highlights 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help TONENE FACE Enter your name and address here 6 33 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE If Max Min is less than or equal to 1 the edit text component admits only a single line of input If you specify a component width that is too small to accommodate the specified string MATLAB software displays only part of the string The user can use the arrow keys to move the cursor through the entire string On all platforms when the user enters a single line text box via the
263. n This code creates a radio button f r figure uicontrol fh Style radiobutton Add Components to a Programmatic UI String Indent nested functions Value 1 Position 30 20 150 20 a A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help USGAES BIAAVOVEA Indent nested functions The first uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group If you have multiple radio buttons you can manage their selection by specifying the parent to be a button group See Button Groups on page 10 24 for more information The name value pair arguments Style radiobutton specifies the uicontrol to a radio button String Indent nested functions specifies a label for the radio button Value 1 selects the radio button by default Set the Value property to be the value of the Max property to select the radio button Set the value to be the value of the Min property to deselect the radio button The default values of Max and Min are 1 and 0 respectively Position 30 20 150 20 specifies the location and size of the radio button In this example the radio button is 150 pixels wide and 20 high It is positioned 30 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom Toggle Button This code creates a toggle button f figur
264. n page 9 14 in address_book m The Prev_Next_Callback defines an additional argument str that indicates which button Prev or Next is clicked The Prev button Callback property includes Prev as the last argument The Next button Callback string includes Next as the last argument The value of str is used in case statements to implement each button s function The Prev_Next_Callback gets the current index pointer and the addresses from the handles structure and depending on which button you click the index pointer decrements or increments and the corresponding address and phone number display The final step stores the new value for the index pointer in the handles structure and saves the updated structure using guidata Prev_Next_Callback function Prev_Next_Callback hObject eventdata handles str Get the index pointer and the addresses index handles Index Addresses handles Addresses Depending on whether Prev or Next was clicked change the display switch str case Prev Decrease the index by one i index 1 If the index is less than one then set o K o K UI That Uses Persistent Data it equal to the index of the last element in the Addresses array if i lt 1 i length Addresses end case Next Increase the index by one index 1 H If the index is greater than the size of the array then point to the first item in the Addresses array if i gt length Addresses i
265. name If the folder in which you save the files is not on the MATLAB path GUIDE opens a dialog to allows you to change the current folder GUIDE saves the files simple _gui fig and simple gui m and then runs the program It also opens the code file in your default editor The UI opens in a new window Notice that the UI lacks the standard menu bar and toolbar that MATLAB figure windows display You can add your own menus and toolbar buttons with GUIDE but by default a GUIDE UI includes none of these components When you run Simple gui you can select a data set in the pop up menu and click the push buttons but nothing happens This is because the code file contains no statements to service the pop up menu and the buttons 2 15 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 16 By simple_gui fo IX 1 Surf 0 8 Mesh 0 6 TES Contour 0 4 Select Data 0 2 Peaks v 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 To run a program created with GUIDE without opening GUIDE execute its code file by typing its name simple_gui You can also use the run command with the code file for example run simple_gui Note Do not attempt to run your program by opening its FIG file outside of GUIDE If you do so the figure opens and appears ready to use but the UI does not initialize and its callbacks do not function Code the Behavior of the Simple GUIDE UI When you saved your UI in the previous topic Save the UI Layout on pag
266. ndles structure Calls guidata to save the handles structure Sets the list box String property to display the file and folder names and set the Value property to 1 ensuring that Value never exceeds the number of items in String because MATLAB software updates the Value property only when a selection occurs not when the contents of String changes Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI Displays the current folder in the text box by setting its String property to the output of the pwd command The load_listbox function is called by the opening function as well as by the list box callback function load_listbox dir_path handles cd dir_path dir_struct dir dir_path sorted_names sorted_index sortrows dir_struct name handles file_names sorted_names handles is dir dir_struct isdir handles sorted_index sorted_index guidata handles figure1 handles set handles listbox1 String handles file_names Value 1 set handles texti String pwd Code List Box Behavior The listbox1_Callback code handles only one case a double click of an item Double clicking is the standard way to open a file from a list box If the selected item is a file it is passed to the open command if it is a folder the program navigates to that folder and lists the contents Define how to open file types The open command can handle a number of different file types however the callback treats FIG files differently
267. ne or more components that you want to duplicate then do one of the following Copy and paste the selected components as described above Select Edit gt Duplicate Duplicate places the copy to the lower right of the original Right click and drag the component to the desired location The position of the cursor when you drop the components determines the parent of all the selected components 6 71 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 72 Look for the highlight as described in Add a Component to a Panel or Button Group on page 6 20 Front to Back Positioning You can group components inside of panels and button groups Doing so can enhance the appearance of your UI and make it easier to navigate Use the Object Browser to control the front to back order or stacking order of panels button groups and the components they contain Select View gt Object Browser 2 Inthe layout select the component you want to appear on top and move it slightly over the component you want to appear behind it Moving a component slightly over another one makes the top component become a child of the one behind it Notice that the listing of components in the Object Browser changes when you do this The component you move to the top in the layout becomes indented and is listed below the component that is behind it This reflects the new parent and child order For example selecting and moving this button slightly over the panel ensures that
268. nents are created inside the main function so they are accessible from within the nested callback functions in the same file The Main Figure This command creates the figure window hMainFigure figure The main figure MenuBar none Toolbar none HandleVisibility callback Color get groot defaultuicontrolbackgroundcolor Setting the MenuBar and Toolbar properties to none prevents the default menus from displaying and hides the default toolbar Setting the HandleVisibility property to callback ensures that the figure object can be accessed only from within a callback The Color property defines the background color of the figure In this case it is set to be the same as the default background color of uicontrol objects such as the Update push button The factory default background color of uicontrol objects is the system default and can vary from system to system This statement ensures that the figure s background color matches the background color of the components The Axes This command creates the axes Axes Menus and Toolbars in Programmatic Uls hPlotAxes axes Axes for plotting the selected plot Parent hMainFigure Units normalized 3 HandleVisibility callback Position 0 11 0 13 0 80 0 67 The axes function creates the axes Setting the axes Parent property to hMainFigure makes it a child of the main figure Setting
269. ng For instance you can allow users to stop an animation loop by creating a callback that interrupts the animation At other times you might want to prevent potential interruptions when the order of the running callback is important For instance you might prevent interruptions for a WindowButtonMotionFcn callback that shows different sections of an image How to Control Interruption Callback functions execute according to their order in a queue If a callback is executing and a user action triggers a second callback the second callback attempts to interrupt the first callback The first callback is the running callback The second callback is the interrupting callback Two property values control the response to an interruption attempt The Interruptible property of the object owning the running callback determines if interruption is allowed A value of on allows the interruption A value of off does not allow the interruption The default value is on Tfinterruption is not allowed then the BusyAction property of the object owning the interrupting callback determines if MATLAB enqueues or discards the interrupting callback A value of queue allows the interrupting callback to execute after the running callback finishes execution A value of cancel1 discards the interrupting callback The default value is queue Callback Behavior When Interruption is Allowed When an object s Interruptible property is set to on it
270. ng edits inadvertently toggle list_numbers Callback for the lmnumlistbtn check box which prefixes line numbers to list items or removes them depending on value of the check box Identify Component Handles A common characteristic of these and other List Master local functions is their way of obtaining handles for components Rather than using the guidata function which many programs use to share objects and other data for UI components these local functions get handles they need dynamically by looking them up from their Tags which are hard coded and never vary The code that finds handles uses the following pattern Get the figure handle and from that the listbox handle fh ancestor hObject figure lh findobj fh Tag lmtablisttag1 Here hObject is whatever object issued the callback that is currently executing and Imtablisttag1 is the hard coded Tag property of the list box Always looking up the figure handle with ancestor assures that the current List Master is identified 14 29 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 30 Likewise specifying the figure handle to findobj assures that only one list box handle is returned regardless of how many List Master instances are open at the same time List Master Utility Functions Certain callbacks rely on four small utility functions that are listed and described in this table Utility Function How Used number_list Called
271. nge any property that the Property Editor displays The following figure shows the BackgroundColor and String properties of a list box altered using the Property Editor 10 45 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 46 G A Figures Figure 1 File Edit View Inset Tools Debug Desktop Window Help sax ngas 2Q908Z 32 0 Hone Figure 1 f Fistin N Second line Third line Property Editor UlControl String First line Style pushbutton More Properties Second line Third line gon Font MsSansSef 80 Color amp normal normal BackgroundColor Most of the properties that the Property Editor can set are cosmetic To modify values for other properties click More Properties The Property Inspector opens or if already open receives focus to display properties of the selected object Use it to change properties that the Property Editor does not display When you finish setting a property you need to save its value If your program file opens a saved FIG file each time it runs save or re save the figure itself If your program file creates the figure each time it runs save the property value in your program file Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively You can obtain the new property value using dot notation and the property name For example this command gets the BackgroundColor property value of object_handle and stores it in the variabl
272. ns the menu contents e Value the index into the menu contents of the selected data set The code then uses a Switch statement to make the selected data set the current data The last statement saves the changes to the handles structure Determine the selected data set str get hObject String val get hObject Value Set current data to the selected data set switch str val case peaks User selects peaks handles current_data handles peaks case membrane User selects membrane handles current_data handles membrane case sinc User selects sinc handles current_data handles sinc end Save the handles structure guidata hObject handles Code Push Button Behavior Each of the push buttons creates a different type of plot using the data specified by the current selection in the pop up menu The push button callbacks get data from the handles structure and then plot it Display the Surf push button callback in the MATLAB Editor In the Layout Editor right click the Surf push button and then select View Callbacks gt Callback Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Mes Ctrl V Clear Conte Duplicate Ctrl D Bring to Front Ctrl F Send to Back Ctrl B Selec Object Browser Peaks Editor View Callbacks Callback CreateFcn Property Inspector DeleteFcn n aa ButtonDownFcn KeyPressFcn 350 296 69 22 In the Editor the cursor moves to the Surf p
273. nside it to positions you want them to have Also slightly move controls that are already in their correct positions to group them with the panel The panel highlights when you move a control indicating it now contains the control The Object Browser updates to confirm the relationship If you now move the panel its child controls move with it Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Tip You need to move controls with the mouse to register them with the surrounding panel or button group even if only by a pixel or two Selecting them and using arrow keys to move them does not accomplish this Use the Object Browser to verify that controls are properly nested See Panels and Button Groups on page 6 44 for more information on how to incorporate panels and button groups into a UI Assign an Identifier to Each Component Use the Tag property to assign each component a unique meaningful string identifier When you place a component in the layout area GUIDE assigns a default value to the Tag property Before saving the UI replace this value with a string that reflects the role of the component in the UI The string value you assign Tag is used by code to identify the component and must be unique in the UI To set Tag 1 2 3 Select View gt Property Inspector or click the Property Inspector button E In the layout area select the component for which you want to set Tag In the Property Inspector select Tag and t
274. nt get hObject Value returns toggle state of radiobutton1 if get hObject Value get hObject Max display Selected else display Not selected end The radio button s Value property matches the Min property when the radio button is not selected The Value changes to the Max value when the radio button is selected This callback function gets the radio button s Value property and then compares it with the Max and Min properties If the button is selected then the function displays Selected in the Command Window If the button is not selected then the function displays Not selected Note Use a button group to manage exclusive selection behavior for radio buttons See Button Group on page 8 21 for more information 8 13 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 14 Check Box This code is an example of a check box callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the check box Callback property to make it execute when the end user clicks on the check box function checkbox1_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to checkbox1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X Hint get hObject Value returns toggle state of checkboxi if get hObject Value get hObject Max display Selected else display Not selected end The check box s Value property ma
275. nt allows space at the left and bottom of the axes for tick marks Functions that draw in the axes update the tick marks appropriately Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area File Edit View Layout Tools Help NEE SLIOCH BAd E E H Le seet Push Button a Slider Radio Button M Check Box kor Edit Text TT Static Text 3 Pop up Menu El Listbox Toggle Button E Table i Axes i Panel 73 Button Group X ActiveX Control Tag axesl Current Point 67 44 Position 64 52 224 201 Use the title xlabel ylabel zlabel and text functions in the UI code file to label an axes component For example axes_handle Years labels the X axis as Years The handle of the X axis label is x1h The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these in component text prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove 6 53 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Ifyou want to set the position or size of the axes to an exact value then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details Ifyou customize axes properties some of them or example callbacks font characteristics and axis limits and ticks may get reset to default every time you
276. ntaining the project file prj that MATLAB created when you packaged the app By default MATLAB writes the prj file to the folder that was the current folder when you packaged the app 2 From the Current Folder browser double click the project file for your app package appname prj The Package App dialog box opens 3 Adjust the information in the dialog box to reflect your changes by doing any or all of the following If you made code changes add the main file again and refresh the files included through analysis If your code calls additional files that are not included through analysis add them If you want anyone who installs your app over a previous installation to be informed that the content is different change the version Version numbers must be a combination of integers and periods and can include up to three periods 2 3 5 2 for example Anyone who attempts to install a revision of your app over another version is notified that the version number is changed The user can continue or cancel the installation 4 Click Package 16 7 16 Packaging GUls as Apps Share Apps 16 8 To share your app with others give them the mlappinsta11 file All files you added when you packaged the app are included in the mlappinstal11 file When the recipients install your app they do not need to be concerned with the MATLAB path or other installation details The mlappinstal1 file manages that for them Yo
277. ntains tab characters the list box does not display them As it exists you cannot import data from a text file using the List Master example code as supplied It does contain a commented out File menu item for this purpose and a callback for it Imfileimport containing no code See Add an Import from File Option to List Master on page 14 31 for more information You do not need to import data to work with List Master The UI allows you to create lists by selecting the Add radio button typing items in the edit text box one at a time and pressing Return to add each one to the list You can export any list you create Export Data from List Master To export the current list as a cell array select File gt Export list gt to workspace The lmwsexport function calls the assignin function to create the variable after you specify its name If you only want to export a single list item perform these steps Click on the list box item you want to copy or select the item s text in the edit box Type Ctrl C to copy the item Open a document into which you want to paste the item hOoOnND Place the cursor where you want to paste the item and type Ctrl V You cannot paste from the system clipboard into the list box because the content of a list box can only be changed programmatically by setting its String property This means Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI that to paste new items into a list you must add them one a
278. nu GUIDE adds its title to the menu bar You then can create menu items for that menu Each menu item can have a cascading menu also known as a submenu and these items can have cascading menus and so on How Menus Affect Figure Docking By default when you create a UI with GUIDE it does not create a menu bar for that UI You might not need menus for your UI but if you want the user to be able to dock or undock the UI window it must contain a menu bar or a toolbar This is because docking is controlled by the docking icon a small curved arrow near the upper right corner of the menu bar or the toolbar as the following illustration shows o Figure windows with a standard menu bar also have a Desktop menu from which the user can dock and undock them To display the docking arrow and the Desktop gt Dock Figure menu item use the Property Inspector to set the figure property DockControls to on You must also set the MenuBar and or ToolBar figure properties to figure to display docking controls The WindowStyle figure property also affects docking behavior The default is normal but if you change it to docked then the following applies The UI window opens docked in the desktop when you run it Create Menus for GUIDE Uls The DockControls property is set to on and cannot be turned off until WindowStyle is no longer set to docked If you undock a UI window created with WindowStyle docked it wil
279. o interact with a uitable and the data it holds by Graphing specific columns of data e Brushing the graph when the user selects cells in the table A 2 D axes displays line graphs of the data in response to selecting check boxes and in real time the results of selecting observations in the table About the Example The UI presents data in a three column table a uitable object and enables the user to plot any column of data as a line graph When the user selects data values in the table the plot displays markers for the selected observations This figure shows the results of plotting two columns and selecting a subset of values in each column Synchronized Data Presentations in a Programmatic UI Plot co1 col2 col3 Oak Ave Washing Center St 11 11 Hourly Traffic Counts 5 AM 10 AM 3 PM The program displays and removes line plots when the user selects and clears the three check boxes The circle markers appear and disappear dynamically as the user selects cells in the table The user need not plot lines to display the markers The table displays MATLAB sample data count dat containing hourly counts of vehicles passing three locations The example does not provide a way to change the data except by modifying the tableplot m main function to read in a different data set 14 13 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 14 View the Example Code To obtain copies of
280. off Setting the value to on forces the posting of the context menu Setting to off forces the context menu to be removed The Position property determines the location where the context menu is displayed 10 74 For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see Uicontextmenu Properties Create the Context Menu Object Use the uicontextmenu function to create a context menu object The syntax is handle uicontextmenu PropertyName PropertyValue The parent of a context menu must always be a figure Use the Parent property to specify the parent of a uicontextmenu If you do not specify the Parent property the parent is the current figure as specified by the root CurrentFigure property The following code creates a figure and a context menu whose parent is the figure At this point the figure is visible but not the menu fh figure Position 300 300 400 225 cmenu uicontextmenu Parent fh Position 10 215 Note Force Display of the Context Menu on page 10 77 explains the use of the Position property Add Menu ltems to the Context Menu Use the uimenu function to add items to the context menu The items appear on the menu in the order in which you add them The following code adds three items to the context menu created above Create Menus for Programmatic Uls mhi uimenu cmenu Label Item 1 mh2 uimenu cmenu Label
281. ogrammatic Files from GUIDE Files on page 7 4 Backward Compatibility Preference MATLAB Version 5 or Later Compatibility UI FIG files created or modified with MATLAB 7 0 or a later version are not automatically compatible with Version 6 5 and earlier versions GUIDE automatically generates FIG files which are binary files that contain the UI layout information To make a FIG file backward compatible from the Layout Editor select File gt Preferences gt General gt MAT Files and then select MATLAB Version 5 or later save v6 Note The v6 option discussed in this section is obsolete and will be removed in a future version of MATLAB All Other Preferences GUIDE provides other preferences for the Layout Editor interface and for inserting code comments In the Preferences dialog box click GUIDE to access these preferences GUIDE Preferences gt 4 MATLAB Apps Code Analyzer V Show names in component palette Colors Command History Command Window Comparison Current Folder Editor Debugger gt Figure Copy Template Fonts gt General GUIDE Help b Keyboard Toolbars Variables Web Workspace v MATLAB GUIDE Preferences lt Show file extension in window title Show file path in window title lt Add comments for newly generated callback functions The following topics describe the preferences in this dialog Sho
282. olbar buttons in the Toolbar Editor click the View button next to Clicked Callback for Push Tool buttons or On Callback or Off Callback for Toggle Tools When you perform any of these actions GUIDE adds the callback template to the UI code file saves it and opens it for editing at the callback you just added If you select a callback that currently exists in the code file GUIDE adds no callback but saves the file and opens it for editing at the callback you select For more information see GUIDE Generated Callback Functions and Property Values on page 8 4 About GUIDE Generated Callbacks Callbacks created by GUIDE for UI components are similar to callbacks created programmatically with certain differences GUIDE generates callbacks as function templates within the code file GUIDE names callbacks based on the callback type and the component Tag property For example togglebutton1 Callback is such a default callback name If you change a component Tag GUIDE renames all its callbacks in the code file to contain the new tag You can change the name of a callback replace it with another function or remove it entirely using the Property Inspector GUIDE provides three arguments to callbacks always named the same You can append arguments to GUIDE generated callbacks but never alter or remove the ones that GUIDE places there You can rename a GUIDE generated callback by editing its name or by changing the co
283. ompatible Units on page 6 121 for more information 6 78 Align GUIDE UI Components Align GUIDE UI Components In this section Align Objects Tool on page 6 79 Property Inspector on page 6 82 Grid and Rulers on page 6 85 Guide Lines on page 6 86 Align Objects Tool The Align Objects tool enables you to position objects with respect to each other and to adjust the spacing between selected objects The specified alignment operations apply to all components that are selected when you press the Apply button To open the Align Objects tool in the GUIDE Layout Editor select Tools gt Align Objects Note To select multiple components they must have the same parent That is they must be contained in the same figure panel or button group See Select Components on page 6 70 for more information 6 79 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 80 Align Objects Eea Vertical Align XTT ee ate Distribute at ct Set spacing 20 pixels Horizontal sip SHE Set spacing 20 pixels ok Cancel Apply The Align Objects tool provides two types of alignment operations Align Align all selected components to a single reference line Distribute Space all selected components uniformly with respect to each other Both types of alignment can be applied in the vertical and horizontal directions In many cases it is better to
284. omponent to access your data Call guidata with two input arguments to store data guidata object_handle data The first input obj ect_hand1e is any UI component typically hObject The second input data is the variable to store Every time you call guidata using two input arguments MATLAB overwrites any previously stored data This means you can only store one variable at a time If you want to share multiple values then store the data as a struct array or cell array To retrieve data call guidata using one input argument and one output argument data guidata object_handl1le The component you specify to store the data does not need to be the same component that you use to retrieve it If your data is stored as a Struct array or cell array and you want to update one element without changing the other elements then retrieve the data and replace it with the modified array data guidata hObject data myvalue 2 guidata hObject data Use guidata in a Programmatic Ul To use guidata in a programmatic UI store the data with some initial values in the main function Then you can retrieve and modify the data in any callback function The following code is a simple example of a programmatic UI that uses guidata to share a struct array containing two fields To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function my_slider hfig figure guidata hfig struct val 0 diffMax 1 slide
285. on About the Example on page 14 20 View the Example Code on page 14 21 Use the UI on page 14 22 Program List Master on page 14 26 Add an Import from File Option to List Master on page 14 31 Add a Rename List Option to List Master on page 14 31 About the Example This example program creates and manages lists such as to do lists phone numbers or any set of items It has these features Ability to create new UIs from an existing List Master UI A scrolling list box containing a numbered or unnumbered sequence of items A text box and push buttons enabling users to edit add delete and reorder list items Capability to import and export list data and to save a list by saving the UI A File menu for creating opening and saving UIs The left image below shows the items available under the File menu The right image shows a sample list The File Menu Items UI Containing a Sample List 14 20 Lists of Items in a Programmatic Ul r ListMaster Groceries Open Groceries 2 1 2 gallon milk 3 5 lb whole wheat flour 4 1 qt vanilla ice cream New Import list gt Export list gt Save Save as Quit I Replace Add 1 dozen large eggs View the Example Code The example includes one code file two MAT files and a text file e listmaster m The UI code file con
286. on 465 065 50 85 XLim 0 tablesize 1 YLim O0 max max count XLimMode manual YLimMode manual XTickLabel 12 AM 5 AM 10 AM 3 PM 8 PM title haxes Hourly Traffic Counts Describe data set Prevent axes from clearing when new lines or markers are plotted hold haxes all In the next block of code the tableplot function plots the lineseries for the markers with a call to plot The plot function graphs the entire count data set which remains 14 15 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 16 in the workspace after being copied into the table However the function hides the markers immediately only to be revealed when the user selects cells in the data table Create an invisible marker plot of the data and save handles to the lineseries objects use this to simulate data brushing hmkrs plot count LineStyle none Marker O MarkerFaceColor y HandleVisibility off Visible off The main function defines three check boxes to control plotting of the three columns of data and two static text strings You can see the code for this if you display tableplot m The Cell Selection Callback The select_callback function for the Cel1lSelectionCallback property shows and hides markers on the axes When the user selects data values in the table the plot displays markers for the selected observations
287. on on setting tags see Identify the Axes on page 9 23 in the previous example The handles Strings data is used in the spinstopbutton_Callback function which includes the following code for changing the label of the button str get hObject String state find strcmp str handles Strings set hObject String handles Strings 3 state The find function returns the index of the string that matches the button s current label The call to set switches the label to the alternative string If state is 1 3 state sets it to 2 If state is 2 it sets it to 1 Interrupt the Spin Callback If you click the Spin Stop button when its label is Stop its callback is looping through code that updates the display by advancing the rotation of the surface objects The spinstopbutton Callback contains code that listens to such events but it does not use the events structure to accomplish this Instead it uses this piece of code to exit the display loop if find strcemp get hObject String handles Strings handles azimuth az guidata hObject handles break end Entering this block of code while spinning the view exits the while loop to stop the animation First however it saves the current azimuth of rotation for initializing the next spin The handles structure can store any variable not just handles If you click the now Spin button the animation resumes at the place where it halted using the cached azimuth value
288. ons with different values for controller gains F14 Controller Gain Editor Controller gains Proportional Kf sat fo 3 83721 Name Runt 1 746 3 864 E Run2 1 4341 3 864 Run3 3 8372 3 864 Current value Integral Ki s f o 3 8640 Current value Simulate and store results gt gt 9 57 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 58 To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating_guis examples fidex fileattrib fi4ex w guide f14ex fig 2 From GUIDE Layout Editor click the Editor button SJ The f14ex m code displays in the MATLAB Editor How to Use the Ul Note You must have Simulink installed for this program to run The first time you run the program Simulink opens if it is not already running and loads the 14 example model This can take several seconds The UI has a Help button Clicking it opens an HTML file f14ex_help html1 in the Help Browser This file which resides in the examples folder along with the UI files contains the following five sections of help text F14 Controller Gain Editor You can use the F14 Controller Gain Editor to analyze how changing the gains used in the Proportional Integral
289. ools A group of four tools on the left side for editing icons Pencil tool Color icon pixels by clicking or dragging e Eraser tool Erase pixels to be transparent by clicking or dragging Paint bucket tool Flood regions of same color pixels with the current color Pick color tool Click a pixel or color palette swatch to define the current color Icon Edit pane A n by m grid where you color an icon Preview pane A button with a preview of current state of the icon Color Palette Swatches of color that the pencil and paint tools can use More Colors button Opens the Colors dialog box for choosing and defining colors OK button Dismisses the dialog and returns the icon in its current state Cancel button Closes the dialog without returning the icon To work with the Icon Editor 1 Open the Icon Editor for a selected tool s icon 2 Using the Pencil tool color the squares in the grid Click a color cell in the palette That color appears in the Color Palette preview swatch Click in specific squares of the grid to transfer the selected color to those squares Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse over the grid to transfer the selected color to the squares that you touch Change a color by writing over it with another color 3 Using the Eraser tool erase the color in some squares Click the Eraser button on the palette Click in specific squares to erase those
290. open_system f14 open_system f14 Controller set_param f14 Controller Gain Position 275 14 340 56 figure handles F14ControllerEditor set_param f14 Controller Gain Gain get handles KfCurrentValue String set_param 14 Controller Proportional plus integral compensator Numerator get handles KiCurrentValue String end Program the Slider and Edit Text Components Each slider is coupled to an edit text component to accomplish these tasks Display the current value of the slider in the edit text box Update the slider when you enter a value into the edit text box Update the appropriate model parameters when you interact with the slider and edit text box UI for Setting Simulink Model Parameters Slider Callback The UI uses two sliders to specify block gains because these components enable the selection of continuous values within a specified range When you change the slider value the callback performs these tasks Calls model_open to ensure that the Simulink model is open so that simulation parameters can be set Gets the new slider value Sets the value of the Current value edit text component to match the slider Sets the appropriate block parameter to the new value Set_param Here is the callback for the Proportional Kf slider function KfValueSlider_Callback hObject eventdata handles Ensure model is open model_open handles Get the new value
291. or msgbox which also provides links to functions that create specialized predefined dialog boxes GUIDE Tools Summary GUIDE Tools Summary The GUIDE tools are available from the Layout Editor shown in the figure below The tools are called out in the figure and described briefly below Subsequent sections show you how to use them Align Objects Tab Order Editor M file Editor Object Browser Menu Editor Toolbar Editor Property Inspector Run GUI T untitled fig N a Sco File Edit View Layout Tod ip DGe sOre sh HSS P il Push Button Slider Radio Button A Check Box G3 Pop up Menu Ell Listbox E Toggle Button El Teble at Axes J 1 Panel 34 Selected Object Mouse Pointer Selected Object s Tag Prope osition sition i 155 button Group g Property p po Resize Box X ActiveX Control Tag figurel Current Point 463 117 Position 520 380 560 420 Use This Tool To Layout Editor Select components from the component palette at the left side of the Layout Editor and arrange them in the layout area See Add 4 3 What Is GUIDE 4 4 Use This Tool To Components to the GUIDE Layout Area on page 6 17 for more information Figure Resize Tab Set the size at which the UI is initially displayed when you run it See Set the UI Window Size in GUIDE on page 6 11 for more information Menu Editor Create menus and context i
292. ou to display ActiveX controls User Interface Controls e Push Button on page 10 9 e Radio Button on page 10 10 Toggle Button on page 10 11 Check Box on page 10 12 Slider on page 10 13 Static Text on page 10 15 Editable Text Field on page 10 16 Pop Up Menu on page 10 18 List Box on page 10 19 Push Button This code creates a push button f figure pb uicontrol fh Style pushbutton String Button 1 Position 50 20 60 40 10 9 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 10 a 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOSGAs k AAC0ECK4 2 08 The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style pushbutton the uicontrol to be a push button String Button 1 add the label Button 1 to the push button Position 50 20 60 40 specifies the location and size of the push button In this example the push button is 60 pixels wide and 40 high It is positioned 50 pixels from the left of the figure and 20 pixels from the bottom Displaying an Icon on a Push Button To add an icon to a push button assign the button s CData property to be an m by n by 3 array of RGB values that define a truecolor image Radio Butto
293. ou to pass arguments from the 8 7 8 Programming a GUIDE UI command line to the opening function The opening function can take actions with them for example setting property values and also make the arguments available to callbacks by adding them to the handles structure For more information about using varargin see the varargin reference page and Support Variable Number of Inputs Passing Object Properties to an Opening Function You can pass property name value pairs as two successive command line arguments when you run your program If you pass a name value pair that corresponds to a figure property MATLAB sets the property automatically For example my_gui Color Blue sets the background color of the UI window to blue If you want your program to accept an input argument that is not a valid figure property then your code must recognize and handle that argument Otherwise the argument is ignored The following example is from the opening function for the Modal Question Dialog template available from the GUIDE Quick Start dialog box The added code opens the modal dialog with a message specified from the command line or by another program that calls this one For example this command displays the text Do you want to exit on the window myui String Do you want to exit To accept this name value pair you must customize the opening function because String is not a valid figure property The Modal
294. oup WindowButtonDa End user presses a mouse button figure while the pointer is in the figure window WindowButtonMi End user moves the pointer within figure the figure window WindowButtonUj End user releases a mouse button figure WindowKeyPress End user presses a key while the figure pointer is on the figure or any of its child objects 8 3 8 Programming a GUIDE UI Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property WindowKeyRelea End user releases a key while the figure pointer is on the figure or any of its child objects WindowScrollWh End user turns the mouse wheel figure while the pointer is on the figure GUIDE Generated Callback Functions and Property Values How GUIDE Manages Callback Functions and Properties After you add a uicontrol uimenu or uicontextmenu component to your UI but before you save it GUIDE populates the Callback property with the value Sautomatic This value indicates that GUIDE will generate a name for the callback function When you save your UI GUIDE adds an empty callback function definition to your UI code file and it sets the control s Callback property to be an anonymous function This function definition is an example of a GUIDE generated callback function for a push button function pushbutton1_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to pushbutton1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future ver
295. output arguments the user has supplied varargout contains the optional output arguments returned by the program See the complete Icon Editor code file for more information Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow In this section Callbacks for Different User Actions on page 11 5 How to Specify Callback Property Values on page 11 7 Callback Syntax on page 11 9 Callbacks for Different User Actions UI and graphics components have certain properties that you can associate with specific callback functions Each of these properties corresponds to a specific user action For example a uicontrol has a property called Callback You can set the value of this property to be a handle to a callback function an anonymous function or a string containing MATLAB commands Setting this property makes your UI respond when the user interacts with the uicontrol If the Callback property has no specified value then nothing happens when the end user interacts with the uicontrol This table lists the callback properties that are available the user actions that trigger the callback function and the most common UI and graphics components that use them Callback Property User Action Components That Use This Property ButtonDownFcn End user presses a mouse button axes figure uibuttongroup while the pointer is on the uicontrol uipanel
296. ow Ctrl Cmd downarrow downarrow Keyboard equivalents only operate when the cursor is in the data entry area In addition to those listed above typing Ctrl T or Cmd T selects the entire field containing the cursor for editing if the field contains text To save changes to the table you make in the Table Property Editor click OK or click Apply commit changes and keep on using the Table Property Editor Set Column Properties Click Insert to add two more columns Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area F iat Table Property Editor x Cohumns Rows Data Unless the Show names entered below option is selected the number of columns appearing in the table is determined Colors by the number of columns in Data Column Headers Do not show column headers Show numbered column headers Show names entered below as the column headers Column Definitions Name Auto Width Width px Editable Format 1 m Let MATLAB Choose 2 cama 2 T Let MATLAB Choose CaP Delete tur Down Edit ok Cane Apply Help Select Show names entered below as the column headers and set the ColumnName by entering Rate Amount Available and Fixed Adj in Name group for the Available and Fixed Adj columns set the ColumnEditable property to on Lastly set the ColumnFormat for the four columns 6 59
297. p up menu presents options for plotting the data When the user selects one of the three plots MATLAB software sets the pop up menu Value property to the index of the selected string The pop up menu callback reads the pop up menu Value property to determine the item that the menu currently displays and sets handles current_data accordingly Create a Simple UI Using GUIDE 1 Display the pop up menu callback in the MATLAB Editor In the GUIDE Layout Editor right click the pop up menu component and then select View Callbacks gt Callback Select Data s s s Peaks C ut a Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Ctrl V Clear Sy Duplicate Ctrl D Ee ee Bring to Front Ctrl F Send to Back Ctrl B Object Browser Editor View Callbacks i Callback N CreateFcn Property Inspector DeleteFcn ButtonDownFcn KeyPressFcn GUIDE displays the UI code file in the Editor and moves the cursor to the pop menu callback which contains this code Executes on selection change in popupmenu1 unction popupmenu1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to popupmenu1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X P P h P 2 Add the following code to the popupmenu1_Callback after the comment that begins handles 2 19 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 20 This code first retrieves two pop up menu properties e String a cell array that contai
298. page 8 11 for basic examples of programming these components Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe a user interface control are shown in the following table Instructions for a particular control may also list properties that are specific to that control Property Value Description Enable on inactive off Default is ON Determines whether the control is available to the user Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Property Value Description Max Scalar Default is 1 Maximum value Interpretation depends on the type of component Min Scalar Default is 0 Minimum value Interpretation depends on the type of component Position 4 element vector distance Size of the component and its from left distance from location relative to its parent bottom width height String String Can also be a cell Component label For list array or character array of boxes and pop up menus it is strings a list of the items Units characters centimeters Units of measurement used inches normalized to interpret the Position pixels points Default is property vector characters Value Scalar or vector Value of the component Interpretation depends on the type of component For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see Uicontrol Properties Push Button To cre
299. pen File menu item then use the uigetfile function When you create a cascading menu like this one the intermediate menu items trigger when the mouse hovers over them The final terminating menu item triggers when the mouse button releases over the menu item How to Update a Menu Item Check You can add a check mark next to a menu item to indicate that an option is enabled In GUIDE you can select Check mark this item in the Menu Editor to make the menu item checked by default Each time the end user selects the menu item the callback function can turn the check on or off This code shows how to change the check mark next to a menu item Callbacks for Specific Components if strcomp get hObject Checked on set hObject Checked off else set hObject Checked on end The strcmp function compares two strings and returns true when they match In this case it returns true when the menu item s Checked property matches the string on See Create Menus for GUIDE UIs for more information about creating menu items in GUIDE See Create Menus for Programmatic UIs for more information about creating menu items programmatically Table This code is an example of the table callback function Cel1SelectionCallback Associate this function with the table Cel1SelectionCallback property to make it execute when the end user selects cells in the table function uitable1_CellSelectionCallback hObject eventda
300. perty to the desired items Click the 6 36 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area m button to the right of the property name to open the Property Inspector editor E E Inspector matlab ui control UIControl lole z ee Bi ei 4 Position 20 20 60 20 a SliderStep E 1x2 double array 2 one 2 Style z Tag two three four OK l Cancel To display the amp character in a menu item use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove If the width of the component is too small to accommodate one or more of the specified strings MATLAB software truncates those strings with an ellipsis To select an item when the component is created set Value to a scalar that indicates the index of the selected list item where 1 corresponds to the first item in the list If you set Value to 2 the menu looks like this when it is created 6 37 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE r amp Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help a OGAS F AAU9AA 4 0 Ifyou want to set the position and size of the component to exact values then modify its Position property See Locate and Move Components on page 6 74 and Resize GUIDE UI Components on page 6 67 for details The height of a pop up menu is d
301. plot using the data specified by the current selection in the pop up menu The push button callbacks plot the data in current_data They automatically have access to current_data because they are nested at a lower level Add the following callbacks to your file following the pop up menu callback and before the final end statement Push button callbacks Each callback plots current_data in the specified plot type function surfbutton_Callback source eventdata Display surf plot of the currently selected data surf current_data end function meshbutton_Callback source eventdata Display mesh plot of the currently selected data mesh current_data 3 7 3A Simple Programmatic UI end function contourbutton_Callback source eventdata Display contour plot of the currently selected data contour current_data end Program the Callbacks When the user selects a data set from the pop up menu or clicks one of the push buttons MATLAB software executes the callback associated with that particular event Use each component s Callback property to specify the name of the callback with which each event is associated 1 Tothe uicontrol statement that defines the Surf push button add the property value pair Callback surfbutton_Callback so that the statement looks like this hsurf uicontrol Style pushbutton String Surf Position 315 220 70 25 Callback surfbutton_Callback
302. ponent to a Panel or Button Group on page 6 20 Menus See Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 Toolbars See Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 ActiveX controls See ActiveX Component on page 6 65 See Grid and Rulers on page 6 85 for information about using the grid Assign a unique identifier to each component Do this by setting the value of the component Tag properties See Assign an Identifier to Each Component on page 6 23 for more information Specify the look and feel of each component by setting the appropriate properties The following topics contain specific information e User Interface Controls on page 6 23 e Panels and Button Groups on page 6 44 Axes on page 6 50 Table on page 6 54 e ActiveX Component on page 6 65 This is an example of a UI in the Layout Editor Components in the Layout Editor are not active Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area File Edit View Layout Tools Help DGGE sae Eha PRS Lh seer Push Button a Slider RadioButton M Check Box mi Edit Text TT Static Text 3 Pop up Menu El Listbox E Toggle Button E Table iv Axes T Panel Hil Static Text Pop up M Z 2 Button Group X ActiveX Control Tag figurel Current Point 104 4
303. ponents properties using the Property Inspector To open it from the GUIDE Layout Editor do any of the following Select the component you want to inspect or double click it to open the Property Inspector and bring it to the foreground Select View gt Property Inspector Click the Property Inspector button E The Property Inspector window opens displaying the properties of the selected component For example here is a view of a push button s properties Align GUIDE UI Components xs Inspector matlab ui contro nE BackgroundColor BeingDeleted BusyAction ButtonDownFcn CData Callback CreateFcn DeleteFcn Enable Extent FontAngle FontName FontSize FontUnits FontWeight 4 ForegroundColor HandleVisibility automatic on 0 0 12 4 1 462 normal MS Sans Serif 8 0 points normal Scroll down to see additional properties Click any property value or icon to set its value The Property Inspector provides context sensitive help for individual properties To see a definition of any property right click the name or value in the Property Inspector and click the What s This menu item that appears A context sensitive help window opens displaying the definition of the property 6 83 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 84 8 0 points ForegroundColor A E HandleVisibility on vette E Interruptible Lon KeyPressFcn KeyReleaseFcn _ListboxTop
304. ponents as they are added or initialized All other properties assume their defaults f figure Visible off Name My UI Position 360 500 450 285 Related Examples Lay Out a UI Programmatically Add Components to a Programmatic UI on page 10 9 Create Menus for Programmatic UIs on page 10 66 Create Toolbars for Programmatic UIs on page 10 79 10 5 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Programmatic Components 10 6 The following table describes the available components and the function used to create each programmatically 10 22 Component Function Description ActiveX actxcontrol ActiveX components enable you to display ActiveX controls in your UI They are available only on the Microsoft Windows platform Check Box on axes Axes enable your UI to display graphics page 10 12 such as graphs and images Button Groups on uibuttongroup Button groups are like panels but are used page 10 24 to manage exclusive selection behavior for radio buttons and toggle buttons Check Box on uicontrol Check boxes can generate an action when page 10 12 checked and indicate their state as checked or not checked Check boxes are useful when providing the user with a number of independent choices for example displaying a toolbar Editable Text uicontrol Edit text components are fields that enable Field on page users to enter or modify tex
305. pop up and assign the appropriate string to the plot panel label index get hObject Value What plot type is requested strlist get hObject String Get the choice s name set handles uipanel3 Title strlist index Rename uipanel3 X X Plot one axes at a time changing data first the population table get handles data_table Data Obtain the data table refreshDisplays table handles 1 Now compute stats for and plot the selection if needed Retrieve the stored event data for the last selection selection handles currSelection if length selection gt 10 If more than 10 rows selected refreshDisplays table selection handles 2 else Do nothing insufficient observations for statistics end The function updates the Data Statistics table and the plots To perform the updates it calls the refreshDisplays function twice which is a custom function added to the UI code file In between the two calls the ref reshDisplays function retrieves row indices for the current selection from the currSelection member of the handles structure where they were cached by the data_table CellSelectionCallback You can see the effect of toggling the plot type in the two illustrations that follow The one on the left shows the Sunspots v Year plots and the one on the right shows the FFT Periodograms Plots The selection in both cases is the years 1901 1950 9 39 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 40 487 Sunspo
306. port m list data from a workspace cell array lmwsimport list Export Creates a cell array or text file containing the lmwsexport list current list lmfileexport Save Saves current List Master and its contents as lmsave a FIG file Save as Saves current List Master to a different FIG lmsaveas file Quit Exits List Master with option to save first lmquit After creating a blank UI with a File menu the listmaster function exits The main function sets up the figure as follows fh figure MenuBar none NumberTitle off Name ListMaster Tag lmfigtag CloseRequestFcn lmquit Units pixels Position pos Turning off the MenuBar eliminates the default figure window menus which the program later replaces with its own File menu NumberTitle is turned off to eliminate a figure number in its title bar Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI Here is the code that calculates the initial position of the UI window su get groot Units set groot Units pixels scnsize get groot ScreenSize scnsize 3 min scnsize 3 1280 Limit superwide screens figx 264 figy 356 Default resizable size pos scnsize 3 2 figx 2 scnsize 4 2 figy 2 figx figy set groot Units su Restore default root screen units The Open menu option only opens figures created by listmaster m Every List Master figure has its Tag set to lmfigtag When the program opens a F
307. pot data in the table Compute the Data Statistics The Opening Function retrieves the preloaded data from the data table and calls the local function setStats to compute population statistics and then returns them The data_table CellSelectionCallback performs the same action when you select more than 10 rows of the data table The only difference between these two calls is what input data is provided and what column of the Data Statistics table is computed Here is the setStats function function stats setStats table stats col peak Computes basic statistics for data table table The data to summarize a population or selection stats Array of statistics to update col Which column of the array to update peak Value for the peak period computed externally X X X X P stats 1 col size table 1 Number of rows 9 37 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 38 stats 2 col min table 2 stats 3 col max table 2 stats 4 col mean table 2 stats 5 col median table 2 stats 6 col std table 2 stats 7 col table 1 1 First row stats 8 col table end 1 Last row if isempty peak stats 9 col peak Peak period from FFT end Note When assigning data to a uitable use a cell array as shown in the code for setStats You can assign data that you retrieve from a uitable to a numeric array however only if it is entirely numeric Storing uitable data in cell arrays enables tables to hold num
308. priate short message Here are the try and catch blocks from the callback function t_input_Callback hObject eventdata handles Disable the Plot button until proven innocent set handles plot_button Enable off try t eval get handles t_input String if isnumeric t t is not a number set handles plot_button String t is not numeric elseif length t lt 2 t is not a vector set handles plot_button String t must be vector elseif length t gt 1000 t is too long a vector to plot clearly set handles plot_button String t is too long elseif min diff t lt 0 t is not monotonically increasing set handles plot_button String t must increase else All OK Enable the Plot button with its original name set handles plot_button String Plot set handles plot_button Enable on return end Found an input error other than a bad expression Give the edit text box focus so user can correct the error uicontrol hObject catch EM Cannot evaluate expression user typed set handles plot_button String Cannot plot t Give the edit text box focus so user can correct the error uicontrol hObject end 9 25 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls The edit text callbacks execute when you enter text in an edit field and press Return or click elsewhere in the UI Even if you immediately click the Plot button the edit text callback executes before the plot button callback activates When a cal
309. py the example code and display the example code files in the Editor by executing these MATLAB commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples axesMenuToolbar m fileattrib axesMenuToolbar m w copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples iconRead m fileattrib iconRead m w edit axesMenuToolbar m edit iconRead m Generate the Graphing Commands and Data The program file axesMenuToolbar m defines two variables mOutputArgs and mPlotTypes mOutputArgs is a cell array that holds output values that are optionally returned by the function mOutputArgs 14 3 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 4 mPlotTypes is a 5 by 2 cell array that specifies graphing functions and data The first column contains the strings that are used to populate the pop up menu The second column contains functions anonymous functions for creating the plots mPlotTypes Example plot types shownI plot rand 5 a plot a rand 5 plot sin 1 0 01 25 a plot a sin 1 0 01 25 par 1 5 10 a bar a 1 5 10 plot membrane a plot a membrane surf peaks a surf a peaks Because these variables are created in the main function they are accessible from within the nested callback functions in the same file Create the UI and Its Components Like the mOutputArgs and mPlotTypes variables the UI compo
310. r uicontrol Parent hfig Style slider Units normalized es Position 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 1 Tag Sladert saa Callback slider_callback button uicontrol Parent hfig Style pushbutton Units normalized 12 7 12 Manage Application Defined Data 12 8 Position 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 String Display Values Callback button_callback end function slider_callback hObject eventdata data guidata hObject data val hObject Value data diffMax hObject Max data val guidata hObject data end function button_callback hObject eventdata data guidata hObject display data val data diffMax end When the user moves the slider the slider_callback function calls guidata to retrieve a copy of the stored struct array The next two lines of code modify the struct array The last line in the function replaces the stored struct array with the modified copy When the end users clicks the push button the button_callback function calls guidata to retrieve a copy of the stored struct array Then it displays the two values stored in the array Use guidata in a GUIDE UI GUIDE uses guidata to store a struct array called handles which contains all the UI components MATLAB passes the hand1es array to every callback function If you want to use guidata to share additional data then add fields to the handles structure in the OpeningFcn callback To mo
311. r to move a sliding bar which is called a slider or thumb Users move the slider by clicking the slider and dragging it by clicking in the trough or by clicking an arrow The location of the slider indicates the relative location within the specified range Radio Button Radio buttons are similar to check boxes but radio buttons on page 6 29 are typically mutually exclusive within a group of related radio buttons That is when you select one button the previously selected button is deselected To activate a radio button click the mouse button on the object The display indicates the state of the button Use a button group to manage mutually exclusive radio buttons Check Box on M Check boxes can generate an action when checked and page 6 31 indicate their state as checked or not checked Check boxes are useful when providing the user with a number of independent choices for example displaying a toolbar Edit Text on feoir Edit text components are fields that enable users to enter page 6 32 or modify text strings Use edit text when you want text as input Users can enter numbers but you must convert them to their numeric equivalents Static Text on Tit Static text controls display lines of text Static text is page 6 34 typically used to label other controls provide directions to the user or indicate values associated with a slider Users cannot change static text interactively Pop Up Menu G Pop
312. re shows the Position property for multiple components of the same size E Inspector Multiple objects selec ojaj 3 z 4 PiE Position Multi a x Multi C y Multi CA width Multi height 2 1538461538461 Change the value of x to align their left sides Change the value of y to align their bottom edges For example setting x to 2 0 aligns the left sides of the components 2 inches from the left side of the window When the components are aligned change the Units property back to its original setting Grid and Rulers The layout area displays a grid and rulers to facilitate component layout Grid lines are spaced at 50 pixel intervals by default and you can select from a number of other values 6 85 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 86 ranging from 10 to 200 pixels You can optionally enable snap to grid which causes any object that is moved close to a grid line to jump to that line Snap to grid works with or without a visible grid P A Grid and Rule V Show guides v Show grid Grid Size in Pixels 50 v Snap to grid Use the Grid and Rulers dialog select Tools gt Grid and Rulers to Control visibility of rulers grid and guide lines Set the grid spacing Enable or disable snap to grid Guide Lines The Layout Editor has both vertical and horizontal snap to guide lines Components snap to the line when you move them close to the line Guid
313. re turned on or off When you click a toggle button it appears depressed showing that it is on When you release the mouse button the toggle button remains depressed until you click it a second time When you do so the button returns to the raised state showing that it is off Use a button group to manage mutually exclusive radio buttons Toolbar Buttons uitoolbar uitoggletool uipushtool Non modal UIs can display toolbars which can contain push buttons and toggle buttons identified by custom icons and tooltips Components are sometimes referred to by the name of the function used to create them For example a push button is created using the uicontrol function and it is sometimes referred to as a uicontrol A panel is created using the uipanel function and may be referred to as a uipanel Add Components to a Programmatic UI Add Components to a Programmatic UI In this section User Interface Controls on page 10 9 Tables on page 10 21 Panels on page 10 22 Button Groups on page 10 24 Axes on page 10 26 ActiveX Controls on page 10 28 How to Set Font Characteristics on page 10 28 User interface controls are common UI components such as buttons check boxes and sliders Tables present data in rows and columns Panels and button groups are containers in which you can group together related elements in your UI ActiveX components enable y
314. reating a UI programmatically without GUIDE then you can adapt the example code into your code To adapt an example into your code omit the third input argument handles from the function definition Also replace any references to the handles array with the appropriate object handle To associate the callback function with the component set the component s callback property to be a handle to the callback function For example this command creates a push button component and sets the Callback property to be a handle to the function pushbutton1_ callback pb uicontrol Style pushbutton Callback pushbutton1 Callback Push Button This code is an example of a push button callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the push button Callback property to make it execute when the end user clicks on the push button function pushbutton1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to pushbutton1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA display Goodbye close gcf The first line of code display Goodbye displays the string Goodbye in the Command Window The next line gets a handle to the UI window using gcf and then closes it Toggle Button This code is an example of an example of a toggle button callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the toggle button Callback proper
315. references Executes during object deletion before destroying properties unction figure1_DeleteFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to figure1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X P h P Some callbacks are added automatically because their associated components are part of the original GUIDE template that you chose Other commonly used callbacks are added automatically when you add components You can also add callbacks explicitly by selecting them from View gt View Callbacks menu or on the component s context menu If you deselect this preference GUIDE includes comments only for callbacks that are automatically included to support the original GUIDE template GUIDE does not include comments for callbacks subsequently added to the code See Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow for more information about callbacks and about the arguments described in the preceding comments 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options GUIDE Options 5 8 In this section The GUI Options Dialog Box on page 5 8 Resize Behavior on page 5 9 Command Line Accessibility on page 5 9 Generate FIG File and MATLAB File on page 5 10 Generate FIG File Only on page 5 12 The GUI Options Dialog Box Access the dialog box from the GUIDE Layout Editor by selecting Tools gt GUI Options The options yo
316. res the structure in the handles structure Updates the list box String to lst the most recent run Here is the Simulate and store results button callback function SimulateButton_Callback hObject eventdata handles timeVector stateVector outputVector sim f14 Retrieve old results data structure if isfield handles ResultsData amp isempty handles ResultsData ResultsData handles ResultsData Determine the maximum run number currently used maxNum ResultsData length ResultsData RunNumber ResultNum maxNum 1 else Set up the results data structure ResultsData struct RunName RunNumber KiValue KfValue timeVector outputVector ResultNum 1 end if isequal ResultNum 1 Enable the Plot and Remove buttons set handles RemoveButton handles PlotButton Enable on end Get Ki and Kf values to store with the data and put in the results list Ki get handles KiValueSlider Value Kf get handles KfValueSlider Value ResultsData ResultNum RunName Run num2str ResultNum J ResultsData ResultNum RunNumber ResultNum ResultsData ResultNum KiValue Ki ResultsData ResultNum KfValue Kf ResultsData ResultNum timeVector timeVector ResultsData ResultNum outputVector outputVector Build the new results list string for the listbox ResultsStr get handles ResultsList String if isequal ResultNum 1 ResultsStr
317. reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA varargin command line arguments to simple_gui see VARARGIN X X P P P oe Choose default command line output for simple gui handles output hObject Update handles structure guidata hObject handles UIWAIT makes simple gui wait for user response see UIRESUME uiwait handles figure1 Create data to plot by adding the following code to the opening function immediately after the comment that begins varargin Create the data to plot handles peaks peaks 35 handles membrane membrane x y meshgrid 8 5 8 r sqrt x 2t y 2 eps sinc sin r r 2 17 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE 2 18 handles sinc sinc Set the current data value handles current_data handles peaks surf handles current_data The first six executable lines create the data using the MATLAB functions peaks membrane and sinc They store the data in the handles structure an argument provided to all callbacks Callbacks for the push buttons can retrieve the data from the handles structure The last two lines create a current data value and set it to peaks and then display the surf plot for peaks The following figure shows how the UI looks when it first displays E simple gui k do sut 10 Select Data 10 40 40 20 20 Peaks v Code Pop Up Menu Behavior The po
318. roperty as long as it is not in conflict with the figure s WindowStyle property Note Modal dialogs figures with the WindowStyle property set to modal cannot have menu bars toolbars or docking controls For more information see the DockControls MenuBar ToolBar and WindowStyle property descriptions on the Figure Properties page 10 69 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 70 Menu Bar Menu The following statements create a menu bar menu with two menu items mh uimenu fh Label My menu ehi uimenu mh Label Item 1 eh2 uimenu mh Label Item 2 Checked on fh is the handle of the parent figure mh is the handle of the parent menu The Label property specifies the text that appears in the menu The Checked property specifies that this item is displayed with a check next to it when the menu is created If your UI displays the standard menu bar the new menu is added to it A Figure 1 Et xs File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help Mymenu DGasSs k AARC L 2 0H ao If your UI does not display the standard menu bar MATLAB creates a menu bar if none exists and then adds the menu to it Create Menus for Programmatic Uls QOGaS b AAG9eCc a 08 ao This command adds a separator line preceding the second menu item eh2 Separator on 10 71 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 72 The following statements add two menu sub
319. rty flag of the figure to true or false Lists of Items in a Programmatic UI setappdata fh Dirty yes_no Also disable or enable the File gt Save item according to yes_no saveitem findobj fh Label Save if yes_no if isgraphics saveitem saveitem Enable on end else if isgraphics saveitem saveitem Enable off end end The isguidirty function queries the application data with getappdata to determine whether the figure needs to be saved in response to closing the window Add an Import from File Option to List Master If you want to round out List Master s capabilities try activating the File gt Import list gt from file menu item You can add this feature yourself by removing comments from lines 106 108 enabling a File gt Import list gt from file menu item and adding your own code to the callback For related code that you can use as a starting point see the Imfileexport callback for File gt Export list gt to file Add a Rename List Option to List Master When you import data to a list you replace the entire contents of the list with the imported text If the content of the new list is very different you might want to give a new name to the list The list name appears above the list box Consider adding a menu item or context menu item such as Rename list The callback for this item might perform these tasks e Call 1lm_get_list_name to get a name from the user perhaps after mo
320. s the two objects displayed in it and two hgtransform objects that affect the rotation of the globe The globe is a surfaceplot generated by surface The geographic graticule lines of latitude and longitude also a surfaceplot object generated by a call to mesh Data for these two objects are rectangular x y z grids generated by the sphere function The globe s grid is 50 by 50 and the graticule grid is 8 by 15 Every other row of the 15 by 15 grid returned by sphere is removed to equalize its North South and East West spans when viewed on the globe The axes x y and z limits are set to 1 02 1 02 Because the graphic objects are unit spheres this leaves a little space around them while constraining all three axes to remain the same relative and absolute size The graticule grid is also enlarged by 2 which is barely enough to prevent the opaque texture mapped surface of the globe from obscuring the graticule If you watch carefully you can sometimes see missing pieces of graticule edges as the globe spins Texture and Color the Globe Code in the axes1_CreateFcn sets the CData for the globe to the 180 by 360 one degree topo terrain grid by setting its FaceColor property to texturemap You can use any image or grid to texture a surface Specify surface properties as a struct containing one element per property that you must set as follows props FaceColor texture props EdgeColor none props FaceLighting
321. s Contact_Phone String Overall UI Characteristics The UI window is nonblocking and nonmodal because it is designed to be displayed while you perform other MATLAB tasks There are various options which you can view by selecting Tools gt GUI Options in GUIDE Resize behavior Other Use SizeChangedFcn This sets the figure s SizeChangedFcn property to hObject eventdata address book Address_ Book_SizeChangedFcn hObject eventdata guidata hObject Command line accessibility Off Generate FIG file and MATLAB file selected Generate callback function prototypes selected GUI allows only one instance to run singleton selected Window Resize Behavior When you resize the UI MATLAB calls the SizeChangedF cn callback In this case the name of the SizeChangedFcn callback is Address _Book_SizeChangedFcn The SizeChangedFcn callback enables you to make the UI window wider so it can accommodate long names and numbers However you cannot make the UI window narrower than its original width and you cannot change the height These restrictions simplify the callback which must maintain the proper proportions between the figure size and the components in the UI 9 17 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 18 When the you resize the window and release the mouse the SizeChangedF cn callback executes Unless you have maximized the figure the SizeChangedF cn callback enforces the height of the window and resets the
322. s an important function of almost any UI that performs computations This UI code validates these inputs e Ensure all three inputs are positive or negative real numbers Ensures that the t time input is a vector that increases monotonically and is not too long to display Validate all three inputs are positive or negative real numbers In this example each edit text control callback validates its input If the input fails validation the callback disables the Plot button changes its String to indicate the type of problem encountered and restores focus to the edit text control highlighting the erroneous input When you enter a valid value the Plot button reenables with its String set back to Plot This approach prevents plotting errors and avoids the need for an error dialog box The str2doubl1e function validates most cases returning NaN Not a Number for nonnumeric or nonscalar string expressions An additional test using the isreal function makes sure that a text edit field does not contain a complex number such as 4 21 The f1_input_Callback contains the following code to validate input for f1 function f1_input_Callback hObject eventdata handles Validate that the text in the f1 field converts to a real number fi str2double get hObject String if isnan f1 isreal f1 isdouble returns NaN for non numbers and f1 cannot be complex Disable the Plot button and change its string to say why set handles plot_bu
323. s by setting the DockControls property You might not need menus for your UI but if you want the user to be able to dock or undock the UI it must contain a menu bar or a toolbar This is because docking is controlled by the docking icon a small curved arrow near the upper right corner of the menu bar or the toolbar as the following illustration shows Create Menus for Programmatic Uls Figure windows with a standard menu bar also have a Desktop menu from which the user can dock and undock them To display the docking arrow and the Desktop gt Dock Figure menu item the figure property DockControls must be set to on You can set this property in the Property Inspector In addition the MenuBar and or ToolBar figure properties must be set to on to display docking controls The WindowStyle figure property also affects docking behavior The default is normal but if you change it to docked then the following applies The UI opens docked in the desktop when you run it The DockControls property is set to on and cannot be turned off until WindowStyle is no longer set to docked Ifyou undock a UI created with WindowStyle set to docked the window will have not have a docking arrow unless the figure displays a menu bar or a toolbar When the window has no docking arrow users can undock it from the desktop but will be unable to redock it To summarize you can display docking controls with the DockControls p
324. s callback can be interrupted at the next occurrence of one of these commands drawnow figure getframe waitfor or pause Interrupt Callback Execution Ifthe running callback contains one of these commands then MATLAB stops the execution of the running callback and executes the interrupting callback MATLAB resumes executing the running callback when the interrupting callback completes Ifthe running callback does not contain one of these commands then MATLAB finishes executing the callback without interruption For more details about the interruptible property and its effects see the Interruptible property description on the Uicontrol Properties page Example This example shows how to control callback interruption using the Interruptible and BusyAction properties Copy the Source File 1 In MATLAB set your current folder to one in which you have write access 2 Execute this MATLAB command copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples callback_interrupt m fileattrib callback_interrupt m tw 5 Run the Example Code Execute the command callback_interrupt The program displays two windows 13 3 13 Manage Callback Execution 13 4 Figure 1 o a 1 Click a button to generate a waitbar DS EEA 2 Click a button to try and interrupt 1 the waitbar 0 8 0 6 Mesh Plot cancel 0 4 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 Clicking specific pairs of bu
325. s figures inaccessible from the UI Create Two Context Menus To create the two context menus from the GUIDE Tools menu select the Menu Editor After you create the two context menus attach one to the each axes axes1 and axes2 In the Menu Editor for each menu Click the Context Menus tab to select the type of menu you are creating Click the New Context Menu icon El This creates a context menu in the Menu Editor workspace called untitled It has no menu items and is not attached to any UI object yet Select the new menu and in the Tag edit field in the Menu Properties panel type plot_axes1 Click the New Menu Item icon A menu item is displayed underneath the plot_axes1 item in the Menu Editor workspace In the Menu Properties panel type Open plot in new window for Label and plot_ax1 for Tag Do not set anything else for this item Repeat the last four steps to create a second context menu 9 43 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 44 Make the Tag for the menu plot_axes2 Create a menu item under it and make its Label Open plot in new window and assign it a Tag of plot_ax2 7 Click OK to save your menus and exit the Menu Editor For more information about using the Menu Editor see Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 Attach Context Menus to Axes Add the context menus you just created to the axes 1 Inthe GUIDE Layout Editor double click axes1 the top axes in the upper right corner to open
326. s in the following statement txtbox uicontrol f Style edit String Enter your name and address here Max 2 Min O Position 30 20 130 80 r Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DSGAsSs k AAVDEA a Enter your name and address here If the value of Max Min is less than or equal to 1 the editable text field allows only a single line of input If the width of the text field is too narrow for the string MATLAB displays only part of the string The user can use the arrow keys to move the cursor over the entire string 10 17 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul OSGAESs F AERG90EL A2 0H Enter your na Pop Up Menu This code creates a pop up menu f figure pm uicontrol f Style popupmenu String one two three four Value 1 Position 30 80 130 20 OGESs AREG90E4 4 0 10 18 Add Components to a Programmatic UI The first Uicontrol argument f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group The name value pair arguments Style popupmenu specify the uicontrol to be a pop up menu String one two three four defines the menu items Value 1 sets the index of the item that is selected by default Set Value to a scalar that indicates the index of t
327. s means the figure is also hidden from the plot and legend commands Follow these steps to plot into a hidden figure 1 Save the figure object when you create it 2 Create an axes set its Parent property to the figure object and save the axes object 3 Create the plot which is one or more line objects save these line objects and set their Parent properties to the handle of the axes 4 Make the figure visible Plot Button Callback Listing Here is the Plot button callback function PlotButton_Callback hObject eventdata handles currentVal get handles ResultsList Value Get data to plot and generate command string with color specified legendStr cell length currentVal 1 plotColor b g r c m y k for ctVal 1 length currentVal PlotData ctVal 3 2 handles ResultsData currentVal ctVal timeVector PlotData ctVal 3 1 handles ResultsData currentVal ctVal outputVector numColor ctVal 7 floor ctVal 1 7 PlotData ctVal 3 plotColor numColor legendStr ctVal handles ResultsData currentVal ctVal RunName Kf num2str handles ResultsData currentVal ctVal KfValue 9 65 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 66 pRB yas num2str handles ResultsData currentVal ctVal KiValue nd If necessary create the plot figure and store in handles structure if isfield handles PlotFigure ishandle handles PlotFigure handles PlotFigure
328. s them into sel For example if the user selects all three columns in row 3 of the table then eventdata Indices 3x2 double sel 3 1 3 2 3 3 If the user selects rows 5 6 and 7 of columns 2 and 3 then eventdata Indices 6x2 double sel NOOO NONON N w After hiding all the markers the callback performs these tasks Identifies the unique columns that the user selected Iterates over the unique columns to find the row indices for the selection Sets the x values for all row indices that do not appear in the selection to empty hondD Uses the vector of x values to copy y values from the table and specify dummy z values 14 17 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 18 Setting the z values ensures that the markers plot on top of the lines Assigns x y and z values to the XData YData and ZData of each vector of markers and makes the markers visible again Only markers with nonempty data display The Plot Check Box callback The three Plot check boxes all share the same callback plot_callback It hasa column argument in addition to the standard hObject and eventdata parameters The column argument identifies which box and column of data the callback is for The plot_callback also uses handles found in the function workspace for the following purposes htable To fetch table data and column names for plotting the data and deleting lines the column argument ident
329. s to search for mlappinstall files Use the Tags property to add custom searchable text to the file For information on creating an app installer file for an app you created see Package Apps 16 9 16 Packaging GUls as Apps Dependency Analysis 16 10 When you create an app package MATLAB analyzes your main file and attempts to include all the MATLAB files that it uses in the app package However MATLAB does not guarantee to find every dependent file MATLAB does not find files for functions that your code references as strings for instance as arguments to eval feval and callback functions In addition MATLAB can include some files that the main file never calls when it runs Dependency analysis searches for executable files such as e MATLAB files lt P files fig files MEX files Dependency analysis does not search for data image or other binary files such as Java classes and jar files Add such files manually when you package your app The Package Apps dialog box provides an option for doing so
330. same name These two files usually reside in the same folder and correspond to the tasks of laying out and programming the UI When you lay out the UI in the Layout Editor your components and layout is stored in the FIG file When you program the UI your code is stored in the corresponding code file If your UI includes ActiveX components GUIDE also generates a file for each ActiveX component For more information about FIG files and code files see Save a GUIDE UI UI Code File Structure The UI code file that GUIDE generates is a function file The name of the main function is the same as the name of the code file For example if the name of the code file is Files Generated by GUIDE mygui m then the name of the main function is mygui Each callback in the file is a local function of that main function When GUIDE generates a code file it automatically includes templates for the most commonly used callbacks for each component The code file also contains initialization code as well as an opening function callback and an output function callback It is your job to add code to the component callbacks for your program to work as you want You can also add code to the opening function callback and the output function callback The UI code file orders functions as shown in the following table Section Description Comments Displayed at the command line in response to the help command Initialization GUIDE in
331. sections You can help to maintain the structure by adding comments that name the sections when you first create them 1 Comments displayed in response to the MATLAB help command 2 Initialization tasks such as data creation and any processing that is needed to construct the components See Initialize a Programmatic UI on page 11 2 for more information 3 Construction of figure and components For more information see Create Figures for Programmatic UIs on page 10 4 and Add Components to a Programmatic UI on page 10 9 4 Initialization tasks that require the components to exist and output return See Initialize a Programmatic UI on page 11 2 for more information 5 Callbacks for the components Callbacks are the routines that execute in response to user generated events such as mouse clicks and key strokes See Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow on page 11 5 for more information 6 Utility functions File Template This is a template you can use to create a UI code file function varargout myui varargin MYUI Brief description of program Comments displayed at the command line in response to the help command Q Leave a blank line following the help Structure of Programmatic Ul Code Files oe Initialization tasks oe Construct the components oe Initialization tasks oe Callbacks for MYUI oe Utility functions for MYUI end Save the fil
332. served to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA Hints contents cellstr get hObject String returns contents contents get hObject Value returns selected item from listbox1 items get hObject String index_selected get hObject Value item_selected items index_selected display item_selected X X X X P When the end user selects an item in the list box the callback function performs the following tasks Gets all the items in the list box and stores them in the variable items 8 17 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 18 Gets the numeric index of the selected item and stores it in the variable index_selected Gets the string value of the selected item and stores it in the variable item_selected Displays the selected item in the MATLAB Command Window The example Interactive List Box in a GUIDE UI on page 9 46 shows how to populate a list box with directory names Pop Up Menu Populate Items in the Pop Up Menu If you are developing a UI using GUIDE use the pop up menu CreateFcn callback to add items to the pop up menu This code is an example of a pop up menu CreateFcn callback that populates the menu with the items Red Green and Blue function popupmenul CreateFcn hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to popupmenu1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles empty
333. ses it or by selecting it in the Object Browser Such a component is visible in the active UI See View the GUIDE Object Hierarchy on page 6 119 for information about the Object Browser Note You can select multiple components only if they have the same parent To determine the child objects of a figure panel or button group use the Object Browser Copy Paste and Arrange Components Copy Cut and Clear Components Use standard menu and pop up menu commands toolbar icons keyboard keys and shortcut keys to copy cut and clear components Copy Copying places a copy of the selected components on the clipboard A copy of a panel or button group includes its children Cut Cutting places a copy of the selected components on the clipboard and deletes them from the layout area If you cut a panel or button group you also cut its children Clear Clearing deletes the selected components from the layout area It does not place a copy of the components on the clipboard If you clear a panel or button group you also clear its children Paste and Duplicate Components Paste Use standard menu and pop up menu commands toolbar icons and shortcut keys to paste components GUIDE pastes the contents of the clipboard to the location of the last mouse click It positions the upper left corner of the contents at the mouse click Consecutive pastes place each copy to the lower right of the last one Duplicate Select o
334. shown in the following figure The highlight indicates that if you drop the component or click the cursor the component will be a child of the highlighted panel button group or figure Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area n Edit View Layout Tools Help OG 428 4Bbs OS gt k Rises ace Slider A Radio Button M Check Box 3 EF Edit Text Highlight gt FF EdtTet Pop up Menu Ell Listbox i EE Toggle Button E Table Lias Panel 8 Button Group X ActiveX Control m Tag uipanell Current Point 221 263 Position 141 69 219 251 Note Assign a unique identifier to each component in your panel or button group by setting the value of its Tag property See Assign an Identifier to Each Component on page 6 23 for more information 6 21 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 22 Include Existing Components in Panels and Button Groups When you add a new component or drag an existing component to a panel or button group it will become a member or child of the panel or button group automatically whether fully or partially enclosed by it However if the component is not entirely contained in the panel or button group it appears to be clipped in the Layout Editor When you run the program the entire component is displayed and straddles the panel or button group border The component is nevertheless a child of the panel and be
335. sion of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA Q 6 a 6 end If you save this UI with the name myui then GUIDE sets the push button s Callback property to the following value hObject eventdata myui pushbutton1 Callback hObject eventdata guidata hObject This is an anonymous function that serves as a reference to the function pushbutton1 Callback This anonymous function has four input arguments The first argument is a string containing the name of the callback function The last three arguments are provided by Handle Graphics and are discussed in the section GUIDE Callback Syntax on page 8 5 Note GUIDE does not automatically generate callback functions for other UI components such as tables panels or button groups If you want any of these components to execute a callback function then you must create the callback by right clicking on the component in the layout and selecting an item under View Callbacks in the context menu Write Callbacks Using the GUIDE Workflow GUIDE Callback Syntax All callbacks must accept at least three input arguments e hObject Handle to the UI component that triggered the callback e eventdata A variable that contains detailed information about specific mouse or keyboard actions handles A struct that contains handles to all the objects in the UI GUIDE uses the guidata function to store and maintain this structure For
336. splayed in units of pixels regardless of the coordinate units you select for the component The Current Point readout displays the current mouse position in pixels The size of this push button is 101 by 38 pixels The lower left corner of the button is located at x y 50 260 The mouse pointer is located at x y 156 255 Locate and Move Components A untitled fig Hel File Edit View Layout Tools Help DNEH BA ICC BEA HEY Push Button a Slider Radio Button M Check Box kof Edit Text 298 246 198 TT Static Text 3 Pop up Menu El Listbox Toggle Button E Table iv Axes 73 Panel 146 98 48 z3 Button Group _EX ActiveX Control 7 Tag pushbutton1 Current Point 156 255 Position 50 260 101 38 When you select multiple components the Position readout displays numbers for x y width and height only if the objects have the same respective values in all other cases it displays MULTI Drag Components Select one or more components that you want to move then drag them to the desired position and drop them You can move components from the figure into a panel or button group You can move components from a panel or button group into the figure or into another panel or button group The position of the cursor when you drop the components also determines the parent of all t
337. ssign the Position property to that value ans object_handle Position 15 2500 333 0000 106 0000 20 0000 10 41 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 42 Tip Instead of using a separate set command after you decide upon a position for the object you can modify the statement in your code file that creates the object to include the Position parameter and value To position components systematically you can create a function to manage the process Here is a simple example function called editpos function rect editpos handle Enters plot edit mode pauses to let user manipulate objects then turns the mode off It does not track what user does User later needs to output a Position property if changed if ishghandle handle disp E gbt_moveobj Invalid handle inputname 1 return end plotedit handle on disp Select move and resize object Use mouse and arrow keys disp When you are finished press Return to continue pause rect handle Position inspect handle To experiment with the function enter the following code in the Command Window hfig figure hsl uicontrol Style slider editpos hs1 After you call editpos the following prompt appears Select move and resize the object Use mouse and arrow keys When you are finished press Return to continue When you first enter plot edit mode the selection is figure itself Click the slider to select i
338. st before the UI is made visible to the user but after all the components have been created i e after the components CreateFcn callbacks if any have been run You can use the opening function to perform your initialization tasks before the user has access to the UI For example you can use it to create data or to read data from an external source MATLAB passes any command line arguments to the opening function Function Naming and Template GUIDE names the opening function by appending OpeningFcn to the name of the UI This is an example of an opening function template as it might appear in the myui code file Executes just before myui is made visible unction myui_OpeningFcn hObject eventdata handles varargin This function has no output args see OutputFcn hObject handle to figure eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA varargin command line arguments to myui see VARARGIN XP X V P P h oe Choose default command line output for myui handles output hObject Update handles structure guidata hObject handles UIWAIT makes myui wait for user response see UIRESUME uiwait handles myui Input Arguments The opening function has four input arguments hObject eventdata handles and varargin The first three are the same as described in GUIDE Callback Syntax on page 8 5 the last argument varargin enables y
339. stead of waiting for the end user to trigger the callback This behavior helps you to find problems in your code before the end user encounters them Note If you want to use an existing function that does not support the hObject and callbackdata arguments then you can specify it as an anonymous function For example uicontrol Style slider Callback hObject callbackdata myfunction x In this case X is an input argument to the function myfunction See Anonymous Functions for more information Specify a Cell Array Use a cell array to specify a callback function that accepts input arguments that you want to use in the function The first element in the cell array is a function handle The other elements in the cell array are the input arguments to the function separated by commas For example this code creates a push button component and specifies its callback to be a cell array containing the function handle pushbutton_callback and one input argument myvar To see how it works copy and paste this code into an editor and run it function myui myvar 5 figure uicontrol Style pushbutton Callback pushbutton_callback myvar end function pushbutton_callback hObject callbackdata x display x end The function definition must define two input arguments hObject and callbackdata followed by any additional arguments the function uses Handle Graphics automatically passes the hObject an
340. systems e g the standard shade of gray on the PC differs from that on UNIX system and may not match the default UI background color You can make the UI background color match the default component background color This code gets the default component background color and assign it to the figure defaultBackground get groot defaultUicontrolBackgroundColor fh Color defaultBackground Code a Programmatic UI Initialize a Programmatic UI on page 11 2 Write Callbacks Using the Programmatic Workflow on page 11 5 11 codea Programmatic Ul Initialize a Programmatic Ul 11 2 Programs that present a UI might perform these tasks when you launch them Define default values Set UI component property values e Process input arguments Hide the figure window until all the components are created When you develop a UI consider grouping these tasks together in your code file If an initialization task involves several steps consider creating a separate function for that task Examples Declare Variables for Input and Output Arguments These are typical declarations for input and output arguments mInputArgs varargin Command line arguments mOutputArgs Variable for storing output See the varargin reference page for more information Define Custom Property Value Pairs This example defines the properties in a cell array mPropertyDefs and then initializes the properties mPropert
341. t myui_OutputFcn hObject eventdata handles varargout cell array for returning output args see VARARGOUT hObject handle to figure eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA P X P P oe Get default command line output from handles structure varargout 1 handles output Input Arguments The output function has three input arguments hObject eventdata and handles They are the same as described in GUIDE Callback Syntax on page 8 5 Output Arguments The output function has one output argument varargout which it returns to the command line By default the output function assigns handles output to varargout You can change the output by taking one of these actions Change the value of handles output It can be any valid MATLAB value including a structure or cell array Add output arguments to varargout The varargout argument is a cell array It can contain any number of output arguments By default GUIDE creates just one output argument handles output To create an additional output argument create a new field in the handles structure and add it to varargout using a command similar to varargout 2 handles second_output Callbacks for Specific Components Callbacks for Specific Components Coding the behavior of a UI component involves specific tasks that are unique to the type of component you are working wit
342. t eventdata handles varargin Choose default command line output for address_book handles output hObject Make figure non dockable set hObject DockControls off set hObject WindowStyle normal set hObject HandleVisibility callback Update handles structure guidata hObject handles if nargin lt 4 Load the default address book Check_And_Load handles If first element in varargin is book and the second element is a MATLAB file then load that file elseif length varargin 2 amp amp UI That Uses Persistent Data streompi varargin 1 book amp amp 2 exist varargin 2 file Check_And_Load varargin 2 handles else errordlg File Not Found File Load Error set handles Contact_Name String set handles Contact_Phone String end MAT file Validation To be a valid address book the MAT file must contain a structure called Addresses that has two fields called Name and Phone The Check_And_Load on page 9 9 function in address_book m validates and loads the data as follows Loads the specified file or the default if no file is specified Determines if the MAT file is a valid address book Displays the data if it is valid If the data is not valid displays an error dialog box errordlg Returns 1 for valid MAT files and 0 if invalid used by the Open menu callback Saves the following items in the handles struc
343. t Tile as shown in this figure 6 41 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help SHSAT a Specify the toggle button label by setting its String property to the desired label in this case Left Right Tile Position 20 20 60 20 SliderStep 1x2 double array Style togglebutton To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as a label prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove The toggle button accommodates only a single line of text If you specify more than one line only the first line is shown If you create a toggle button that is too narrow to accommodate the specified String MATLAB software truncates the string with an ellipsis 6 42 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Create the toggle button with the button selected depressed by setting its Value property to the value of its Max property default is 1 Set Value to Min default is 0 to leave the toggle button unselected raised Correspondingly when the user selects the toggle button MATLAB software sets Value to Max and to Min when the user deselects it The following figure shows the toggle button in the depressed position Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help DOGAs k AAEV9RRA a
344. t View Layout Tools Help DGE 4eOre s4B hd RSP 50 150 zoo 250 300 OBE Ea a 5 eoit DA jan GLIE 4 Tag figurel Current Point 321 209 Position 520 373 565 427 The UI includes three uipanels that you can barely see in this figure because they are entirely black Using uipanels helps the graphic functions work more efficiently The axes CreateFcn axes1_CreateFcn initializes the graphic objects It executes once no matter how many times the UI is opened The Spin button s callback Spinstopbutton_ Callback which contains a while loop for rotating the spherical surface conducts the animation 9 70 Animation with Slider Controls in GUIDE The two sliders allow you to change light direction during animation and function independently but they query one another s value because both parameters are needed to specify a view The Show grid check box toggles the Visible property of the graticule surface object The axesi_CreateFcn initializes the graticule and then hides it until you select this option The Spin button s callback reads the Make movie check box value to accumulate movie frames and saves the movie to a MAT file when rotation is stopped or after one full revolution whichever comes first You must select Make movie before spinning the globe The Property Inspector was used to customize the uicontrols and text by Se
345. t a time via the edit text box It also means you cannot copy the entire list and then paste it into another document You can save the entire contents of a list to a text file using File gt Export list gt to file That menu item s callback lmfileexport opens a standard file dialog to navigate to a folder and specify a file name Then lmfileexport calls fopen fprintf and fclose to create write and close the file Save the UI You do not need to export a list to save it The Save and Save as menu options save lists by saving the entire UI They call the saveas function to write the figure and all its contents as a FIG file to disk You can reopen the saved UI by double clicking it in the Current Folder browser or by calling hgload figfilename fig from the Command Line 14 25 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 26 Program List Master The List Master UI code file contains 22 functions organized into five groups which are described below List Master Main Program The main function listmaster opens a figure window Then listmaster calls the local function 1m_make_file_menu to create the File menu The following table describes the menu items and lists their callbacks Menu Item How Used Callback Open Opens an existing List Master figure lmopen New Creates a List Master by adding controls lmnew to the initial UI or to a new figure if the existing one already contains a list Im
346. t and reposition it For example move it to the right side of the figure and orient it vertically as shown in the following figure Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively m Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help g hs AA039e r E Use Plot Edit Mode to Change Properties After you select an object in plot edit mode you can open the Property Inspector to view and modify any of its properties While the object is selected in the Command Window type inspect You also can use the functional form to pass in the handle of the object you want to inspect for example inspect hs1 The Property Inspector opens displaying the object properties You can edit as well as read property values and the component updates immediately To see a definition of any property right click the name or value in the Property Inspector and click the What s This menu item that appears A context sensitive help window opens displaying the definition of the property 10 43 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul FontSize FontUnits FontWeight ForegroundColor gt HandleVisibility on vette _Whats thst Interruptible lon KeyPressFcn KeyReleaseFcn expand all gt String Text to display string cell array of char values pipe delimited row vector padded column matrix v HorizontalAlignment Alignment of uicontrol text center default left right A
347. t strings Use an 10 16 edit text when you want text as input Users can enter numbers but you must convert them to their numeric equivalents List Box on page uicontrol List boxes display a list of items and enable 10 19 users to select one or more items Panels on page uipanel Panels arrange UI components into groups By visually grouping related controls panels can make the user interface easier to understand A panel can have a title and various borders Panel children can be user interface controls and axes as well as button groups and other Programmatic Components Component Function Description panels The position of each component within a panel is interpreted relative to the panel If you move the panel its children move with it and maintain their positions on the panel Pop Up Menu on page 10 18 uicontrol Pop up menus open to display a list of choices when users click the arrow Push Button on page 10 9 uicontrol Push buttons generate an action when clicked For example an OK button might apply settings and close a dialog box When you click a push button it appears depressed when you release the mouse button the push button appears raised Radio Button on page 10 10 Slider on page 10 18 uicontrol uicontrol Radio buttons are similar to check boxes but radio buttons are typically mutually exclusive within a group of re
348. ta handles hObject handle to uitable1 see GCBO eventdata structure with the following fields Indices row and column indices of the cell s currently selected 6 handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA data get hObject Data indices eventdata Indices r indices 1 c indices 2 linear_index sub2ind size data r c selected_vals data linear_index selection_sum sum sum selected_vals je When the end user selects cells in the table this function performs the following tasks Gets all the values in the table and stores them in the variable data Gets the indices of the selected cells These indices correspond to the rows and columns in data Converts the row and column indices into linear indices The linear indices allow you to select multiple elements in an array using one command Gets the values that the end user selected and stores them in the variable selected vals 8 25 8 Programming a GUIDE UI 8 26 Sums all the selected values and displays the result in the Command Window This code is an example of the table callback function CeLlEditCallback Associate this function with the table CellEditCallback property to make it execute when the end user edits a cell in the table function uitable1_CellEditCallback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to uitable1 see GCBO eventdata structure with the following fields Indices row and
349. taining all required local functions e listmaster_icons mat Three icons used as CData for push buttons senators110cong mat A cell array containing phone book entries for United States senators senators110th txt A text file containing the same data as senators110cong mat 14 21 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 22 List Master looks for the listmaster_icons mat MAT file when creating a new UI from File gt New menu The files senators110cong mat and senators110th txt are not required to create or operate a UI you can use either one to populate a new List Master UI with data using File gt import list To obtain copies of the files for this example follow these steps 1 Set your current folder to one in which you have write access 2 Copy the example files and open listmaster m in the Editor by executing these commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples listmaste pwd fileattrib listmaste w copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples senators110 pwd fileattrib senators110 w edit listmaster m Use the Ul The UI can create new instances of itself with File gt New at any time and any number of these instances can be open at the same time Start List Master To start using List Master make sure 1istmaster m is on your path and run the main function gt gt listmaster ans A The
350. tches the Min property when the check box is not selected The Value changes to the Max value when the check box is selected This callback function gets the check box s Value property and then compares it with the Max and Min properties If the check box is selected the function displays Selected in the Command Window If the check box is not selected it displays Not selected Edit Text Field This code is an example of a callback for an edit text field in GUIDE Associate this function with the uicontrol s Callback property to make it execute when the end user types inside the text field function edit1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to edit1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X Hints get hObject String returns contents of edit1 as text str2double get hObject String returns contents as double input get hObject String display input When the end user types characters inside the text field and presses the Enter key the callback function retrieves the string value and displays it in the Command Window Callbacks for Specific Components To enable users to enter multiple lines of text set the Max and Min properties to numeric values that satisfy Max Min gt 1 For example set Max to 2 and Min to 0 to satisfy the inequality In this case the callback function trigg
351. te Menus for GUIDE Uls The following figure shows the UIContextMenu property for the axes object with Tag property axes1 a E Inspector matlab graphics axis Axes Tag TickDir TickDirMode auto TickLabellnterpreter tex TickLength 8 0 0100 0 0250 TightInset 1x4 double array TitleFontSizeMultiplier 11 TitleFontWeight bold UIContextMenu axes_context_menu Units lt None gt UserData axes_context_menu N In the UI code file complete the local callback function for each item in the context menu Each callback executes when a user selects the associated context menu item See Menu Item on page 8 22 for information on defining the syntax Note See Menu Item on page 8 22 and How to Update a Menu Item Check on page 8 24 for programming information and basic examples 6 107 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls In this section Toolbar and Tools on page 6 108 Editing Tool Icons on page 6 116 Toolbar and Tools To add a toolbar to a UI select the Toolbar Editor G D untitled1 fig File Edit View Layout Tools Help m Dga eOoc 4BeANuse gt Te l Push Button a Slider Radio Button Check Box m Edit Text TT Static Text C3 Pop up Menu Ell Listbox Toggle Button E Table i Axes T Panel Z8 Button Group X Active
352. te This option is available only if you first select the Generate FIG file and MATLAB file option Use System Color Scheme for Background The default color used for UI components is system dependent This option enables you to make the figure background color the same as the default component background color 5 11 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options To ensure that the figure background matches the color of the components select Use system color scheme for background in the GUI Options dialog Note This option is available only if you first select the Generate FIG file and MATLAB file option Generate FIG File Only The Generate FIG file only option enables you to open figures and UIs to perform limited editing These can be any figures and need not be UIs UIs need not have been generated using GUIDE This mode provides limited editing capability and may be useful for UIs generated in MATLAB Versions 5 3 and earlier See the guide function for more information GUIDE selects Generate FIG file only as the default if you do one of the following Start GUIDE from the command line by providing one or more figure objects as arguments guide f In this case GUIDE selects Generate FIG file only even when a code file with a corresponding name exists in the same folder Start GUIDE from the command line and provide the name of a FIG file for which no code file with the same name exists in the same folder guide myfig fi
353. tem and that other actions may result Display a separator above the menu item by checking Separator above this item Display a check next to the menu item when the menu is first opened by checking Check mark this item A check indicates the current state of the menu item See the example in Add Items to the Context Menu on page 6 108 Enable this item when the menu is first opened by checking Enable this item This allows the user to select this item when the menu is first opened If you clear this option the menu item appears dimmed when the menu is first opened and the user cannot select it 6 97 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 98 Specify a string for the routine i e the Callback that performs the action associated with the menu item If you have not yet saved the UI the default value is automatic When you save the UI and if you have not changed this field GUIDE automatically sets the value using a combination of the Tag field and the UI file name See Menu Item on page 8 22 for more information about specifying this field and for programming menu items The View button displays the callback if there is one in an editor If you have not yet saved the UI GUIDE prompts you to save it Open the Property Inspector where you can change all menu properties by clicking the More Properties button For detailed information about the properties see Uimenu Properties Note See Menu Item on page
354. tes a new figure whenever you open it then you must specify all changed properties in the program file itself to keep the UI up to date Set Positions of Components Interactively If you do not like the initial positions or other properties of UI components you can make manual adjustments to them By placing the figure in plot edit mode you can use your mouse to move resize align and change various components properties Then you can read out the values of properties you changed and copy them into your UI code file to initialize the components To set position in plot edit mode 1 Enter plot edit mode Click the Arrow tool ls or select Edit Plot from the Tools menu If your figure has no menus or toolbar type plotedit on in the Command Window 2 Select a component Click the left mouse button while over the component you are editing 3 Move and resize the component Click within it and drag to move it to a new location Click a square black handle and drag to change its shape Use arrow keys to make small adjustments 4 Make sure that you know the handle of the component you have manipulated In the following code the handle is a variable named object_handle 5 Get the component s Position value from the Property Inspector Execute this command to open the Property Inspector inspect Or use dot notation to get the value at the command prompt object_handle Position ans 15 2500 333 0000 106 0000 20 0000 6 A
355. than its altitude and an azimuth hlight camlight 0 0 After creating the light the axes1_CreateFcn adds some handles and data that other callbacks need to the handles structure 9 77 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 78 handles light hlight handles tform hgrotate handles hmesh hmesh handles azimuth 0 handles cmap cmap guidata gcf handles The call to guidata caches the data added to handles Moving either of the sliders sets both the elevation and the azimuth of the light source although each slider changes only one The code in the callback for varying the elevation of the light is function sunelslider_Callback hObject eventdata handles hlight handles light sunaz get handles sunazslider value sunel get hObject value lightangle hlight sunaz sunel Get handle to light object Get current light azimuth Varies from 72 8 gt 72 8 deg Set the new light angle P X P P The callback for the light azimuth slider works similarly querying the elevation slider s setting to keep that value from being changed in the call to Lightangle Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI Automatically Refresh Plot in a GUIDE UI In this section About the Example on page 9 79 The Timer Implementation on page 9 81 About the Example This example shows how to refresh a display by incorporating a timer in a UI that updates data Timers are MATLAB objects Programs
356. the Units property to normalized ensures that the axes resizes proportionately when the user resizes the figure window The Position property is a 4 element vector that specifies the location of the axes within the figure and its size distance from left distance from bottom width height The Pop Up Menu This command creates the pop up menu hPlotsPopupmenu uicontrol List of available types of plot Parent hMainFigure Units normalized Position 0 11 0 85 0 45 0 1 HandleVisibility callback String mPlotTypes 1 Style popupmenu The uicontrol function creates various user interface controls based on the value of the Style property Here the Style property is set to popupmenu For a pop up menu the String property defines the list of items in the menu Here it is defined as a 5 by 1 cell array of strings derived from the cell array mPlotTypes The Update Push Button This command creates the Update push button hUpdateButton uicontrol Button for updating selected plot Parent hMainFigure Units normalized HandleVisibility callback Position 0 6 0 85 0 3 0 1 String Update Callback hUpdateButtonCallback The uicontrol function creates various user interface controls based on the value of the Style property This statement does not set the Style property because its default is pushbutton 14 5
357. the components that you can add to your UI Note See Create Menus for GUIDE UIs on page 6 91 for information about adding menus to a UI See Create Toolbars for GUIDE UIs on page 6 108 for information about working with the toolbar To place components in the GUIDE layout area and give each component a unique identifier follow these steps 1 Display component names on the palette a On the MATLAB Home tab in the Environment section click Preferences b Inthe Preferences dialog box click GUIDE c Select Show Names in Component Palette and then click OK 2 Place components in the layout area according to your design Drag a component from the palette and drop it in the layout area Click a component in the palette and move the cursor over the layout area The cursor changes to a cross Click again to add the component in its default size or click and drag to size the component as you add it 6 17 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE 6 18 Once you have defined a UI component in the layout area selecting it automatically shows it in the Property Inspector If the Property Inspector is not open or is not visible double clicking a component raises the inspector and focuses it on that component The components listed in the following table have additional considerations read more about them in the sections described there If You Are Adding Then Panels or button groups See Add a Com
358. the program files for this example follow these steps 1 Set your current folder to one to which you have write access 2 Copy the example code and display it in the Editor by issuing the following MATLAB commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis examples tableplot m fileattrib tableplot m w edit tableplot m Set Up and Interact with the uitable This example has one file tableplot m that contains its main function plus two local functions uicontrol callbacks The main tableplot function creates a figure and populates it with uicontrols and one axes The function hides the figure s menu bar because it is not needed Create a figure that will have a uitable axes and checkboxes figure Position 100 300 600 460 Name TablePlot Title figure NumberTitle off Do not show figure number MenuBar none Hide standard menu bar menus The main tableplot function sets up the uitable immediately after loading a data matrix into the workspace The table s size adapts to the matrix size matrices for uitables must be 1 D or 2 D Load some tabular data traffic counts from somewhere count load count dat tablesize size count This demo data is 24 by 3 Define parameters for a uitable col headers are fictional colnames Oak Ave Washington St Center St All column contain numeric data integers actually colfmt
359. the string Confirm Close Opening modald1g with this syntax displays the text Confirm Close at the top of the dialog box The modal dialog box opens with the Position obtained from the code that calls it The opening function in the modal modald1g code file e Makes the dialog box modal Executes the uiwait command which causes the dialog box to wait for you to click Yes or No or click the close button X on the window border When you click one of the two push buttons the callback for the push button Updates the output field in the handles structure Executes uiresume to return control to the opening function where uiwait is called The output function is called which returns the string Yes or No as an output argument and deletes the dialog box with the command 9 5 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls delete handles figure1 6 When the UI with the Close button regains control it receives the string Yes or No If the string is No it does nothing If the string is Yes the Close button callback closes the UI with the command delete handles figuret 9 6 UI That Uses Persistent Data UI That Uses Persistent Data In this section About the Example on page 9 7 Calling Syntax on page 9 8 MAT file Validation on page 9 9 UI Behavior on page 9 10 Overall UI Characteristics on page 9 17 About the Example This example shows how to manage
360. the value was set for the time vector UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots ei two_acesfig COES File Edit View La A EE WR Select FontName MS Sans Serif 3 a Foe FontUnits points A 3 FontWeight normal 50 B ForegroundColor 7 Check Box HandleVisibility on HorizontalAlignment center P a Interruptible 7 On 120 ETE Srccout bs ithe KeyReleaseFcn 5 j t H Listbox ListboxTop Startinc end F Toggle Button z 0 001 0 25 3 1x2 double array T Panel as ra 8 Button Group edit X ActiveX Control t input TooltipString UlContetMenu lt None gt Units normalized Tag t_input Current Point 287 147 Position 440 166 79 19 Identify the Axes Since there are two axes in this UI you must specify which one you want to target when plotting data Use the handles structure to access the target axes in your code All fields in the handles structure are named according to each object s Tag property value In this case handles frequency_axes returns the top axes and the handles time_axes returns the bottom axes 9 23 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 24 Validate Input as Numbers When you UI displays you can type parameters into three edit text fields as strings of text If you type an invalid value the graphs can fail to inform or even to generate Preventing bad inputs from being processed i
361. ting mode This function also places default text in the edit text box 14 27 14 Examples of Uls Created Programmatically 14 28 lmnew then calls the enable_updown function The enable _updown function sets the Enable property of the pair of push buttons that migrate items higher or lower in the list box It disables the Move Up button when the selected item is at the top of the list It also disables the Move Down button when the selected item is at the bottom of the list Then the enable_updown function copies the current list selection into the edit text box Finally it sets the dirty flag in the figure s application data to indicate that the UI s data or state has changed Having set up the UI to receive data the 1mnew function enables the File gt Import list menu option and its submenu List Master Menu Callbacks List Master has seven menu items and three submenu items To obtain user input the menu callbacks call these MATLAB functions errordlg Open Export list to workspace Export list to file e inputdlg New Export list to workspace e listdlg Import list questdlg Export list to workspace Quit e uigetfile Open e uiputfile Export list to file Save as The New menu item has two modes of operation depending on whether the UI is blank or already contains a list box and controls The 1mnew callback determines the state of the UI by examining the figure s Name property Ifthe UI
362. to generate line numbers whenever a list updates and line numbering is on guidirty Sets the Boolean dirty flag in the figure s application data to true or false to indicate difference from saved version isguidirty Returns logical state of the figure s dirty flag make _list_output_name Converts the name of a list obtained from the figure Name property into a valid MATLAB identifier which serves as a default when saving the UI or exporting its data List numbering works by adding five spaces before each list entry then substituting numerals for characters 3 2 and 1 of these blanks as needed to display the digits and placing a period in character 4 The numbers are stripped off the copy of the current item that displays in the text edit box and then prepended again when the edit is committed if the Number list check box is selected This limits the size of lists that can be numbered to 999 items You can modify number_1list to add characters to the number field if you want the UI to number lists longer than that Note You should turn off the numbering feature before importing list data if the items on that list are already numbered In such cases the item numbers display in the list but moving list items up or down in the list does not renumber them The guidirty function sets the figure s application data using setappdata to indicate that it has been modified as follows function guidirty fh yes_no Sets the Di
363. top Window Help DOSGas k AACU9RL A2 08 af 0 8 Mesh 0 6 Countour Fl Countour 0 2 Select Data Qo m Peaks Z 0 0 5 1 Code the Simple Programmatic UI Behavior Program the Pop Up Menu The pop up menu enables users to select the data to plot When a user selects one of the three data sets in the pop up menu MATLAB software sets the pop up menu Create a Simple UI Programmatically Value property to the index of the selected string The pop up menu callback reads the pop up menu Value property to determine which item is currently displayed and sets current_data accordingly Add the following callback to your file following the initialization code and before the final end statement Pop up menu callback Read the pop up menu Value property to determine which item is currently displayed and make it the current data This callback automatically has access to current_data because this function is nested at a lower level function popup_menu_Callback source eventdata Determine the selected data set str source String val source Value Set current data to the selected data set switch str val case Peaks User selects Peaks current_data peaks data case Membrane User selects Membrane current_data membrane_data case Sinc User selects Sinc current_data sinc_data end end X X P P Program the Push Buttons Each of the three push buttons creates a different type of
364. ts v Year Plots v FFT Periodogram Plots Right click plots for larger view Sunspots v Year Plots 200 Population 0 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 15 20 25 30 35 m Data Statistics Population Selection l Population Selection 288 a 288 a 0 1 40 0 1 40 190 2000 151 60 190 2000 151 60 48 4340 49 45 48 4340 49 45 39 44 10 39 44 10 38 68 38 68 19 197 J gt Respond to Data Selections The Data Set table has two columns Year and Sunspots The data tables s Cell Selection Callback analyzes data from its second column regardless of which columns you highlight The setStats function not generated by GUIDE computes summary statistics observations from the second column for insertion into the Data Statistics table on the right The plotPeriod function not generated by GUIDE plots either the raw data or a Fourier analysis of it The data_table_CellSelectionCallback function manages the application s response to you selecting ranges of data Ranges can be contiguous rows or separate groups of rows holding down the Ctrl key lets you add discontiguous rows to a selection Because the Cell Selection Callback is triggered as long as you hold the left mouse button down within the table the selection statistics and lower plot are refreshed until selection is completed Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI S
365. tting commands like you would on the command line Callback is the default setting for command line accessibility For more information see GUIDE Options on page 5 8 9 29 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI 9 30 In this section About the Example on page 9 30 Recreate the UI on page 9 32 About the Example This example shows how to program a UI that has the following features Initializes a table and a plot e Plots selected data in real time as you select data observations Generates line graphs that display different views of data This UI plots different kinds of graphs into different axes for an entire data set or selections of it and shows how Fourier transforms can identify periodicity in time series data You can use this UI to analyze and visualize time series data containing periodic events Synchronized Data Presentations in a GUIDE UI Zurich Sunspot Statistics 1700 1987 Sunspots v Year Plots Right click plots for larger view Sunspots v Year Plots ETN 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 Selection Population 10 8 3 0 0 2 11 27 47 63 60 39 28 To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writeable folder and open the FIG file in GUIDE with the following commands copyfile fullfile docroot techdoc creating guis
366. tting the figure Color to black as well as the BackgroundColor ForegroundColor and ShadowColor of the three uipanels They are used as containers only so they do not need to be visible Coloring all static text yellow and uicontrol backgrounds either black or yellow gray Giving all uicontrols mnemonic names in their Tag string Setting the FontSize for uicontrols to 9 points Specifying nondefault Min and Max values for the sliders Adding tooltip strings for some controls The following sections describe the interactive techniques used in the UI Alternate the Label of a Push Button The top right button initially labeled Spin changes to Stop when clicked and back to Spin clicked a second time It does this by comparing its String property to a pair of strings stored in the handles structure as a cell array Insert this data into the handles structure in spinstopbutton_ CreateFcn as follows function spinstopbutton_CreateFcn hObject eventdata handles handles Strings Spin Stop guidata hObject handles The call to guidata saves the updated handles structure for the figure containing hObject which is the spinstopbutton push button object GUIDE named this object pushbutton1 It was renamed by changing its Tag property in the Property Inspector As a result GUIDE changed all references to the component in the UT code file when the 9 71 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 72 UI was saved For more informati
367. tton String Cannot plot f1 set handles plot_button Enable off Give the edit text box focus so user can correct the error uicontrol hObject else Enable the Plot button with its original name set handles plot_button String Plot set handles plot_button Enable on end Similarly f2_input_Callback code validates the f2 input Validate the Time Input Vector The time vector input t is more complicated to validate As the str2doub1le function does not operate on vectors the eval function is called to convert the input string into UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots a MATLAB expression Because you can type many things that eval cannot handle the first task is to make sure that eval succeeded The t_input_Callback uses try catch blocks to do the following Call eval with the t_input string inside the try block If eval succeeds perform additional tests within the try block If eval generates an error pass control to the catch block In that block the callback disables the Plot button and changes its String to Cannot plot t The remaining code in the try block makes sure that the variable t returned from eval is a monotonically increasing vector of numbers with no more than 1000 elements If t passes all these tests the callback enables Plot button and sets its String to Plot If it fails any of the tests the callback disables the Plot button and changes its String to an appro
368. ttons demonstrates the effect of different property value combinations Interrupt Callback Execution Callback interruption Click Wait interruptible immediately followed by either button in the second window Surf Plot queue or Mesh Plot cancel The wait bar displays but is momentarily interrupted by the plotting operation Callback queueing Click Wait uninterruptible immediately followed by Surf Plot queue The wait bar runs to completion Then the surface plot displays Callback cancellation Click Wait uninterruptible immediately followed by Mesh Plot cancel The wait bar runs to completion No plot displays because MATLAB discards the mesh plot callback Examine the Source Code The Interruptible and BusyAction properties are passed as input arguments to the uicontrol function when each button is created Here is the command that creates the Wait interruptible push button Notice that the Interruptible property is set to on h_interrupt uicontrol h_paneli Style pushbutton Position 30 110 120 30 String Wait interruptible TooltipString Interruptible on Interruptible on Callback wait_interruptible Here is the command that creates the Wait uninterruptible push button Notice that the Interruptible property is set to off h_nointerrupt uicontrol h_panel1 Style pushbutton Position 30 40 120 30 String Wait
369. ture The name of the MAT file The Addresses structure An index pointer indicating which name and phone number are currently displayed in the UI Check_And_Load function pass Check_And_Load file handles Initialize the variable pass to determine if this is a valid file pass 0 If called without any file then set file to the default file name Otherwise if the file exists then load it if isempty file file addrbook mat handles LastFile file guidata handles Address_Book handles 9 9 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 10 end if exist file file 2 data load file end Validate the MAT file The file is valid if the variable is called Addresses and it has fields called Name and Phone flds fieldnames data if length flds 1 amp amp strcmp flds 1 Addresses fields fieldnames data Addresses if length fields 2 amp amp strcmp fields 1 Name amp amp stromp fields 2 Phone pass 1 end end If the file is valid display it if pass Add Addresses to the handles structure handles Addresses data Addresses Display the first entry set handles Contact_Name String data Addresses 1 Name set handles Contact_Phone String data Addresses 1 Phone Set the index pointer to 1 handles Index 1 Save the modified handles structure guidata handles Address_Book handles else errordig Not a valid Address
370. ty to poplabel 9 35 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 36 Place a second label in the lower axes axeS2 renaming this text object Selection and setting its Tag property to sellabel Create a title for the UI Using the Text tool drag out a static text object at the top left of the layout above the data table Double click it and in the Property Inspector change its String property to Zurich Sunspot Statistics 1700 1987 and its FontWeight property to bold Add a prompt above the axes place a text label just above the Sunspots v Year Plots panel near its right edge Change its Tag property to newfig its String property to Right click plots for larger view and its FontAngle property to Italic Make a pop up menu to specify the type of graph to plot Using the Pop up Menu tool G3 drag out a pop up menu just above the Sunspots v Year panel aligning it to the panel s left edge In the Property Inspector set these properties e String Sunspots v Year Plots FFT Periodogram Plots Tag plot_type e Tooltip Choose type of data plot Then click the Callback property s icon This creates a declaration called plot_type Callback to which you add code later on Select the Push Button tool Wd and drag out a push button in the upper right of the figure In the Property Inspector rename it to Quit and set up its callback as follows Double click it and in the Property Inspector set its Tag property to quit and its Strin
371. ty to make it execute when the end user clicks on the toggle button function togglebuttoni_Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to togglebuttoni see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA Hint get hObject Value returns toggle state of togglebutton1 button_state get hObject Value Callbacks for Specific Components if button_state get hObject Max display down elseif button_state get hObject Min display up end The toggle button s Value property matches the Min property when the toggle button is up The Value changes to the Max value when the toggle button is depressed This callback function gets the toggle button s Value property and then compares it with the Max and Min properties If the button is depressed then the function displays down in the Command Window If the button is up then the function displays up Radio Button This code is an example of a radio button callback function in GUIDE Associate this function with the radio button Callback property to make it execute when the end user clicks on the radio button function radiobutton1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to radiobutton1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA o 6 o K Hi
372. tyle radiobutton String Red Units normalized Position 1 6 3 2 rb2 uicontrol bg Style radiobutton String Blue Units normalized Position 1 2 3 2 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSGASs k AACV9CL a 0 My Button Group By default the first radio button added to the uibuttongroup is selected To override this default set any other radio button s Value property to its Max property value Button groups manage the selection of radio buttons and toggle buttons by allowing only one button to be selected within the group You can determine the currently selected button by querying the uibuttongroup s SelectedObject property Axes This code creates an axes in a figure Add Components to a Programmatic UI f figure ax axes Parent f Position 15 15 7 7 A Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSMs b ARC9R4 a 0 The first two arguments passed to the axes function Parent f specify the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or button group Position 15 15 7 7 specifies the location and size of the axes as a fraction of the parent figure In this case the axes is 70 percent of the width of the figure and 70 percent of its height The left edge of the a
373. u bar 6 100 Create Menus for GUIDE Uls r A myui File Edit View Context Menus A context menu is displayed when a user right clicks the object for which the menu is defined The Menu Editor enables you to define context menus and associate them with objects in the layout The process has three steps 1 Create the Parent Menu on page 6 102 2 Add Items to the Context Menu on page 6 103 3 Associate the Context Menu with an Object on page 6 106 Note See Menus for the Menu Bar on page 6 91 for information about defining menus in general See Menu Item on page 8 22 for information about defining local callback functions for your menus 6 101 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Create the Parent Menu All items in a context menu are children of a menu that is not displayed on the figure menu bar To define the parent menu 1 Select the Menu Editor s button from the toolbar Context Menus tab and select the New Context Menu TOGE New Context Menu To add a menu click here or on the New Context Menu button on the toolbar Properties Nothing selected 2 Select the menu and in the Tag field type the context menu tag axes_context_menu in this example 6 102 Create Menus for GUIDE Uls Bettie t 1 x TE axes contet menu Menu Bar Context Menus Add Items to the Context Menu Context Menu Properties
374. u button in the toolbar A menu title Untitled 1 appears in the left pane of the dialog box 6 93 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE E Menu Editor Na 1 1 x New Menu o add a menu click here or on the New Menu button on the toolbar Note By default GUIDE selects the Menu Bar tab when you open the Menu Editor 2 Click the menu title to display a selection of menu properties in the right pane 6 94 Create Menus for GUIDE Uls 4 ES Menu Editor anon fT Menu Bar Context Menus j Menu Properties Label File Tag file men Accelerator Ctrl None z E Separator above this item F Check mark this item V Enable this item Callback automatic 3 Fill in the Label and Tag fields for the menu For example set Label to File and set Tag to file_menu Click outside the field for the change to take effect Label is a string that specifies the text label for the menu item To display the amp character in a label use two amp characters in the string The words remove default and factory case sensitive are reserved To use one of these as labels prepend a backslash to the string For example remove yields remove Tag is a string that is an identifier for the menu object It is used in the code to identify the menu item and must be unique in your UI code file 6 95 6 Lay Out a UI Using
375. u can share your app with others by attaching the mlappinstal11 file to an email message or using any other method you typically use to share files Such methods can include uploading to MATLAB Central File Exchange Provide instructions on installing your app by referring them to Install or Reinstall App on page 15 5 Note While mlappinstall files can contain any files you specify MATLAB Central File Exchange places additional limitations on submissions Your app cannot be submitted to File Exchange when it contains any of the following e MEX files Other binary executable files such as DLLs or ActiveX controls Data and image files are typically acceptable MATLAB App Installer File mlappinstall MATLAB App Installer File mlappinstall A MATLAB app installer file mlappinstal1l is an archive file for sharing an app you created using MATLAB A single app installer file contains everything necessary to install and run an app the source code supporting data information such as product dependencies and the app icon An mlappinsta11 file is a compressed package that conforms to the Open Packaging Conventions OPC interoperability standard You can search for and install mlappinstal11 files using your operating system file browser When you select an mlappinstall file in Windows Explorer or Quick Look Mac OS the browser displays properties for the file such as Authors and Release Use these propertie
376. u drag an ActiveX component from the component palette into the layout area GUIDE opens a dialog box similar to the following that lists the registered ActiveX controls on your system Note If MATLAB software is not installed locally on your computer for example if you are running the software over a network you might not find the ActiveX control described in this example To register the control see Registering Controls and Servers 6 65 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Select an ActiveX Control ActiveX Control List Shockwave Flash Ubject Siebel Client Calculator Control Class Siebel Client Currency Control Class Siebel Client Date Control Class Siebel Client Generic Control Class Siebel Client List Control Class Siebel Client Tree Control Class Siebel TaskPane Class Sky Software FileView ActiveX Contro Sky Software FolderView ActiveX Cor SysColorCtri class sinfo Class Tabular Data Control TaskSymbol Class Taxonomy Control UmEvmControl Class VSTO WinFormsHost Control VideoRenderCtl Class Windows Live Mail Mime Editor Windows Live Upload Tool Windows Mail Mime Editor Windows Media Player XStandard um r 4 Ee fa Preview Hra FX VEBR I D B 100 0 8 12 15AM_ 8 12 55 AM 8 13 54 AM Program ID Sysmon 3 Location C Windows System32 sysmon ocx create concer ep 1 Select the desired ActiveX control The right panel shows a previe
377. u place tools from the Tool Palette into the Toolbar Layout area the Toolbar Editor shows the properties of the currently selected tool as the following illustration shows f g Toolbar Editor Toolbar Layout Tool Palette Custom Tools P Push Tool T Toggle Tool Predefined Tools 0 New eG Open lal Save amp Print Zoom In C4 Zoom Out amp Pan Rotate ve Data Cursor D Colorbar E Legend Adds mDeitess te bt b bat Tool Properties Toolbar Properties cosa teon Tag uipushtool2 Tooltip String Save Figure V Enable this tool E Separator on left side Clicked Callback default View 6 112 Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls Predefined and Custom Tools The Toolbar Editor provides two types of tools Predefined tools having standard icons and behaviors Custom tools having generic icons and no behaviors Predefined Tools The set of icons on the bottom of the Tool Palette represent standard MATLAB figure tools Their behavior is built in Predefined tools that require an axes such as pan and zoom do not exhibit any behavior in UIs lacking axes The callback s defining the behavior of the predefined tool are shown as default which calls the same function that the tool calls in standard figure toolbars and menus to open files save figures change modes etc You can change default to some other callback to customize the tool GUIDE w
378. u select take effect the next time you save your UI BB Gu Options o e e Resize behavior Non resizable a Command line accessibility Callback GUI becomes Current Figure within Callbacks v Generate FIG file and MATLAB file lt Generate callback function prototypes GUI allows only one instance to run singleton iS Use system color scheme for background recommended D Generate FIG file only GUIDE Options Resize Behavior You can control whether users can resize the window and how MATLAB handles resizing GUIDE provides three options Non resizable Users cannot change the window size default Proportional The software automatically scales the components in the UI in proportion to the new figure window size e Other Use SizeChangedF cn Program the UI to behave in a certain way when users resize the figure window The first two options set figure and component properties appropriately and require no other action Other Use SizeChangedF cn requires you to write a callback routine that recalculates sizes and positions of the components based on the new figure size For a discussion and examples of using a SizeChangedF cn see the GUIDE examples Panel on page 8 20 and UI That Uses Persistent Data on page 9 7 Command Line Accessibility You can restrict access to a figure window from the command line or from a code file with the GUIDE Co
379. unction calculates new Position values for the button and axes when the user resizes the window The button appears to be stationary when the user resizes the window The axes scales with the figure function myui Add the UI components hs addcomponents Make figure visible after adding components hs fig Visible on function hs addcomponents Add components save handles in a struct hs fig figure Visible off Tag fig sees SizeChangedFcn resizeui hs btn uicontrol hs fig String Plot Sine lt x Callback plotsine Tag button hs ax axes Parent hs fig 10 37 10 Lay Out a Programmatic UI 10 38 UNIES PIXELS jisa hag 3 ax end function plotsine hObject callbackdata theta 0 pi 64 6 pi y sin theta plot hs ax theta y end function resizeui hObject callbackdata Get figure width and height figwidth hs fig Position 3 figheight hs fig Position 4 Set button position bheight 30 bwidth 70 bbottomedge figheight bheight 50 bleftedge 10 hs btn Position bleftedge bbottomedge bwidth bheight Set axes position axheight 75 figheight axbottomedge max 0 figheight axheight 30 axleftedge bleftedge bwidth 30 axwidth max 0 figwidth axleftedge 50 hs ax Position axleftedge axbottomedge axwidth axheight end end The resizeui function sets the location and size of the button
380. up menus open to display a list of choices when users on page 6 36 click the arrow List Box on page 6 38 List boxes display a list of items and enable users to select one or more items GUIDE Components Component Icon Description Toggle Button on page 6 41 Table on page 6 54 Toggle buttons generate an action and indicate whether they are turned on or off When you click a toggle button it appears depressed showing that it is on When you release the mouse button the toggle button remains depressed until you click it a second time When you do so the button returns to the raised state showing that it is off Use a button group to manage mutually exclusive toggle buttons Use the table button to create a table component Refer to the uitable function for more information on using this component Axes on page 6 50 Axes enable your UI to display graphics such as graphs and images Like all graphics objects axes have properties that you can set to control many aspects of its behavior and appearance Panel on page 6 45 Panels arrange UI components into groups By visually grouping related controls panels can make the user interface easier to understand A panel can have a title and various borders Panel children can be user interface controls and axes as well as button groups and other panels The position of each component within a panel is
381. ups This code creates a button group figure fF bg uibuttongroup f Title My Button Group Position 1 2 8 6 10 24 Add Components to a Programmatic UI a 4 Figure 1 File Edit View Insert Tools Desktop Window Help OSHS b ARC9R4 a 0 My Button Group The first argument passed to uibuttongroup f specifies the parent container In this case the parent is a figure but you can also specify the parent to be any container such as a panel or another button group Title My Button Group specifies a title to display on the button group Position 1 2 8 6 specifies the location and size of the button group as a fraction of the parent container In this case the button group is 80 percent of the width of the figure and 60 percent of its height The left edge of the button group is located at 10 percent of the figure s width from the left The bottom of the button group is located 20 percent of the figure s height from the bottom If the figure is resized the button group retains its original proportions The following commands add two radio buttons to the button group Setting the Units property to normalized causes the Position values to be interpreted as fractions of the parent panel Normalized units allow the buttons to retain their original relative positions when the button group is resized 10 25 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 26 rbi uicontrol bg S
382. ur UI has components grouped inside of uipanels uibuttongroups or uitabs then you might need to manage their front to back order or stacking order to make the UI look the way you want The default stacking order of components is as follows Axes and other Graphics objects appear at the bottom Other UI components appear in the order in which you create them They can stack in any order Use the Parent property to control the front to back order stacking order of grouped components To move a component on top of another component set its Parent property to the object you want to appear beneath it The Children property of a uipanel uibuttongroup or uitab lists the child objects inside the container according to their stacking order 10 39 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul Adjust Programmatic UI Layouts Interactively 10 40 In this section Set Positions of Components Interactively on page 10 41 Align Components on page 10 51 Set Colors Interactively on page 10 58 Set Font Characteristics Interactively on page 10 59 Laying out a programmatic UI can take time and involves many small steps For example you must position components manually often several times to place them exactly where you want them to be Establishing final settings for other properties and coding statements for them also takes time You can reduce the effort involved by taking advantage of built in MATLA
383. ush button callback in the UI code file which contains this code Executes on button press in pushbutton1 unction pushbutton1 Callback hObject eventdata handles hObject handle to pushbutton1 see GCBO eventdata reserved to be defined in a future version of MATLAB handles structure with handles and user data see GUIDATA X X de h P Add the following code to the callback immediately after the comment that begins handles Display surf plot of the currently selected data surf handles current_data Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add similar code to the Mesh and Contour push button callbacks 2 21 2 How to Create a UI with GUIDE Add this code to the Mesh push button callback pushbutton2_Callback Display mesh plot of the currently selected data mesh handles current_data Add this code to the Contour push button callback pushbutton3_Callback Display contour plot of the currently selected data contour handles current_data 4 Save your code by selecting File gt Save Open and Run the Simple GUIDE UI In Code the Behavior of the Simple GUIDE UI on page 2 16 you programmed the pop up menu and the push buttons You also created data for them to use and initialized the display Now you can run your program to see how it works 1 Run your program from the Layout Editor by selecting Tools gt Run By simple_gui bo ka 10 Select Data 40 40 2 Inthe pop up menu select
384. utes the file it creates a figure populates it with components and handles user interactions Typically the figure is not saved between sessions because the code in the file creates a new one each time it runs The code files of the two approaches look different Programmatic UI files are generally longer because they explicitly define every property of the figure and its controls as well as the callbacks GUIDE UIs define most of the properties within the figure itself They store the definitions in its FIG file rather than in its code file The code file contains callbacks and other functions that initialize the UI when it opens You can create a UI with GUIDE and then modify it programmatically However you cannot create a UI programmatically and then modify it with GUIDE The approach you choose depends on your experience your preferences and your goals Here are some ways to achieve specific goals Goal Description of Approach Create a dialog box Call a function that creates predefined dialog box For more information see Predefined Dialog Boxes Create a UI containing a few components It is often simpler to create UIs that contain only a few components 1 About Uls in MATLAB Software Goal Description of Approach programmatically You can fully define each component with a single function call Create a moderately complex UI GUIDE simplifies the creation of moderately complex
385. utton in the Tool Properties pane next to CData icon or right click the Toolbar Layout and select Edit Icon from the Create Toolbars for GUIDE Uls context menu The Icon Editor opens with the tool s CData loaded into it For information about editing icons see Use the Icon Editor on page 6 116 Edit Toolbar Properties If you click an empty part of the toolbar or click the Toolbar Properties tab you can edit two of its properties Tag The internal name for the toolbar e Visible Whether the toolbar is displayed in your UI The Tag property is initially set to uitoolbar1 The Visible property is set to on When on the Visible property causes the toolbar to be displayed on the UI regardless of the setting of the figure s Toolbar property If you want to toggle a custom toolbar as you can built in ones from the View menu you can create a menu item a check box or other control to control its Visible property To access nearly all the properties for the toolbar in the Property Inspector click More Properties Test Your Toolbar To try out your toolbar click the Run button in the Layout Editor The software asks if you want to save changes to its fig file first Remove a Toolbar You can remove a toolbar completely destroying it from the Toolbar Editor leaving your UI without a toolbar other than the figure toolbar which is not visible by default The are two ways to remove a toolbar Click the
386. value to Data Statistics renaming its Title to in the Property Inspector A panel above the Data Statistics panel In the Property Inspector set its Title property to Sunspots v Year Plots This panel changes its name when the type of plot changes Use the Table tool aA to drag a uitable inside the Data Set panel Use the Property Inspector to set the property values as follows layout 1 2 a b c 3 4 ColumnName Year and Sunspot Data As described in Initialize the Data Table on page 9 37 Tag data_table TooltipString Drag to select a range of 11 or more observations CellSelectionCallback data_table CellSelectionCallback Click the pencil and paper a icon to have GUIDE set this property value automatically and declare it in the code file Drag a second uitable inside the Data Statistics panel Use the Table Property Editor to set row values as follows a Double click the Data Statistics table to open it in the Property Inspector 9 33 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls 9 34 In the Property Inspector click the Table Property Editor icon to the right of the RowName property to open the Table Property Editor In the Table Property Editor select Rows from the list in the left hand column Select the bottom radio button Show names entered below as row headers Type the nine strings listed in order on separate lines in the data entry pane and then click OK BackgroundColor yellow using the color pi
387. ve access to arguments and are more powerful and flexible You cannot use MATLAB scripts sequences of statements stored in code files that do not define functions as callbacks Although you can provide a callback with certain data and make it do anything you want you cannot control when callbacks execute That is when your UI is being used you have no control over the sequence of events that trigger particular callbacks or what other callbacks might still be running at those times This distinguishes event driven programming from other types of control flow for example processing sequential data files Ways to Build MATLAB Uls Ways to Build MATLAB Uls A MATLAB Ul is a figure window to which you add user operated components You can select size and position these components as you like Using callbacks you can make the components do what you want when the user clicks or manipulates the components with keystrokes You can build MATLAB UIs in two ways Create the UI using GUIDE This approach starts with a figure that you populate with components from within a graphic layout editor GUIDE creates an associated code file containing callbacks for the UI and its components GUIDE saves both the figure as a FIG file and the code file You can launch your application from either file Create the UI programmatically Using this approach you create a code file that defines all component properties and behaviors When a user exec
388. w Names in Component Palette on page 5 5 Show File Extension in Window Title on page 5 6 Show File Path in Window Title on page 5 6 Add Comments for Newly Generated Callback Functions on page 5 6 Show Names in Component Palette Displays both icons and names in the component palette as shown below When unchecked the icons alone are displayed in two columns with tooltips 5 5 5 GUIDE Preferences and Options 5 6 Zli Li F Toggle Button E Table iv Axes 75 Panel 8 Button Group X ActiveX Control Push Button Component palette with names gio Check Box laa lle l M Edit Text J Component palette without names HE A 3 Pop Pop up Menu Re 5E i Show File Extension in Window Title Displays the FIG file file name with its file extension fig in the Layout Editor window title If unchecked only the file name is displayed Show File Path in Window Title Displays the full file path in the Layout Editor window title If unchecked the file path is not displayed Add Comments for Newly Generated Callback Functions Callbacks are blocks of code that execute in response to actions by the user such as clicking buttons or manipulating sliders By default GUIDE sets up templates that declare callbacks as functions and adds comments at the beginning of each one Most of the comments are similar to the following GUIDE P
389. w of the selected control 2 Click Create The control appears as a small box in the Layout Editor 3 Resize the control to approximately the size of the square shown in the preview pane You can do this by clicking and dragging a corner of the control as shown in the following figure 6 66 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Click and drag eS ee When you select an ActiveX control you can open the ActiveX Property Editor by right clicking and selecting ActiveX Property Editor from the context menu or clicking the Tools menu and selecting it from there Note What an ActiveX Property Editor contains and looks like is dependent on what user controls that the authors of the particular ActiveX object have created and stored in the UI for the object In some cases a UI without controls or no UI at all appears when you select this menu item Resize GUIDE UI Components You can resize components in one of the following ways Drag a Corner of the Component on page 6 67 Set the Component s Position Property on page 6 68 Drag a Corner of the Component Select the component you want to resize Click one of the corner handles and drag it until the component is the desired size Push Button Click and drag s 6 67 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Set the Component s Position Property Select one or more components that you want to resize Then select View gt Property Inspe
390. width The original width of the Contact_Name box is 72 characters set handles Contact_Name Position C_N_pos 1 C_N_pos 2 ratio 72 C_N_pos 4 Keeping Resized Figure On Screen The SizeChangedF cn callback calls movegui to ensure that the resized UI is on screen regardless of where you release the mouse The first time it runs the UI displays at the size and location specified by the figure Position property This property was set with the Property Inspector when the UI was created and it can be changed it in GUIDE at any time 9 19 9 Examples of GUIDE Uls UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots 9 20 In this section About the Example on page 9 20 UI Design on page 9 22 Validate Input as Numbers on page 9 24 Plot Push Button Behavior on page 9 27 About the Example This example shows how to create a GUIDE UI that accepts input parameters and plots data in two axes The parameters define a time varying and frequency varying signal One plot displays the data in the time domain and the other plot displays the data in the frequency domain UI That Accepts Parameters and Generates Plots f By Signal Analysis oo je jes 30 sin 2 pi f1 t sin 2 pi f2 t 50 f2 a 120 100 200 300 400 500 Frequency t start inc end 0 001 0 25 To get and view the example code 1 Copy the example FIG file and code file to your current writea
391. width of the Contact Name field The following sections describe how this calculation works Width Changes If the new width is greater than the original width set the figure to the new width The size of the Contact Name text box changes in proportion to the new figure width This is accomplished by Obtaining the figure width as a ratio of its original width Expanding or contracting the width of the Contact Name field proportionally If the new width is less than the original width use the original width The code relies on the fact that the original width of the Contact Name field is 72 character units Height Changes The height and width of the UI window is specified in pixel units Using units of pixels enables maximizing and minimizing the figure to work properly The code assumes that its dimensions are 470 by 250 pixels If you attempt to change the height the code restores the original height However because the resize function is triggered when you release the mouse button after changing the size the resize function cannot always determine the original position of the window on the screen Therefore the resize function applies a compensation to the vertical position second element in the figure Position vector by adding the vertical position to the height when you release the mouse and subtracting the original height When you resize the UI window from the bottom the window stays in the same position When you res
392. widths can also be set to auto ColumnEditable logical 1 by n matrix Determines data in a scalar logical value column as editable empty matrix Row RowName 1 by n cell array of Row header label strings names Color BackgroundColor n by 3 matrix of Background color of RGB triples cells RowStriping on off Color striping of table rows Data Data Matrix or cell array Table data of numeric logical or character data To create a UI with a table in GUIDE as shown do the following 6 55 6 Lay Out a UI Using GUIDE Amount Available 456 35 510 23 Adjustable 658 20 E Drag the table icon on to the Layout Editor and right click in the table From the table s context menu select Table Property Editor You can also select Table Property Editor from the Tools menu when you select a table by itself 6 56 Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area T untitled fig kodas File Edit View Layout Tools Help ONGIDA IC BAA EE p Lh select Push Button a a an Slider 2 1 Cut Ctrl X Radio Button 2 Copy Ctrl C M Check Box 3 Ctrl V 4 Ctrl V elt Edit Text Cea THT Static Text Duplicate Ctrl D Pop up Men oer S Bring to Front Ctrl F z El Listbox Send to Back Ctrl B Toggle Button Object Browser E Table gt Editor iv Axes tj Panel V
393. xes is located at 15 percent of the figure s width from the left The bottom of the axes is located 15 percent of the figure s height from the bottom If the figure is resized the axes retains its original proportions Prevent Customized Axes Properties from Being Reset Data graphing functions such as plot image and scatter reset axes properties before they draw into an axes This can be a problem when you want to maintain consistency of axes limits ticks colors and font characteristics in a UI 10 27 10 Lay Out a Programmatic Ul 10 28 The default value of the NextPlot axes property replace allows the graphing functions to reset many property values In addition the replace property value allows MATLAB to remove all callbacks from the axes whenever a graph is plotted If you create an axes in a UI window consider setting the NextPlot property to replacechildren You might need to set this property prior to changing the contents of an axes ax NextPlot replacechildren ActiveX Controls ActiveX components enable you to display ActiveX controls in your UI They are available only on the Microsoft Windows platform An ActiveX control can be the child only of a figure It cannot be the child of a panel or button group See Creating an ActiveX Control about adding an ActiveX control to a figure See Creating COM Objects for general information about ActiveX controls How to Set Font Character
394. yDefs iconwidth localValidateInput mIconWidth iconheight localValidateInput mIconHeight iconfile localValidateInput mIconFile mIconWidth 16 Use input property iconwidth to initialize mIconHeight 16 Use input property iconheight to initialize mIconFile fullfile matlabroot toolbox matlab icons Use input property iconfile to initialize Each row of the cell array defines one property It specifies in order the name of the property the routine that is called to validate the input and the name of the variable that holds the property value Initialize a Programmatic Ul The fullfile function builds a full filename from parts The following statements start the Icon Editor application The first statement creates a new icon The second statement opens existing icon file for editing cdata iconEditor iconwidth 16 iconheight 25 cdata iconEditor iconfile eraser gif iconEditor calls a routine processUserIputs during the initialization to accomplish these tasks Identify each property by matching it to the first column of the cell array Call the routine named in the second column to validate the input Assign the value to the variable named in the third column Make the Figure Invisible When you create the figure window make it invisible when you create it Display it only after you have added all the UI components To make the window
395. you are defining Note See GUIDE Components on page 6 13 for descriptions of these components See Callbacks for Specific Components on page 8 11 for basic examples of programming these components Subsequent topics describe commonly used properties of panels and button groups and offer a simple example for each component Commonly Used Properties on page 6 44 Panel on page 6 45 Button Group on page 6 48 Commonly Used Properties The most commonly used properties needed to describe a panel or button group are shown in the following table Property Values Description Position 4 element vector distance Size of the component and from left distance from its location relative to its bottom width height parent Add Components to the GUIDE Layout Area Property Values Description Title String Component label TitlePosition lefttop centertop Location of title string in righttop leftbottom relation to the panel or centerbottom button group rightbottom Default is lefttop Units characters Units of measurement used centimeters inches normalized pixels points Default is characters to interpret the Position property vector For a complete list of properties and for more information about the properties listed in the table see the Uipanel Properties and Uibuttongroup Properties Panel To create a panel with title My
396. yout Editor toolbar click Save E or Run On the Layout Editor menu bar select the FileSave or Save as options Note GUIDE Uls cannot run correctly from a private folder Create a Backward Compatible GUIDE Fig File FIG files that are created or modified with MATLAB 7 0 or a later MATLAB version are not automatically compatible with Version 6 5 and earlier versions Perform these steps to make a FIG file backward compatible 1 From the Layout editor select File gt Preferences 2 Select MATLAB gt General gt MAT Files 3 Select MATLAB Version 5 or later save v6 Note Because button groups panels and tables were introduced in MATLAB 7 you should not use them in UIs that you expect to run in earlier MATLAB versions The v6 option will be removed in a future version of MATLAB Save a GUIDE UI Append New Callbacks to an Existing GUIDE Code File If you save a GUIDE UI to an existing file GUIDE displays a dialog box that asks you if you want to replace the existing FIG file If you click Yes GUIDE displays a dialog that asks if you want to replace the existing code file or append to it The most common choice is Replace If you choose Append GUIDE adds callbacks to the existing code file for components in the current layout that are not present within it Before you append the new components ensure that their Tag properties do not duplicate Tag values that appear in callback function names in t

MATLAB Creating Graphical User Interfaces

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents